Documenti di Didattica
Documenti di Professioni
Documenti di Cultura
Operation Manual
PLANT: CBI JOB: CBI DOC. N:
PUENTE NUEVO POWER PLANT 7.1627 7.1627-INO-001
ESITO SUPERVISIONE
Supervision Outcome
CLIENTE
Client Viesgo Grupo Enel
JOB no : M55C Doc. no. PBPNU59858
DODGE - SLEEVE OIL RTL PILLOW BLOCKS - Installation and Pag. 182
Maintenace Manual
DODGE - SLEEVE OIL RTL PILLOW BLOCKS - Manual de Instalacion
y mantenimiento
1
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 3/458
Contents
1 Receiptoffans/RecepcinVentilador...................................................................................................................4
1.1 Inspections/Recepcin..................................................................................................................................4
2 Storage....................................................................................................................................................................4
2.1 Generalrules/ElGeneralGobierna...............................................................................................................4
2.2 Boardlabelsandnameplates/CartelesEnLaMquina................................................................................5
2.3 Fanswithgreasebearings/Losventiladoresconengrasacojinetes.............................................................5
2.3.1 Maintenanceduringscheduledstop/Elmantenimientoduranteparadaprogramada....................5
2.3.2 Maintenanceduringoperation/Elmantenimientodurantelaoperacin..........................................6
2.4 Fanswithoilbearings/Losventiladoresconcojinetesaaceitelubricante...................................................6
2.4.1 Completelyassembled/Completamentereunido..............................................................................6
2.4.2 Withseparatelyshippedrotor/Conrotorseparadamenteenviado...................................................7
2.5 Fanoutage/Ventileaapagn.......................................................................................................................7
3 Handling/Manejo...................................................................................................................................................8
4 Assembly/instalacin.............................................................................................................................................8
4.1 Foundations/Cimientos.................................................................................................................................8
4.2 FansassembledbyCBI/Ventiladoresyaensamblados...............................................................................14
4.3 Fanswithseparaterotor/Ventiladoresconrotorseparados......................................................................14
4.4 Fansmountedonfoundationplinth/Ventiladoresconapoyosobreplinto...............................................15
4.5 Fanswithdampers/Ventiladoresconamortiguadores...............................................................................16
4.5.1 Rubberdampers/Amortiguadoresdegoma....................................................................................16
4.5.2 Springdampers/Amortiguadoresdemuelles...................................................................................16
4.5.2.1 assemblyanddisassemblyinstruction/asambleaeinstrucciondedesmontaje..............................18
5 Checksbeforestartup/c o n t r o l e s p r e v i o s a l a p u e s t a e n m a r c h a .........................................19
5.1 Couplingalignment/Emparejarlaalineacin.............................................................................................20
6 Startup/puestaenmarcha..................................................................................................................................21
6.1 Checks/Controles........................................................................................................................................21
6.2 Readings/Lecturas.......................................................................................................................................22
7 Lockpin/Fijacindelossoportes..........................................................................................................................23
7.1 Pillowblocklockpin/Fijacindelossoportes...............................................................................................23
8 Possibletroubles/problemasposibles.................................................................................................................23
8.1 Vibrationsofmechanicalorigin/Lasvibracionesdelorigenmecnico.......................................................23
8.1.1 Duetorotorunbalance/Desequilibriodelrodete.............................................................................23
8.1.2 Couplingmotormisalignment/DesajustedeEmparejardelmotorelctrico...................................23
8.1.3 Bearings/cojinetes.............................................................................................................................24
8.1.4 Shaftdeformation/Deformacinderbol........................................................................................24
8.1.5 Foundationscrewsloosening/Labaseenroscaaflojamiento..........................................................25
8.1.6 Loadsduetoinletandoutletducts/Lascargasdebidoaconductosdecalaysalida......................26
8.1.7 Foundations/Bases............................................................................................................................26
8.1.8 Electricmotor/motorelctrico.........................................................................................................26
8.1.9 Foreignmatters/Asuntosextranjeros..............................................................................................26
9 Aerodynamicvibrations/vibracionesaerodinamicas..........................................................................................27
10 PoorPerformance/pocorendimiento..................................................................................................................28
11 Maintenance/mantenimiento.............................................................................................................................29
11.1 Periodicalchecks/Verificaperidica...........................................................................................................29
12 Disassemblyoperations/OperacionesDeDesmontaje........................................................................................29
12.1 Rotor/Rotor.................................................................................................................................................29
12.2 Coupling/Emparejar....................................................................................................................................29
13 Tables/Tabla........................................................................................................................................................30
13.1 Torquewrenchsetting/Colocacindellaveinglesademomentodetorsin.............................................30
13.1.1 Applications/Aplicaciones................................................................................................................30
13.2 Radialinternalclearanceofsphericalrollerbearingswithtaperedbore/Elespaciolibreinternoradial
decojinetesesfricosderodilloconestrechadoaburre................................................................................................30
2
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 4/458
14 Ancillaryequipmentassemblydiagram/Montajereguladoresdecapacidadycompuertasdealetas.........33
14.1.1 Variableinletvanes/reguladoresdecapacidadaspirantes(Dapo).................................................33
14.1.2 Inletdamper/compuertasdealetas.................................................................................................34
14.1.3 Constantoillevelindicatorsforbearings/ndicadoresdenivelconstanteparasoportesdeaceite..35
15 Anomalousvibrations/vibracionesanomalas.....................................................................................................37
15.1 Causesandinterventions/Causaseintervenciones....................................................................................37
16 Documentation/documentacion.........................................................................................................................37
3
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 5/458
1 RECEIPT OF FANS / RECEPCIN VENTILADOR
2 STORAGE
Si ventiladores son al aire libre almacenados, es necesario proporciona para cubrir ellos con
medios convenientes. Si ellos son almacenados en un rea refugiada seca no cuidado particular
es requerido
4
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 6/458
2.2 Board labels and nameplates / Carteles En La
Mquina
The fan is provided with labels indicating:
En la mquina se encuentran diversos pictogramas de sealizacin, que no deben ser retirados.
When the lubrication time is approx. 8,000 hours, make maintenance during the
plant scheduled stop.
During the fan stop, remove the grease and provide to internal clean of pillow blocks
or bearing housing using suitable solvents.
During these operations check of grease seals and replace if necessary.
After this operations replace with new grease. The grease type is specified on the
assembly drawing.
5
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 7/458
2.3.2 Maintenance during operation / El mantenimiento
durante la operacin
Bearings in pillow block or bearing housing can be lubricated during fan operation.
The lubrication time is specified on the assembly drawing.
Fans with oil bearings are shipped without oil to prevent oil leakages during transport and
handling.
At receipt of fans and in any case before storing, provide for lubrication with oil type
specified on the assembly drawing.
Bearings are always equipped with constant oil level gauge and fixed oil level gauge.
Check that oil level gauge connections didnt loosen during transport and on site handling,
in this case it will has oil leakages. Provide to tighten the connections.
Bearing cavity has to be filled with oil up to the centerline of the lower roller.
This height is the static oil level marked on the oil level gauge and shown on the drawing.
This is measured from bottom of block base to meniscus on oil sight gauge (non-rotating
mode).
Considering that the oil level may drop or rise during operation, depending on the direction
of rotation of the bearing.
For this reason both static oil level and running oil level should be marked on the oil sight
gauge and properly identified, considering that normally the oil filling will be carried out
with fan in operation.
Los ventiladores con cojinetes de petrleo son enviados sin el petrleo para prevenir
mermas de petrleo durante el transporte y el manejo.
En recibo de ventiladores y en cualquier caso antes de almacenar, preve la lubricacin
con de tipo petrleo especific en el dibujo de la asamblea.
Cojinetes siempre son equipados con el calibrador constante de nivel del aceite y
calibrador fijo de nivel del aceite.
Verifique esas conexiones del calibrador de nivel del aceite no aflojaron durante el
transporte y en el manejo del sitio, en este caso hace tiene mermas de petrleo.
Proporcione para apretar las conexiones.
6
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 8/458
Soportar la cavidad tiene que ser llenada del petrleo hasta la lnea central del rodillo
ms bajo. Esta altura es el nivel del aceite constante marcado en el calibrador de nivel del
aceite y mostrado en el dibujo. Esto es medido del fondo de la base del bloque al menisco
en el petrleo el calibrador vidente (el modo de no-girando).
Teniendo en cuenta que el nivel del aceite puede dejar caer o puede subir durante la
operacin, dependiendo de la direccin de la rotacin del cojinete. Para esta razn ambos
nivel del aceite constante y nivel del aceite corriente deben ser marcados en el petrleo el
calibrador vidente y apropiadamente identificados, teniendo en cuenta que normalmente
el relleno de petrleo ser llevado a cabo con ventilador en la operacin.
Same as a.m. paragraph, with the exception of the oil level gauges that are supplied
separately; therefore they have to be assembled on site.
El prrafo mismo que anterior, a excepcin de los calibradores de nivel del aceite que son
suministrados separadamente; por lo tanto ellos tienen que ser reunidos en el sitio.
Despus de que una apagn en la planta o almacene, el lubricante (grasa o petrleo) debe
ser quitado por medio de detergentes convenientes y entonces reemplaza con nuevo
lubricante.
Los ventiladores deben ser almacenados en un cubri y seca el lugar, protegido del polvo
y la corrosin.
La almohada bloquea y soportando envoltura puede ser protegida con tapas plsticas o
graba sin sellar para prevenir la humedad adentro a los cojinetes.
La causa de la humedad daa. La temperatura de rea de tienda no debe exceder 60 C,
con humedad relativa de 80%.
El rotor debe ser girado para acerca de diez minutos para permitir cada diez das la
lubricacin homognea de cojinetes
7
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 9/458
3 HANDLING / MANEJO
4 ASSEMBLY / INSTALACIN
8
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 10/458
Diagram 1
9
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 11/458
Diagram 2 Fan with vibration isolators
on reinforced concrete foundations
No-flat and no-leveled
No- flat surface superfice non planare
surface
superficeexecution
WRONG non planare e non in execution
WRONG bolla
esecuzione ERRATA esecuzione ERRATA
10
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 12/458
El tipo de cimientos recomendado es el de cemento armado, o con estructura de acero.
En todo caso se deben calcular en funcin de la carga esttica y dinmica del ventilador, cuyos valores se
indican en el diseo del conjunto.
Para no comprometer el buen funcionamiento de la mquina, las vigas de acero, o la base de cemento
armado en la que se apoya el ventilador, deben ser niveladas y con la mxima planaridad, como se describe
a continuacin. vea los esquemas siguientes 1-2-3
Diagrama 1
Ventiladores enventilatore
base de cemento
conarmado
basesininamortiguadores
cemento armato
superfice non
superficie no planare
planar y no nivelada
superficie nonon
superfice planar
planare e ejecucin INCORRECTA
non in bolla
ejecucin INCORRECTA esecuzione ERRATA
esecuzione ERRATA
superfice planare
superficie planar pero no nivelada
superficie planar
superfice y nivelada
planare ed in bolla ma non in bolla
ejecucin CORRECTA ejecucin INCORRECTA
esecuzione CORRETTA esecuzione ERRATA
11
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 13/458
Diagrama 2
Ventiladores en base de cemento armado con amortiguadores
superfice
superficie nonon planare
planar y no nivelada
superficie nonon
planar eejecucin
non in bolla
superfice planare INCORRECTA
ejecucin INCORRECTA
esecuzione ERRATA esecuzione ERRATA
superfice planare
superficie planar y nivelada superficie planar pero no nivelada
superfice planare ed in bolla ma non in bolla
ejecucin CORRECTA ejecucin INCORRECTA
esecuzione CORRETTA esecuzione ERRATA
12
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 14/458
Diagrama 3
superfice planare
superficie planar y nivelada superficie planar pero no nivelada
superfice planare ed in bolla ma nonINCORRECTA
in bolla
ejecucin CORRECTA ejecucin
esecuzione CORRETTA esecuzione ERRATA
13
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 15/458
4.2 Fans assembled by CBI / Ventiladores ya ensamblados
Level out the fan using a centesimal water level operating on the fan shaft or coupling.
For fans with dampers see paragraph 4.5.1 and 4.5.2
Adems de la nivelacin del grupo con instrumento centesimal, tomando como referencia
el eje o el acoplamiento de transmisin, el montaje de los ventiladores ensamblados no
necesita ninguna solucin especial.
14
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 16/458
4.4 Fans mounted on foundation plinth / Ventiladores
con apoyo sobre plinto
Refer to the assembly drawing to operate in the correct way as follows:
1. Place the rotor on foundation plinth (the rotor is assembled with its bedplate), proceed to
leveling using sheetsteel shims where necessary, and fix it accurately.
2. Place the anchor bolts into the suitable holes.
3. Fill up with suitable mortar and allow drying according to the instructions contained in
packaging used.
4. Once a suitable footing form has been realized, proceed to cast the leveling mortar that must
be of excellent quality, i.e. with excellent resistance and lowest coefficient of expansion. The
leveling mortar must homogeneously fill up all free spaces around the bedplate.
5. After the time needed, tighten the bolts by means of a torque wrench.
6. Place the lower casing sector screw according the above instructions.
7. Assembly the inlet bell.
8. Check the mounting clearance indicated on the assembly drawing, i.e.:
Impeller-inlet bell (radial and axial)
Seal-shaft (radial)
9. Assembly other casing sectors
10. Tighten the bolts:
Anchor bolts
Motor fastening bolts
Bearings bolts
11. Align the coupling;
12. Assembly the ancillary equipment, if any.
Para una correcta ejecucin del montaje, referirse al diseo del conjunto y operar de la manera
siguiente:
1. Colocar el rotor en el plinto de la base (el rotor es reunido con su bedplate), contina a nivelar que
utiliza hojacalces de acero donde necesario, y lo fija exactamente.
2. Colocar los bulones de anclaje a los cimientos en los especficos puntos de anclaje
3. Llenar los puntos de anclaje con mortero idneo y dejar secar segn las instrucciones del producto.
4. Una vez realizado un adecuado encofrado, realizar la colada de mortero de nivelacin que debe ser de
ptima resistencia mecnica con un bajo coeficiente de dilatacin.
5. Una vez transcurrido el tiempo necesario, apretar los bulones de anclaje a los cimientos con llave
dinamomtrica.
6. Colocar el sector inferior de la cclea con el mismo procedimiento del apoyo
7. Montar la tobera
8. Comprobar los juegos de montaje indicados en el diseo del conjunto, y precisamente:
Rodete-tobera (radial y axial)
Junta de estanqueidad-eje (radial)
9. Montar los sectores de cclea restantes.
10. Efectuar el apriete de los bulones:
de anclaje a los cimientos
motor
soportes
11. Alinear acoplamiento de transmisin
13. Montar eventuales accesorios.
15
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 17/458
4.5 Fans with dampers / Ventiladores con amortiguadores
These dampers are usually mounted on fan baseframe. In this case no special care is
necessary.
It is very important that the foundation is according to specified in diagrams of
paragraph 4.1.
These dampers are usually mounted on fan baseframe. In this case no special care is
necessary.
When the spring dampers are shipped separately, they are ready to assembly them on
fan baseframe, as shown on the following diagram.
16
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 18/458
Diagram 4
Dampers supplied separately. Position marking
marca de la posicin
contrassegno per lade los amortiguadores
posizione cuando se suministran
degli ammortizzatori
quando vengono
separadamente fornitialseparatamente
respecto ventilador
al ventilatore
Fastening screw between aluminium
section bar and fanper
viteria frame
bloccaggio profilo
tornillos para fijard'alluminio
el perfil de aluminio
al telaio al
ventilatore
bastidor del ventilador
Screws
viteria per for damper longitudinal translation
lo scorrimento
tornillos para eldegli
longitudinale deslizamiento longitudinal de los amortiguadores
ammortizzatori
Anchor
bulloni bolts
di fondazione
bulones de anclaje a los cimientos
17
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 19/458
4.5.2.1 ASSEMBLY AND DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTION /
ASAMBLEA E INSTRUCCION DE DESMONTAJE
In case that the electric motor is not delivered to CBI in account of manufacture and
therefore mounted on site, the assembly of dampers is simplified by the geometry of
the aluminium section bar that allows the longitudinal translation.
After assembly of dampers, place the fan on foundation and check that the height of
each damper corresponds to or is within the tolerance limit indicated in the assembly
drawing.
Lift the fan and correct the damper position up to optimization of set height values.
Transport
tiranti fastening
di bloccaggio tie rods. Remove after in site
presenti
assembly
per il trasporto,
datirantes de fijacin
eliminare presentes
durante il para el transporte, a eliminar durante el
montaje en in
montaggio la obra
cantiere
Screws
viteria forscorrimento
per lo damper longitudinal translation
tornillos para el
longitudinale deslizamiento longitudinal de los amortiguadores
degli
ammortizzatori
bulloni di fondazione
Anchor bolts
bulones de anclaje a los cimientos
18
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 20/458
5 CHECKS BEFORE STARTUP / CONTROLES PREVIOS A LA
PUESTA EN MARCHA
19
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 21/458
10. Aplicar en los soportes los accesorios de los que est dotado.
11. Prestar especial atencin al montaje del grupo aceitador de nivel constante (cuando se
suministra separado por motivos de transporte)
12. Verifique la presencia de lubricantes en los cojinetes.
13. Retirar eventuales cuerpos extraos que se encuentren en la cclea.
14. Cerrar las puertecillas
15. Comprobar la correcta apertura y cierre de compuertas, reguladores de caudal.
16. Controlar la correcta colocacin de los finales de carrera
17. Asegurarse de que todas las partes rotatorias, o donde est previsto, estn dotadas de
proteccin
18. Asegurarse de que los conductos sobre la aspiracin e impulsin no afecten el ventilador, y
que los acoplamientos antivibracin que se encuentran en las bocas permitan la eventual
dilatacin.
19. Comprobar el sentido de rotacin del motor con eventuales ruedas libres desactivadas
20. Activar las eventuales ruedas libres
Durante el control de la rotacin prestar atencin a que no se produzca ningn ruido extrao o
irregularidad; en caso contrario intervenir para solucionar el problema indicado en el captulo 8.
Verifica el apretar correcto de todos componentes, es decir el apretar del motor elctrico, de
cojinetes, de los sellos de tnel, y de cerrojos de ancla antes del llevar a cabo la alineacin
final.
La alineacin tiene que ser llevada a cabo como especificado en la asamblea que dibuja o
encerr la documentacin.
20
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 22/458
6 STARTUP / PUESTA EN MARCHA
1. En caso de que no estn previstos en la mquina los instrumentos para el control de velocidad,
temperatura y vibraciones, es oportuno tener a disposicin instrumentos porttiles.
2. Recomienda las canillas de la presin de soldadura ro arriba y ro abajo el conducto de ventilador,
las canillas posicionan ser accesible a un Pitot atraviesa tubo para medir el flujo, cundo necesario.
3. Una vez que se haya comprobado que todos los controles dan un resultado positivo, proceder a la
puesta en marcha
3. Measurement of:
Flowrate
Pressure
Fluid temperature
Rpm
Absorbed power
Compare the values with fan characteristic curve.
21
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 23/458
Despus de la puesta en marcha efectuar los siguientes controles:
1. Vibraciones en los soportes: horizontal-vertical-axial, segn tablas COAER 109, o ISO 14695.
2. Temperatura cojinetes ( mx. 90 C, medida en la superficie de los soportes).
Despus de una fase de aumento, la temperatura de los cojinetes debe estabilizarse en los valores
nominales 90 C, medidos en la caja del soporte con un instrumento adecuado.
Si los valores de vibracin y temperatura encontrados no son satisfacientes, detener la mquina,
identificar las causas y eliminar las anomalas. Vea el prrafo 8.
Una vez que las operaciones necesarias han sido hechas, continen a nuevo inicio de ventilador.
3. La medida de:
a. la cantidad de aire
b. la Presin
c. la temperatura
d. velocidad de rotacin
e. Absorbi el poder Compara los valores con ventilador curva tpica
Los valores de vibraciones y temperatura tienen que ser registrados cada diez minutos
por lo menos por una hora
22
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 24/458
7 LOCKPIN / FIJACIN DE LOS SOPORTES
Despus de varias puestas en marcha y controles finales, incluida la comprobacin de alineacin del
acoplamiento o de la transmisin por correas, efectuar la fijacin de los soportes que se debe realizar
despus de un perodo de funcionamiento de 24 horas.
Clean the impeller / Controlar que no haya polvo u otros materiales sobre las
partes rotativas.
Check impeller structural condition and if necessary, repair it or replace the
impeller / Controlar erosin o corrosin del rodete, si el rodete est seriamente
daado debe ser sustituido.
Balance the rotor / Equilibre el rotor.
Check the tightness of electric motor and pillow block (or bearing housing) bolts /
Verifique la estrechez del bloque motor elctrico y la almohada (o soportando
envoltura) cerrojos.
Check the tightness of coupling bolts / Verifique la estrechez de emparejar
cerrojos.
Proceed to realignment / Emparejar la alineacin.
Proceed to bearings and motor lockpin / Fijacin de los soportes y motor elctrico
23
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 25/458
8.1.3 Bearings/ cojinetes
Verifique lo Siguiente:
La Condicin de rodillos o pelotas, y compite.
Los espacios libres radiales Residuales segn las mesas del fabricante de cojinetes; vea
el prrafo 13,2.
Liberta cojinete debe deslizar sin dificultad.
La Lubricacin. El bloque de Almohada o soportar la casa que nivela.
La Estrechez de bloques de almohada (o soportando envoltura) cerrojos con la llave
inglesa del momento de torsin segn los valores indicados en las mesas del prrafo
13,1
24
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 26/458
Impossibility of correct bearing slide; check that the free bearing can slide without
difficulty.
Loosening of pillow block (or bearing housing), electric motor, and bedplate bolts.
Shifting of the electric motor shims or fan bedplate shims.
Shaft seals friction.
Check the tightness according to the values indicated in table 1, paragraph 13.1.
The tightness difficulty may be due to the shifting of plates used for the leveling or to
foundation settling.
Take the necessary measures.
25
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 27/458
8.1.6 Loads due to inlet and outlet ducts / Las cargas
debido a conductos de cala y salida
Inlet and outlet ducts must not force the fan position and the flexible connections must
work in suitable way to prevent vibration and noise transmission.
Settling and formation foundations supporting the fan may cause vibrations. Check the
foundations and take proper measures, if necessary.
Asentar y bases de formacin que apoya el ventilador puede causar las vibraciones.
Verifique las bases y tome las medidas apropiadas, si necesario
26
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 28/458
9 AERODYNAMIC VIBRATIONS / VIBRACIONES
AERODINAMICAS
These vibrations usually change with fan and/or circuit characteristics and may be
caused by:
Resonance of ducts at definite flowrates.
Sudden section variations.
Unfit duct stiffenings transmit vibrations to the fan casing and consequently to the
impeller and bearings.
Provide to stiffening as necessary.
Some of above-mentioned troubles could make difficult to determine the cause and find
proper measures.
Contact CBI for assistance.
27
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 29/458
10 POOR PERFORMANCE / POCO RENDIMIENTO
The performance must always refer to the fan design point and circuit design point.
Record the following parameters:
Rpm
Flow temperature
Barometric pressure
Relative humidity
Dampers setup
Static pressure upstream and downstream of the fan, in an place without
turbulences
Absorbed power
The records shall be repeated several times changing the circuit resistance, for instance,
changing the dampers setup when the other parameters unchanged.
Compare the obtained results with fan characteristic curves.
El rendimiento siempre debe referirse al punto del diseo del ventilador y el punto del
diseo del circuito.
Registre los parmetros siguientes:
velocidad de rotacin
la temperatura del Flujo
la presin Baromtrica
humedad Relativa
arreglo de Amortiguadores
la presin Constante ro arriba y ro abajo del ventilador, en un lugar sin
turbulencias
Absorbi el poder que
Los registros sern repetidos varias veces cambiando la resistencia de circuito, por
ejemplo cambiando el arreglo de amortiguadores cuando los otros parmetros iguales.
Compare los resultados obtenidos con ventilador curvas tpicas.
Los valores diferentes deben ser encontrados debido a las razones siguientes:
La rotacin Equivocada de impeller.
Reunir Equivocado de amortiguador de cala (verifica la posicin de hojas). Vea el
prrafo 14.1.2.
28
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 30/458
11 MAINTENANCE / MANTENIMIENTO
29
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 31/458
13 TABLES / TABLA
For the other elements that are part of CBIs supply but of external supply, the
instructions contained in the manufacturer catalogues have to be followed.
Para los otros elementos que forman parte del suministro de CBI pero del
suministro externo, las instrucciones contenidas en los catlogos del fabricante tienen
que ser seguidas.
30
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 32/458
Tab. 1
Material class / Clase material
Torque wrench setting [Nm]
Colocacin de llave inglesa de momento de
torsin [Nm]
Screw 8.8 10.9 12.9
8 24 34 41
10 50 70 84
12 90 127 153
16 214 302 362
18 308 434 520
20 431 607 728
24 731 1030 1230
27 1070 1500 1800
30 1480 2080 2490
Tab. 2
SN bearings 1 torque [Nm] 2 torque [Nm] Monobloc 3 torque [Nm]
Soportes SN torsin torsin torsin
513 80 220 P0-30 80
515 80 220 P1-35 150
516 80 430 P2-45 200
517 80 430 P3-55 300
518 150 430 P4-65 430
519 150 430 P1-35L 150
520 200 750 P2-45L 200
522 200 750 R1-40 150
524 200 750 R2-55 200
526 350 750 R3-65 300
528 350 1400 R4-80 430
530 350 1400
532 350 1400
31
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 33/458
Tab. 3
SND bearings 1 torque [Nm] 2 torque [Nm]
Soportes SND torsin torsin
513 81 220
515 81 220
516 203 430
517 203 430
518 203 430
519 203 430
520 415 750
522 415 750
524 415 750
526 415 750
528 720 1400
530 720 1400
532 720 1400
The radial internal clearance of spherical roller with tapered bore is expressed in m.
For other types of bearings, see the manufacturer tables.
Los juegos radiales residuales expresados en m, para cojinetes de rodillos con orificio cnico se
indican en la tabla siguiente.
juego residual
giu
oc
o re
sid
uo
Tab. 4
Hole Normal Normal
C3 C3
orificio Juego normal Juego normal
Over mm Up to mm Min. m Max. m Min. m Max. m
50 65 55 75 75 95
65 80 70 95 95 120
80 100 80 110 110 140
100 120 100 135 135 170
120 140 120 160 160 200
140 160 130 180 180 230
32
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 34/458
14 ANCILLARY EQUIPMENT ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM /
MONTAJE REGULADORES DE CAPACIDAD Y COMPUERTAS DE ALETAS
orientamento 9 16
Open /
abierto
aperto
chiuso
Closed
cerrado
chiuso
aperto
Closed
cerrado
33
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 35/458
14.1.2 Inlet damper/ compuertas de aletas
orientamento
Fan orientation /1orientacin
8 18
Closed
chiuso
closed
cerrado
aperto
Open /
abierto
Open
a
/
p
abiertoerto
chiuso
Closed
cerrado
34
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 36/458
14.1.3 Constant oil level indicators for bearings/ ndicadores
de nivel constante para soportes de aceite
The constant oil level indicator supplied by CBI is with safety cage type.
Assembly the level correctly observing the A and B dimensions and applying the
Teflon tape on all the threads.
Fill it with oil according to the values indicated in the assembly drawing and as
described in picture 1.
The B dimension must correspond to the dimension indicated in the assembly
drawing; if not, act on the connection pipes until the nominal values are reached.
It is possible to check the B dimension on the square level indicator.
An excessive oil quantity may cause leakages from the seals as well as a bearing
temperature rise.
Once the correct indicator position has been checked, the perfect tightening of all
components has to be checked again, so as to prevent the accidental loosening during the
fan handling.
Check the tightening of locking squares on the level connection pipes.
Montar correctamente el grupo, respetando las cotas A-B, y colocando cinta de tefln en todas las
roscas de las piezas pequeas.
Llenar con aceite respetando los valores indicados en el diseo del conjunto y de la manera
indicada en la figura.
La cota B debe corresponder a la indicada en el diseo del conjunto; en caso contrario, actuar
sobre los tubos de racor hasta alcanzar los valores nominales.
Por comodidad se puede comprobar la cota B en el indicador de nivel de escuadra.
Una excesiva cantidad de aceite causa la salida del mismo de las uniones estancas y el aumento
de la temperatura de los cojinetes.
Una vez comprobada la correcta posicin del indicador, controlar el perfecto apriete de todos los
componentes, de manera que evite el aflojamiento incluso casual durante el desplazamiento de la
mquina.
Comprobar el apriete de las escuadras de bloqueo en los tubos de conexin del indicador.
35
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 37/458
Posicin aceitador respecto a la
rotacin
Oil level delindicator
rodete visto desde el
position
ladoposizione
motor to
according oliatore rispetto
fan rotation
alla rotazione girante
Drive end
visto lato view
motore
90
90
B A B A
Bracket / estribo de
B 7 A
36
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 38/458
15 ANOMALOUS VIBRATIONS / VIBRACIONES ANOMALAS
16 DOCUMENTATION / DOCUMENTACION
37
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 39/458
WEG - ELECTRIC MOTOR
Installation and Maintenace Manual
Transforming energy
into solutions
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 41/458
THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
FOREWORD
The electric motor is the equipment widely used by man in the industrial development as most of
the machines he has been inventing depend on it.
Taking into consideration the prominent role the electric motor plays on people's life, it must be
regarded as a prime power unit embodying features that require special care including its installation and
maintenance in order to ensure perfect operation and longer life to the unit.
Its installation and maintenance demand specific cares, to guarantee the perfect functioning and
longer life to the motor.
The installation and maintenance manual for LOW AND HIGH VOLTAGE THREE-PHASE
INDUCTION MOTORS intends to assist those who deal with electric machines facilitating their task to
preserve the most important item of the unit:
9300.0009 I/8
November 2006
Doc. PBPNU5999001
2 Pag. 42/458
THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
INDEX
1. INTRODUCTION.......................................................................................................................................................................6
2. GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS.......................................................................................................................................................7
2.1. SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS................................................................................................................................................ 7
2.2. UNPACKING.................................................................................................................................................................. 7
2.3. STORAGE ..................................................................................................................................................................... 7
2.3.1. INDOOR STORAGE......................................................................................................................................... 7
2.3.2. OUTDOOR STORAGE...................................................................................................................................... 7
2.3.3. VERTICAL MOTORS STORAGE......................................................................................................................... 8
2.3.4. OTHER CARES DURING STORAGE................................................................................................................... 8
2.3.5. INSULATION RESISTANCE.............................................................................................................................. 8
2.3.6. POLARIZATION INDEX ................................................................................................................................... 9
2.4. PROLONGED STORAGE ............................................................................................................................................... 10
2.4.1. INTRODUCTION........................................................................................................................................... 10
2.4.2. GENERALITIES............................................................................................................................................. 10
2.4.3. STORAGE PLACE .......................................................................................................................................... 10
2.4.3.1. INTERNAL STORAGE...................................................................................................................... 10
2.4.3.2. EXTERNAL STORAGE ..................................................................................................................... 11
2.4.5. SPARE PARTS .............................................................................................................................................. 11
2.4.6. SPACE HEATER ............................................................................................................................................ 11
2.4.7. INSULATION RESISTANCE............................................................................................................................ 11
2.4.8. EXPOSED MACHINED SURFACES................................................................................................................... 11
2.4.9. BEARINGS ................................................................................................................................................... 12
2.4.9.1. ANTIFRICTION BEARING LUBRICATED BY GREASE ......................................................................... 12
2.4.9.2. ANTIFRICTION BEARING LUBRICATED BY OIL................................................................................ 12
2.4.9.3. SLEEVE BEARING .......................................................................................................................... 12
2.4.10. BRUSHES................................................................................................................................................... 12
2.4.11. CONNECTION BOX: .................................................................................................................................... 13
2.4.12. PREPARATION FOR SERVICE AFTER LONG TERM STORAGE ......................................................................... 13
2.4.12.1. CLEANING................................................................................................................................... 13
2.4.12.2. BEARINGS LUBRICATION............................................................................................................. 13
2.4.12.3. ISOLATION RESISTANCE VERIFICATION....................................................................................... 13
2.4.12.4. OTHER........................................................................................................................................ 13
2.4.13. MAINTENANCE PLAN FOR STORAGE............................................................................................................ 14
2.5. HANDLING ................................................................................................................................................................. 15
2.5.1. HANDLING H LINE MOTORS ...................................................................................................................... 15
2.5.2. HANDLING M LINE MOTORS...................................................................................................................... 15
2.5.3. VERTICAL MOTORS HANDLING..................................................................................................................... 16
2.5.4. VERTICAL MOTORS POSITIONING ................................................................................................................ 16
3. INSTALLATION ......................................................................................................................................................................17
3.1. MECHANICAL ASPECTS ............................................................................................................................................... 17
3.1.1. MOUNTING.................................................................................................................................................. 17
3.1.2. FOUNDATIONS ............................................................................................................................................ 17
3.1.2.1. TYPES OF BASES........................................................................................................................... 18
3.1.3. ALIGNMENT/LEVELING................................................................................................................................. 20
3.1.4. COUPLINGS ................................................................................................................................................. 21
3.1.4.1. COUPLING ARRANGEMENT FOR SLEEVE BEARING MOTORS - AXIAL CLEARANCE ............................. 22
3.2. ELECTRICAL ASPECTS................................................................................................................................................. 23
3.2.1. SUPPLY SYSTEM........................................................................................................................................... 23
3.2.2. CONNECTION .............................................................................................................................................. 23
3.2.3. GENERAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS.............................................................................................................. 24
3.2.4. CONNECTION DIAGRAMS FOR STATORS AND ROTORS.................................................................................. 25
3.2.4.1. CONNECTION DIAGRAMS FOR STATORS AND ROTORS (Standard IEC 60034-8)............................... 25
3.2.4.2. CONNECTION DIAGRAMS FOR STATORS AND ROTORS (Standard NEMA MG1)................................. 26
3.2.5. ACCESSORIES CONNECTION DIAGRAMS....................................................................................................... 27
3.2.6. ELECTRICAL MOTORS STARTING.................................................................................................................. 29
3.2.6.1. STARTING SQUIRREL-CAGE MOTOR............................................................................................ 29
3.2.6.2. FREQUENCY OF DIRECT STARTINGS.............................................................................................. 29
3.2.6.3. LOCKED ROTOR CURRENT (Ip/In).................................................................................................. 29
3.2.6.4. STARTING OF SLIP RING MOTORS WITH RHEOSTAT...................................................................... 29
3.2.7. MOTOR PROTECTION................................................................................................................................... 30
3.2.7.1. TEMPERATURE LIMITS FOR WINDINGS.......................................................................................... 30
3.2.7.2. SPACE HEATERS............................................................................................................................ 32
3.2.7.3. VIBRATION LIMITS........................................................................................................................ 32
3.2.7.4. SHAFT VIBRATION LIMITS............................................................................................................. 32
Doc. PBPNU5999001
3 Pag. 43/458
THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
3.3. COMMISSIONING........................................................................................................................................................ 33
3.3.1. PRELIMINARY INSPECTION .......................................................................................................................... 33
3.3.2. START-UP.................................................................................................................................................... 33
3.3.3. OPERATION................................................................................................................................................. 34
3.3.4. SHUTDOWN PROCEDURE ............................................................................................................................. 34
3.4. ACOUSTICAL PROPERTIES.......................................................................................................................................... 34
3.5. MOTOR USED ON HAZARDOUS AREA EXPLOSIVE GAS ATMOSPHERES.......................................................................... 34
3.5.1. GENERAL CARE WITH HAZARDOUS LOCATION MOTORS................................................................................ 35
3.5.2. ADDITIONAL CARE RECOMMENDED FOR HAZARDOUS LOCATION MOTORS.................................................... 35
4. MAINTENANCE.......................................................................................................................................................................36
4.1. CLEANLINESS............................................................................................................................................................. 36
4.1.1. PARTIAL CLEANING...................................................................................................................................... 36
4.1.2. COMPLETE CLEANING .................................................................................................................................. 36
4.2. LUBRICATION............................................................................................................................................................. 37
4.2.1. GREASE LUBRICATED BEARINGS .................................................................................................................. 37
4.2.1.1. LUBRICATION INTERVALS ............................................................................................................. 37
4.2.1.2. TYPE AND AMOUNT OF GREASE..................................................................................................... 40
4.2.1.3. QUALITY AND QUANTITY OF GREASE ............................................................................................ 40
4.2.1.4. COMPATIBILITY ............................................................................................................................ 40
4.2.1.5. LUBRICATING INSTRUCTIONS ....................................................................................................... 41
4.2.1.6. BEARING LUBRICATION STEPS ...................................................................................................... 41
4.2.1.7. SPRING DEVICE FOR GREASE REMOVAL......................................................................................... 41
4.2.1.8. REPLACEMENT OF BEARINGS......................................................................................................... 42
4.2.2. ANTIFRICTION BEARIGS LUBRICATED BY GREASE VERTICAL MOTORS ....................................................... 42
4.2.2.1. CHARACTERISTICS........................................................................................................................ 42
4.2.2.2. RELUBRICATION STEPS................................................................................................................. 42
4.2.2.3. DISASSEMBLY / ASSEMBLY OPPOSITE DRIVE-END BEARING ........................................................ 43
4.2.2.4. DISASSEMBLY / ASSEMBLY DRIVE-END BEARING......................................................................... 44
4.2.3. ANTIFRICTION BEARING LUBRICATED BY OIL............................................................................................... 45
4.2.3.1. LUBRICATION INSTRUCTIONS....................................................................................................... 45
4.2.3.2. BEARING OPERATION.................................................................................................................... 45
4.2.3.3. THERMAL PROTECTIONS SETTING................................................................................................. 45
4.2.3.4. BEARING MAINTENANCE ............................................................................................................... 46
4.2.4. SLEEVE BEARINGS ....................................................................................................................................... 47
4.2.4.1. GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS.............................................................................................................. 48
4.2.4.2. DISASSEMBLY OF THE SLEEVE BEARING SYSTEM (TYPE "EF")......................................................... 48
4.2.4.3. SLEEVE BEARING ASSEMBLY.......................................................................................................... 49
4.2.4.4. SETTING OF THERMAL PROTECTIONS (PT100)............................................................................... 49
4.2.4.5. WATER COOLING SYSTEM ............................................................................................................. 50
4.2.4.6. LUBRICATION ............................................................................................................................... 50
4.2.4.7. SHAFT SEALS................................................................................................................................ 50
4.2.4.8. OPERATION .................................................................................................................................. 51
4.3. AIR GAP CHECKING (LARGE ODP MOTORS) .................................................................................................................... 51
4.4. SLIP RINGS (FOR SLIP RING MOTORS) ............................................................................................................................. 51
4.5. BRUSH-HOLDERS AND BRUSHES (FOR WOUND ROTOR MOTORS)......................................................................................... 51
4.5.1. SHAFT GROUNDING DEVICE......................................................................................................................... 52
4.6. LIFTABLE BRUSH HOLDERS......................................................................................................................................... 53
4.6.1. CONNECTION DIAGRAM............................................................................................................................... 53
4.6.2. PROCEDURE FOR MOTOR STARTING ............................................................................................................ 55
4.6.3. PROCEDURE AFTER MOTOR STARTING......................................................................................................... 55
4.6.4. ASSEMBLY ................................................................................................................................................... 57
4.6.4.1. BRUSH HOLDER LIFTING DEVICE................................................................................................... 57
4.6.4.2. SHORT-CIRCUIT BUSHING MOVEMENT SET.................................................................................... 58
4.6.4.3. BRUSH HOLDER OPERATION SET................................................................................................... 58
4.6.4.3. BRUSH HOLDER OPERATION SET................................................................................................... 59
4.6.4.4. RETURN PIN SET........................................................................................................................... 60
4.6.4.5. BRUSH HOLDER SET...................................................................................................................... 60
4.6.5. DISASSEMBLY.............................................................................................................................................. 61
4.6.6. BRUSHES LIFTING SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT ..................................................................................................... 61
4.7. DRYING OF THE WINDINGS........................................................................................................................................ 61
4.8. DESMANTLING AND REASSEMBLY ............................................................................................................................... 61
4.8.1. " MASTER" LINE........................................................................................................................................... 61
4.8.1.1. ROTOR REMOVING........................................................................................................................ 62
4.8.2. A LINE......................................................................................................................................................... 62
4.8.3. F LINE ......................................................................................................................................................... 62
4.8.4. H LINE......................................................................................................................................................... 63
4.8.5. TIGHTENING TORQUES FOR SCREWS........................................................................................................... 64
Doc. PBPNU5999001
4 Pag. 44/458
THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
Doc. PBPNU5999001
5 Pag. 45/458
THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
1. INTRODUCTION
IMPORTANT:
This manual concerns all Weg three-
phase asynchronous squirrel cage
and slip ring motors. Motors with
specialties can be supplied with
specific documents (drawings, connection
diagram, characteristic curves). These
documents must be carefully evaluated together
with this manual, before proceeding the
installation, operation or maintenance of the
motor.
For motors built with high number of special
features, contact WEG whenever an additional
support is required.
All standard and procedures included in this
manual must be followed accordingly to ensure a
proper operation to the equipment as well as to
ensure safety conditions to the personnel involved
in the motor operation.
Following these procedures is also important for
the warranty policy as explained at the end of this
manual.
Therefore, we strongly recommend to any user of
Weg motors to read carefully this manual before
motor installation and operation. In case you still
have further doubts, please contact WEG.
Doc. PBPNU5999001
6 Pag. 46/458
THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
Doc. PBPNU5999001
7 Pag. 47/458
THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
Doc. PBPNU5999001
8 Pag. 48/458
THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
Doc. PBPNU5999001
9 Pag. 49/458
THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
The instructions for long term storage described In order to provide the best storage conditions
as follow are valid for motors to be long term to the motor during long standstill periods, the
stored and/or long periods of standstill before storage location should obey rigorously the
the commissioning. criteria described as follow:
The existing tendency, especially during the - Closed storage room with roof;
construction of the plant, of storing the motors - The location must be protected against
for several years before commissioning or to humidity, vapors, aggressive fumes discharge,
install immediately some units, results that the fast heat changes, gnawing and insects.
motors are exposed to influences that cannot be - It must not present corrosive gases such as
evaluated in advance for this time's period. chlorine, sulfur dioxide or acid;
It is difficult to evaluate the different forms of - It must not present continuous or intermittent
stress (atmospheric, chemical, thermal, and severe vibrations.
mechanic) imposed to the motor, which might - To have ventilation system with filter;
happen during storage maneuvers, assembly, - It must not present quickly changes of
initial tests and storage until the temperature;
commissioning. - Ambient temperature (5 C, > t < 60 C) and
Other essential factor is the transportation, for must not present quickly changes of
example, the general contractor may transport temperature;
the motor or the complete unit with motor as - Relative air humidity < 50%;
joint transportation to the installation location. - To have prevention against dirt and dust
The motor internal gaps (air gap, bearings and deposits;
interior of connection box) are exposed to the - To have fire detection system.
atmospheric air and temperature fluctuations. - Electrical supply for space heater and
Due to the air humidity, it is possible the liquid illumination must be provided;
condensation and, depending on the kind and If some of these requisites do not be attended
air contamination degree, aggressive substances by the storage environment, WEG suggests that
may penetrate into these spaces. additional protections be incorporated in the
As a consequence after long periods, the motor packing during the storage period, like
internal components such as the bearings might follows:
get rust, the insulation resistance can decrease - Closed wooden or similar box with electrical
to under the admissible values and the grease installation, enable to the space heaters
lubricant capacity in the bearings is adversely supply;
affected. This influence increases the damage - Closed wooden box or similar with installation
risk before commissioning of the plant. that allows the space heaters be energized;
- If there is a risk of fungus infestation and
To keep manufacturer's warranty, should formation, the packing must be protected in
be insured that the described preventive the storage location by spraying or painting it
measures in this instructions, as: with appropriated chemical agents.
constructive aspects, preservation, - Preparation of packing must be done with
packing, storage and inspections, be greatest care by an experienced person. A
followed and registered. reliable packing company must take over of
the packing.
10
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 50/458
THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
The outdoor storage of the motor is not - During the storage period, the winding
recommended. insulation resistance of the motor should be
If the external storage cannot be avoided, the measured according to item 2.3.5 of this
motor should be packed in specific packing for manual and registered every 3 months and
this condition, as described bellow. before the motor installation.
- For outdoor storage, besides the packing - Eventual drops in the insulation resistance
recommended above, we recommend to cover level must be investigated.
completely this packing with a protection
against dust, humidity and other strange
materials. 2.4.8. EXPOSED MACHINED SURFACES
- Place the packing in pallets, wooden bunches
or foundations that guarantee the protection - At factory, all exposed surfaces (for example,
against the soil humidity. the shaft edge and flanges) are protected with
- Prevent the packing sink itself in the soil. a temporary protective agent (rust inhibiter).
- After covering the machine, a shed should be - This protective coating should be reapplied
build to protect it of rain, snow and excessive every 6 months at least. When this coating is
sun heat. removed and/or damaged, the same
preventive action must be done.
IMPORTANT
It is recommendable check the storage local Recommended products:
conditions and the motors condition according to Name: Dasco Guard 400 TX AZ, Manufacturer:
the maintenance plan for long term storage, D.A. Stuart Ltda.
described in this manual. Name: TARP, Manufacturer: Castrol.
11
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 51/458
THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
2.4.9. BEARINGS
2.4.9.1. ANTIFRICTION BEARING If is not possible to rotate the shaft of the motor,
LUBRICATED BY GREASE the follow procedure should be used to protect
internally the bearing and the contact surfaces
The bearings are lubricated in the factory for against corrosion:
make the motor tests. - Drain the whole bearing oil;
During the storage period, every two months is - Dismantle the bearing, following the procedure
necessary to remove the shaft brake device and described in the item 4.2.4.2 of this manual;
turn the shaft manually to conserve the bearing in - Clean the bearing;
good conditions. - Apply the anti-corrosive (ex.: TECTIL 511,
After 6 months of storage and before starting in Valvoline or Dasco Guard 400TXAZ) in the
operation, the bearings should be regreased, as bearing, bearing line (top and bottom half)
item 4.2.1.5 of this manual. and in the shaft contact surface of the motor;
If motor is kept in storage for approximately 2 - Assemble the bearing, following the procedure
years or more, the bearings must be inspected described in the item 4.2.4.3 of this manual;
and regreased according to item 4.2 of this - Close all tapped holes with screw plugs;
manual. - Seal the gaps between the shaft and bearing
seal and between bearing seal and bearing
housing by using self-adhesive permanent
2.4.9.2. ANTIFRICTION BEARING tape;
LUBRICATED BY OIL - Connecting flanges (Ex.: Oil inlet and outlet)
must be covered with blank plates.
- Depending on the position, the motor can be - Remove the bearing top sight glass and spray
transported with or without oil in your the corrosion inhibitor on the bearing.
bearings. - Put some desiccant (silica gel) inside of the
- The motor must be stored in its original bearing. The desiccant absorbs the humidity
position of operation and with oil in the and prevents the formation of moisture and
bearings; water condensation inside the bearing.
- The oil level should be respected, remaining in - Close the bearing tightly with the top sight
the half the oil sight glass. glass.
During the storage period, every two months is
necessary to remove the shaft brake device and In case the standstill period is longer then 6
turn the shaft manually to conserve the bearing in months:
good conditions. - Repeat the procedures described above.
After 6 months of storage and before starting in - Replace the desiccant (silica gel) into the
operation, the bearings should be relubricated, as bearing each six months.
item 4.2.3.1 of this manual.
If motor is kept in storage for approximately 2 In case the standstill period is longer than 2
years or more, the bearings must be inspected years:
and relubricated according to item 4.2 of this - Dismantle the bearing;
manual. - Preserve and store the bearing parts.
- Depending on the position, the motor can be - The brushes of the slip rings motors should be
transported with or without oil in your lifted in the brush-holder, because should not
bearings; remain in contact with the slip-rings during the
- The motor must be stored in its original storage period, avoiding thus the slip-rings
position of operation and with oil in the oxidation.
bearings; - Before the motor installation and
- The oil level should be respected, remaining in commissioning, the brushes should come back
the half the oil sight glass; to the original position.
- During the storage period, every two months is
necessary to remove the shaft brake device
and rotate at about 30 rpm for the oil
circulation and to conserve the bearing in good
conditions.
12
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 52/458
THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
2.4.12.1. CLEANING
13
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 53/458
THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
During the storage period, the motor maintenance must be executed and registered according to the plan
described in the table below:
14
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 54/458
THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
H LINE
Notes:
1) Lifting lugs on the frame are designed for
lifting machine only. Do not use for lifting
coupled equipment such as pumps,
compressors, gears or other equipment;
2) The chains or handles of hoisting must
have on maximum angle of 30 with
regard to vertical line:
3) Use all of eyebolts fixed in the frame,
supplied together with the motor;
4) Failure to observe these precautions may Notes:
result in damage to the equipment, injury 1) Do not the motor by the heat exchanger;
to personnel or both. 2) Lifting without heat exchanger;
3) If gravity center is not exactly in the
middle of the lifting lugs, use one of the
ways as per item 3.
15
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 55/458
THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
16
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 56/458
THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
Electric motors should be installed in locations of The motor base must be level and free from
easy access for inspection and maintenance. If vibrations. For this reason, concrete foundation is
the surrounding atmosphere contains humid, recommended.
corrosive or flammable substances or particles, it The type of base to be built will depend on the
is essential to ensure an adequate degree of nature of the soil at the installation site or on the
protection. The installation of motors in ambient floor capacity.
where there are vapours, gases or dusts, When designing the motor foundation, it must be
flammable or combustible materials, subject to taken into consideration the fact that the motor
fire or explosion, should be done in accordance might, occasionally, be submitted to a torque
with ABNT NBR, NEC Art. 500 (National Electrical higher than the rated torque. If such designing is
Code) and UL-674 (Underwriters Laboratories, not correctly made, vibration problems can occur
Inc.) Standard. to the unit (foundation, motor and driven
Under no circumstances, motors can be enclosed machine).
in boxes or covered with materials which may
impede or reduce the free circulation of cooling NOTE: On the concrete base, a metallic plate to
air. Motors fitted with external cooling must be support the leveling bolt must be provided.
located at least 50mm from the ground to permit
free air circulation. The air inlet and outlet should Based on figure 3.1, the forces over the
never be obstructed or reduced by conductors, foundation can be calculated by the following
pipes or other objects. The installation site should formulas:
permit conditions of air renewal at a rate of 30m (4C max)
per minute for each 100kW motor output.
F1 = +0.5.m.g . +
( A)
(4C max)
F2 = +0.5.m.g.
3.1. MECHANICAL ASPECTS ( A)
Where:
3.1.1. MOUNTING F1 and F2 - Forces on the base (N).
g - Gravity acceleration (9.81m/s).
In order to ensure the adequate operation, in m - Motor mass (kg).
additional to a stable foundation, the motor must Cmax - Breakdown torque (Nm).
be precisely aligned with the coupled equipment A - Taken from motor dimensional drawing (m).
and the components mounted on the shaft end
must be adequately balanced.
Notice:
With the machine mounted and coupled, the
relation between the foundation natural frequency
and:
- The motor speed frequency;
- The double speed frequency;
- The double line frequency.
Foundation natural frequency of higher order: NOTE: The drawing above shows the forces over
- +10% or -10% in relation to the above the motor when running clockwise. For counter
frequencies. clockwise rotation, forces are reversed (F1, F2,
4.Cmax.).
17
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 57/458
THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
Steel or iron blocks, plane surfaces blocks with 3.1.2.1. TYPES OF BASES
anchorage devices can be fitted in the concrete
foundation to fix the motor feet as suggested in a) Concrete bases
figure 3.2. It is important that all the structure As mentioned above, the concrete bases are the
equipment are made in such a way that they can most commonly used for the fixation of these
transmit any force or torque which may occur motors.
during the operation. The type and size of the foundation - as well as
other fixing devices for this purpose will depend
on the type and size of the motor.
The motors can be mounted on a concrete base
with four foundation blocks. See dimensions of
the installation components in the table below.
Installation and examples:
18
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 58/458
THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
Mounting dimensions
Thread
s t u v w
M26 and M30 50 450 220 265 315
M36 70 539 240 300 350
M42 70 600 270 355 400
Table 3.1. - Anchorage measurements (example of installation).
Examples of preparation:
Remove all dirt from the foundation blocks in
order to ensure a perfect anchorage between
the foundation blocks and the motor. Fix the
foundation blocks at the motor feet by means of
bolts.
Provide shims of different thickness (total
trickiness of about 2mm) between the motor
feet and the foundation base to ensure a further
accurate alignment vertically.
Inside the feet holes, the fastening bolts must
be covered with a metal sheet or presspan in
order to center the foundation blocks exactly to
the feet holes and perform an accurate
alignment horizontally.
Figure 3.3 - Example 1. Place shims or leveling bolts under the
foundation blocks in order to obtain a perfect
motor leveling and alignment between the
motor and the driven machine. After introducing
the concrete, make an accurate control of the
alignment. Eventual small corrections can be
done by washers or metal plates or by means of
a new adjustment of the fastening bolt
clearences. Tighten now firmly all fastening
bolts.
Make sure all motor feet surfaces are supported
uniformly without damaging motor frame. After
completing the test, introduce two tapered pins
for correct fastening. For this purpose, use the
pre-drilled holes in the feet.
19
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 59/458
THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
Figure 3.5.
c) Metallic bases
The metallic bases must have a flat surface under
motor feet in order to avoid frame deformation.
The bearing housing surface should be so Figure 3.6b Concentricity deflection.
determined that under the feet of the motor one
can place shim plates of approximately 2mm On the alignment/leveling it is important to take
thickness. into consideration the effect of the temperature
Motor should not be removed from their common over the motor and driven machine. The different
metallic bases for alignment, the metallic bases expansion levels of the coupled machines can
should be leveled on the actual foundation. modify the alignment/leveling during motor
When a metallic base is used to adjust the height operation.
of the motor shaft end with the machine shaft
end, it should be leveled on the concrete base. After the set (motor and base) is perfectly aligned
After the base has been leveled, foundation studs either at cold or at hot, motor must be bolted, as
tightened, and the coupling checked, the metal shown in figure 3.7. There are instruments which
base and the studs are then cemented. use visible laser ray added by specific computer
programs that can perform and ensure high
precision alignment.
20
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 60/458
THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
Figure 3.7.
3.1.4. COUPLINGS
Figure 3.10.
21
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 61/458
THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
RUNNING: Avoid unnecessary thrusts on the Due to the existing tensions on the belts, there is
bearings by ensuring that the shafts are parallel a reaction acting as radial load over the motor
and the pulleys perfectly aligned (figure 3.11). shaft end.
Laterally misaligned pulleys, when running, The data to calculate such reaction (radial force)
transmit alternating knocks to the rotor and can are:
damage the bearing housing. Belt slippage can be - Output transmitted [kW] (P);
avoided by applying a resin type material such as - Motor speed [rpm] (RPM);
rosin. - Diameter of driven pulley [mm] (DPMV);
- Diameter of driven pulley [mm] (DPMT);
- Distance between centers [mm] (I);
- Friction coefficient [-] (MI) - (normally 0.5);
- Slip coefficient [-] (K);
- Belt contact angle on smaller pulley [RAD]
(alfa);
- FR: Radial force acting over the shaft end [N]
(FR).
DPMV DPMT
ALFA =
1
(MIxALFA ) + 1
K = 1. 1x
(MIxALFA ) 1
18836, 25N K 2 x[1 COS ( ALFA ] + 1.21x[1 + COS ( ALFA )]
FR = x
DPMTxRPM 2
22
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 62/458
THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
3.2.2. CONNECTION
23
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 63/458
THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
24
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 64/458
THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
The following connection diagrams show terminals identification in the connection box and the possible
connections for stator (phases) and rotor of the three-phase induction motors.
The described numbers in each diagram of the table below, serves for the user identify the correspondent
motor connection diagram through the nameplate fixed on the motor, where are described the code
numbers correspondent to the stator, rotor and accessories connection diagrams.
3.2.4.1. CONNECTION DIAGRAMS FOR STATORS AND ROTORS (Standard IEC 60034-8)
3 TERMINALS
+ NEUTRAL
9121
LOWER HIGHER LOWER LOWER HIGHER
SPEED SPEED SPEED SPEED SPEED
9 TERMINALS 12 TERMINALS
9107 9108 9109 9110 9111 9112 9113 9114
YY Y YY Y
25
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 65/458
THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
3.2.4.2. CONNECTION DIAGRAMS FOR STATORS AND ROTORS (Standard NEMA MG1)
3 TERMINALS
+ NEUTRAL
9221
LOWER LOWER HIGHER
LOWER HIGHER
SPEED SPEED SPEED
SPEED SPEED
9 TERMINALS 12 TERMINALS
9207 9208 9209 9210 9211 9212 9213 9214
YY Y YY Y
DIRECTION OF ROTATION
- The direction of rotation is described on the motor nameplate and shall be that of the shaft observed
when facing the D-end.
- Machines with terminal markings according to the chapter 3.2.4.1 and 3.2.4.2 of this manual have a
clockwise direction of rotation.
To invert the direction of the rotation must be inverted the connection of two phases. The motors with only
one direction of rotation, shown by the motor nameplate and an arrow located on the frame possess
unidirectional fan and must only operate in the specified direction. If is really necessary to invert the
direction of the rotation, WEG must be consulted.
26
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 66/458
THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
The following connection diagrams shown terminals identification in the connection box and the connection
diagrams for accessories of the three-phase induction motors.
The described numbers in each diagram of the table below, serves for the user identify the accessories
connection diagram through the nameplate fixed on the motor, where are described the code numbers
correspondent to the stator, rotor and accessories connection diagrams.
ALARM TRIPPING
9032 9036
IN WINDING IN THE BEARINGS
2 PER PHASE IN SERIES 1 PER BEARING
THERMISTORS
9025 9026 9027
IN WINDING IN WINDING IN WINDING
1 PER PHASE 1 PER PHASE IN SERIES 2 PER PHASE
ALARM TRIPPING
9028 9035
IN WINDING IN THE BEARINGS
2 PER PHASE IN SERIES 1 PER BEARING
FRONT REAR
ALARM TRIPPING
27
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 67/458
THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
ALARM TRIPPING
SUPPLEMENTARY ACCESSORIES
In motors with more than 1 bearing for support, the sensor of temperature used in the extra bearing is
identified with the corresponding number to the first bearing preceded of the number 1 (for 1 extra bearing)
or 2 (for 2 extra bearings) Example: Motor with rear support composed of 2 bearings - 1 PT100 with 3 wires
for bearing. The first bearing is identified with numeration 70 - 70 - 71 and the second bearing with
numeration 170 - 170 - 171.
The same rule described above applies also for extra sensors in the stator or extra thermometers in the
bearings.
28
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 68/458
THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
If direct starting is not feasible, either due to For starting of slip ring motors an external
restrictions imposed by the utility or due to the rheostat is connected to the rotor by means of a
installation itself, reduced voltage indirect starting set of brushes and slip rings.
methods can be used in order to reduce the The extra rotor resistance is held in the circuit
starting current. during the starting to reduce the starting current
and increase torque. Furthermore, it is possible to
These indirect starting methods (reduced voltage) regulate the external resistance so as to have a
are: starting torque equal to, or close to the motor
- Wye-delta switch; breakdown torque.
- Series-parallel switch;
- Compensating Switch or self-transformer; NOTE: Every time customers intend to use other
- Static starting switch or soft-start; than direct starting, inform WEG Mquinas in
- Frequency Inverter. advance so we can analyze the starting torques
required by the load.
29
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 69/458
THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
30
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 70/458
THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
1. Overload with 1.2 times the rated current. unprotected totally protected totally protected
4. Operation with more than 15 starts p/hour. unprotected partially protected totally protected
C 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 100.00 100.39 100.78 101.17 101.56 101.95 102.34 102.73 103.12 103.51
10 103.90 104.29 104.68 105.07 105.46 105.95 106.24 106.63 107.02 107.40
20 107.79 108.18 108.57 108.96 109.35 109.73 110.12 110.51 110.90 111.28
30 111.67 112.06 112.45 112.83 113.22 113.61 113.99 114.38 114.77 115.15
40 115.54 115.93 116.31 116.70 117.08 117.47 117.85 118.24 118.62 119.01
50 119.40 119.78 120.16 120.55 120.93 121.32 121.70 122.09 122.47 122.86
60 123.24 123.62 124.01 124.39 124.77 125.16 125.54 125.92 126.31 126.69
70 127.07 127.45 127.84 128.22 128.60 128.98 129.37 129.75 130.13 130.51
80 130.89 131.27 131.66 132.04 132.42 132.80 133.18 133.56 133.94 134.32
90 134.70 135.08 135.46 135.84 136.22 136.60 136.98 137.36 137.74 138.12
100 138.50 138.88 139.26 139.64 140.02 140.39 140.77 141.15 141.53 141.91
110 142.29 142.66 143.04 143.42 143.80 144.17 144.55 144.93 145.31 145.68
120 146.06 146.44 146.81 147.19 147.57 147.94 148.32 148.70 149.07 149.45
130 149.82 150.20 150.57 150.95 151.33 151.70 152.08 152.45 152.83 153.20
140 153.58 153.95 154.32 154.70 155.07 155.45 155.82 156.19 156.57 156.94
150 157.31 157.69 158.06 158.43 158.81 159.18 159.55 159.93 160.30 160.67
NOTE: When motors are supplied with accessories T-box, the connection terminals for thermal protectors
and other accessories are fitted in this T-box.
31
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 71/458
THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
Vibration Levels (mm/s RMS) Operate the motor with shaft vibration
Rated speed 355 values close to alarm and tripping values
(rpm) Frame < 355 to > 630 can damage bearing liners.
630
Alarm 4.5 4.5 5.5 The main reasons to cause increase of vibration
600 n 1800 are:
Tripping 7.0 7.0 8.0
- Unbalance coupling problems and others that
Alarm 3.5 4.5 5.5 can affect the machine;
1800 < n 3600
Tripping 5.5 6.5 7.5 - Shaft manufacturing problems, which are
minimized during the manufacturing;
Table 3.5.
- Residual voltage or magnetism on the shaft
surface where measurement is made;
Vibration causes most frequently found on the
- Scratches, knocks or vibrations when finishing
field are:
the shaft where measurement is made.
- Misalignment between motor and driven
machine;
32
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 72/458
THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
3.3. COMMISSIONING
33
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 73/458
THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
Run the motor coupled to the load for a period of Day by day, electrical motors are increasingly
at least one hour to check if abnormal noises or used in offices and homes. Under these
sign of overheating occur. If there will be circumstances, it is essential that motors operate
excessive vibrations in the unit between the initial silently and safe without contributing to ambient
operation condition and the condition after discomfort. The solution lies in the ever closer
thermal stability, alignment and leveling must be collaboration of the user and the motor
rechecked. Compare the line current drawn with manufacturer.
the value shown on the nameplate. The proper planning of home, office and factory
Under continuous duty without load fluctuation, acoustics requires knowledge of the sources of
this should not exceed the rated current times the motor noises and how they affect the ambient
service factor, also shown on the nameplate. noise level wherever motors are located.
All measuring instruments and devices should be The following parts of a motor can generate noise
continuously checked in order to correct any within the audio-frequency range:
abnormal operation, if required. 1) Cooling system.
On slip-ring motors, the real load condition of the 2) Brushes.
motor in duty, must be investigated, and if 3) Bearings.
necessary, specify again the set of brushes. In 4) Magnetic circuit.
case of doubt consult WEG Mquinas.
The part of the motor mainly responsible as noise
source depends on its size, speed, degree of
3.3.4. SHUTDOWN PROCEDURE mechanical protection (casing) and of the driven
machine design. Cooling system noise is airborne
and usually affects only the noise level in the
Before proceed any tasks on the motor, it is ambient where motor is installed. How ever, it is a
extremely important to observe the following: to different matter if the noise source is in the
touch any moving part on a running motor, even bearings or in the magnetic circuit. In this case,
switched-off, is a danger to life. the noise is due to mechanical vibration of the
part itself, or of the entire motor, and the sound
a) THREE-PHASE SQUIRREL CAGE MOTORS: is spreaded through the foundation, walls or
It suffices to open stator circuit switch, and ducts. This type of sound propagation, via
with the motor stopped, reset the structural components of an installation, can be
auto-transformer, if any, to the "start" reduced by installing the motor on suitable
position; designed vibration dampers. It is important to
note that improper dampers can even increase
vibration.
b) THREE-PHASE SLIP RING MOTORS: Open
the stator circuit switch. When the motor is
stopped, reset the rheostat to the "start"
position. 3.5. MOTOR USED ON HAZARDOUS
AREA EXPLOSIVE GAS ATMOSPHERES
*** WARNING ***
The motor connection boxes equipped Motors designed for hazardous areas are fitted
capacitors do not have to be opened with additional safety features which are defined
before the discharge time: in specific standards for each type of hazardous
Time of discharge of the capacitors: 5 location, based on its classification.
minutes after the disconnection of the The general requirements for electrical apparatus
motor. for hazardous locations are described in the
following Brazilian and foreign standards,
respectively:
NBR 9815 = Electrical apparatus for explosive gas
atmospheres.
General requirements (specifications)
IEC 79-0 = Electrical apparatus for explosive gas
atmospheres.
EN 50014 = Electrical apparatus for potentially
explosive atmosphere.
General requirements
34
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 74/458
THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
35
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 75/458
THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
36
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 76/458
THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
4.2.1. GREASE LUBRICATED BEARINGS WEG motors are supplied with POLYREX EM
103 grease (Supplier: Esso) up to frame 450 and
The purpose of this maintenance is to lengthen STABURAGS N12MF grease (Supplier Klber)
bearing life. for frame 500 and above, enough for the
operating time period indicated on the data sheet
Maintenance includes: and on the bearing identification nameplate.
a) Attention to the overall status of the bearings;
b) Cleaning and lubrication; Lubrication intervals depend on the size of the
c) Inspection in details of the bearings. motor, speed, working conditions, type of grease
used and working temperature.
Motor noise should be measured at regular The lubrication period and type of bearings are
intervals of one to four months. A well-tuned ear indicated on the motor nameplate.
is perfect capable of distinguishing unusual Motors kept in stock should be
noises, even with rudimentary tools such as a relubricated every six months. Once
screwdriver, etc. For a more reliable analysis of each 2 months, shaft must be in
the bearings, sophisticated equipment is required. order to have the grease
homogenized.
Bearing temperature control is also Lubrication intervals, amount of grease and
part of routine maintenance. The bearings used on the motors are indicated in
temperature rise of grease Tables 4.2a and 4.2b, as reference values.
lubricated bearings as
recommended under item 4.2.1.2 should not
exceed 60C (T = 60C/max. ambient = 40C, The bearings data, amount and type of
absolute temperature = T + ambient) measured grease and lubrication interval informed
at the external bearing cap. in the nameplate attached in the motor.
Before the procedure of bearings
Constant temperature control can be done by lubrication, we recommend that these
means of external thermometers or by embedded data are verified.
thermal elements.
37
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 77/458
THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
MAXIMUM LUBRICATION INTERVALS (IN HURS) FOR HORIZONTALLY MOUNTED MOTORS - 60Hz
NDE Bearing NDE Bearing slip NDE Bearing slip
DE Bearing (with
DE Bearing (squirrel cage ring motor (Fixed ring rotor
Frame Poles pulley)
rotor) brushes) (Lifting brushes)
Bearing Relubr. Bearing Relubr. Bearing Relubr. Bearing Relubr. Bearing Relubr.
2 6314 3.400 6314 3.400
4 6.400 2.000 8.900 6.600 6.600
315
6 6320 10.000 NU322 4.500 6316 10.000 6222 10.000 6222 10.000
8 10.000 6.400 10.000 10.000 10.000
2 6314 3.400 6314 3.400
4 4.800 1.600 6.400 5.800 5.800
355
6 6322 8.700 NU324 3.900 6320 10.000 6224 10.000 6224 10.000
8 10.000 5.800 10.000 10.000 10.000
4 2.200 1.400 6.400 5.100 3.400
400 6 NU224 4.900 NU228 3.700 6320 10.000 6226 9.300 6230 6.900
8 6.800 5.500 10.000 10.000 9.800
4 2.200 4.800 3.400 6234 2.500
450 6 NU224 4.900 6322 8.700 6230 3.400 5.600
6234
8 6.800 10.000 3.400 8.400
4 1.800 4.800 3.400 2.500
500 6 NU226 4.300 6322 8.700 6230 6.900 6234 5.600
8 6.200 10.000 9.800 8.400
4
6 NU228 3.700 5.500 3.100 2.300
8 5.500 7.500 4.900 3.900
560 NU222 NU230 NU234
4
6 NU232 2.700 5.500 3.100 2.300
8 4.400 7.500 4.900 3.900
4
6 1.200 4.900 3.100 2.300
8 23032 2.200 6.800 4.900 3.900
10 3.100 8.100 6.300 5.200
12 3.800 9.000 7.300 6.200
630 NU224 NU230 NU234
4
6
8 23036 1.600 6.800 4.900 3.900
10 2.400 8.100 6.300 5.200
12 3.100 9.000 7.300 6.200
6
8 1.600 6.200 4.400 3.900
23036
10 2.400 7.500 5.700 5.200
12 3.100 8.400 6.700 6.200
710 NU226 NU232 NU234
6
8 1.300 6.200 4.400 3.900
23040
10 2.000 7.500 5.700 5.200
12 2.600 8.400 6.700 6.200
Grease: Polyrex EM 103 (Esso) Grease: Staburags N12MF (Klber)
Table 4.2a.
NOTES:
- Normal relubrication interval for ambient temperature of 40C and types of grease specified above;
- For vertically mounted motors, reduce relubrication intervals by half;
- Bearing operating temperature = 70C;
- Apply correction factors given below for relubrication intervals of table above on the following cases:
- Operating temperature below 60C: 1.59.
- Operating temperature of 70C to 80C: 0.63.
- Operating temperature of 80C to 90C: 0.40.
- Operating temperature of 90C to 100C: 0.25.
38
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 78/458
THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
MAXIMUM LUBRICATION INTERVALS (IN HURS) FOR HORIZONTALLY MOUNTED MOTORS - 50Hz
NDE Bearing NDE Bearing slip NDE Bearing
DE Bearing (with
DE Bearing (squirrel cage ring motor (Fixed slip ring rotor
Frame Poles pulley)
rotor) brushes) (Liftable brushes)
Bearing Relubr. Bearing Relubr. Bearing Relubr. Bearing Relubr. Bearing Relubr.
2 6314 4.900 6314 4.900
4 8.300 3.000 10.000 8.500 8.500
315
6 6320 10.000 NU322 5.700 6316 10.000 6222 10.000 6222 10.000
8 10.000 7.600 10.000 10.000 10.000
2 6314 4.900 6314 4.900
4 6.500 2.500 8.300 7.700 7.700
355
6 6322 10.000 NU324 5.100 6320 10.000 6224 10.000 6224 10.000
8 10.000 6.900 10.000 10.000 10.000
2 6317 3.400 6317 3.400
4 3.300 2.300 8.300 6.900 4.800
400
6 NU224 6.100 NU228 4.900 6320 10.000 6226 10.000 6230 8.700
8 7.900 6.700 10.000 10.000 10.000
4 3.300 6.500 4.800 6234 3.700
450 6 NU224 6.100 6322 10.000 6230 8.700 7.300
6234
8 7.900 10.000 10.000 10.000
4 2.800 6.500 4.800 3.700
500 6 NU226 5.500 6322 10.000 6230 8.700 6234 7.300
8 7.300 10.000 10.000 10.000
4 2.300 3.900 1.900 1.300
6 NU228 4.900 6.800 4.300 3.300
8 6.700 8.600 6.100 5.000
560 NU222 NU230 NU234
4
6 NU232 3.800 6.800 4.300 3.300
8 5.500 8.600 6.100 5.000
4
6 1.800 6.100 4.300 3.300
8 23032 2.900 7.900 6.100 5.000
10 3.800 9.000 7.300 6.200
12 4.400 9.600 8.000 7.100
630 NU224 NU230 NU234
4
6 1.300 6.100 4.300 3.300
8 23036 2.300 7.900 6.100 5.000
10 3.100 9.000 7.300 6.200
12 3.700 9.600 8.000 7.100
6 1.300 5.500 3.800 3.300
8 2.300 7.300 5.500 5.000
23036
10 3.100 8.400 6.700 6.200
12 3.700 9.100 7.600 7.100
710 NU226 NU232 NU234
6 1.000 5.500 3.800 3.300
8 1.800 7.300 5.500 5.000
23040
10 2.600 8.400 6.700 6.200
12 3.200 9.100 7.600 7.100
Grease: Polyrex EM 103 (Esso) Grease: Staburags N12MF (Klber)
Table 4.2b.
NOTES:
- Normal relubrication interval for ambient temperature of 40C and types of grease specified above;
- For vertically mounted motors, reduce relubrication intervals by half;
- Bearing operating temperature = 70C;
- Apply correction factors given below for relubrication intervals of table above on the following cases:
- Operating temperature below 60C: 1.59.
- Operating temperature of 70C to 80C: 0.63.
- Operating temperature of 80C to 90C: 0.40.
- Operating temperature of 90C to 100C: 0.25.
39
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 79/458
THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
Grease options
CONSTANT OPEARATING
SUPPLIER GREASE APPLICATION
TEMEPRATURE (C)
ESSO UNIREX N2 (LITHIUM BASE) (-35 to +175)
PETROBRAS LUBRAX GMA-2 (LITHIUM BASE) (0 to +130) NORMAL
ALVNIA R3 (LITHIUM BASE) (-35 to +130)
SHELL
AEROSHELL 7 (MICROGEL) (-55 to +100)
LOW TEMEPRATURE
ESSO BEACON 325 (LITHIUM BASED) (-50 to +120)
Table 4.3b.
40
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 80/458
THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
To avoid any possible incompatibility grease For lubrication, use only a manual grease gun.
problem we recommend performing an
appropriate lubrication which can be summarized
as follows: after removing the old grease and
caring out a complete cleanliness of the grease
cavity, new grease must be pumped in. When this
procedure is not allowed, pump in new grease by
pressure. This must be repeated until new grease
is drained out through the grease relief.
As a general rule, greases with same soap type
are compatible. However depending on the
mixture rate, they can then be recommended to
mix different types of grease before contacting a
service agent and/or WEG.
Same and basic oils can not be mixed as they will
not produce a homogeneous mixture. In this case, Figure 4.2. - Bearings and lubrication system.
either a hardening or a softening (or drop of the
resulting mixture melting point) can occur.
4.2.1.6. BEARING LUBRICATION STEPS
41
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 81/458
THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
6. This grease must be removed by pulling the During assembly, bearings cannot be subjected to
spring through bolt and then cleaning the direct blows. To make the assembly easier, it is
spring. This procedure must be carried out as recommended to heat up (inductive heater) the
many times as it is required up to the point no bearing.
grease is on the spring. The aid used to press or strike the bearings
7. Check bearing temperature to make sure there should be applied to the inner ring.
has not been any major modification.
4.2.2.1. CHARACTERISTICS
42
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 82/458
THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
Before disassembly
- Remove the prolongation tubes of the grease Opposite drive-end bearing reassembly
inlet and outlet; - Clean the bearings completely and inspects the
- Remove the sun shade, cover, fan and other removed parts and the interior of the caps.
components that are in the rear side as sun as - Certify that the bearing, shaft and bearing
the shaft end becomes free for bearing caps surfaces be smooth.
removing. - Put the recommended grease
- Clean completely the outside of bearings. on of the external and
- Remove the temperature detectors from the internal bearing cap deposit and
bearings and provide a prop for support the lubricate the bearing with
shaft and avoid damages. sufficient quantity of grease before reassemble
it.
Opposite drive-end bearing disassembly - Before place the bearing on the shaft, heat the
Care must be taken to avoid damage on the ball bearing to a temperature between 50C and
or roller and shaft surface. 100C. For reassembling the bearings, follow
For disassemble the bearing, follows carefully the the instructions of disassembly in the inverse
instructions below: order.
Keeps all the parts disassembled in an insurance
local.
1) Remove the fixation nut (16)
2) Remove the grease relief (17);
3) Remove the closed external ring (6);
4) Remove the screws (12) which fasten the
external bearing cap;
5) Remove the external bearing cap (2);
6) Remove the screws (11 and 13);
7) Remove the rear cover (8);
8) Remove the external bearing (14), separator
ring (4) and internal bearing (15);
9) Remove the screw which fasten the grease
valve (3) and remove it;
10) Remove the internal bearing cap (1) if
necessary.
43
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 83/458
THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
44
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 84/458
THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
4.2.3. ANTIFRICTION BEARING - The oil selected for the application must have
LUBRICATED BY OIL the adequate viscosity for the bearing
operating temperature. The type of oil
4 recommended by WEG already considers these
criteria.
1 1- Oil inlet
- Insufficient amount of oil can damage the
2- Oil sight glass bearings.
- The minimum recommended oil level is
2 reached when the lubricant can be seen
3- Oil outlet
touching the bottom part of the oil sight glass,
4- Temperature sensor with the motor in the idle condition.
3 The oil level must be checked
daily, being kept approximately
4.2.3.1. LUBRICATION INSTRUCTIONS in the middle of the oil sight
glass.
Oil removal
When re-lubrication is necessary, please remove
4.2.3.2. BEARING OPERATION
the oil outlet (3) and oil inlet (1) plugs and quit
The operation of motors equipped with oil-
the oil completely.
lubricated bearings is similar to the operation of
motors equipped with grease-lubricated bearings.
For oil insertion in the bearing:
The bearings performance during start up must
- Close the oil outlet (3) with the drain plug;
be carefully checked as well as their performance
- Remove the filter in the oil inlet (1), if any.
during the first running hours.
- Add the type and amount of oil up to the level
Before running the motor, check:
indicated in the oil sight glass.
- If the oil being used is the same as the oil
recommended on the bearings nameplate.
NOTES:
- The oil characteristics;
1) Make sure that all the openings are closed and
- The oil level;
that there is no indication of oil leakage in the
- The alarm and trip point for bearings
oil reservoir or seals.
temperatures;
2) The proper oil level is obtained when the
During the first starting, pay special attention for
lubricant can be seen in the middle of the oil
excessive vibration or noise when the motor is
sight glass.
running uncoupled. The motor and bearings
3) Excessive amount of oil will not damage the
should operate quietly and under low vibration.
bearings, but it can cause the oil to leak
Have a copy of the factory vibration test report so
through the seals.
you can compare the results obtained during the
test with the results obtained after the
Oil characteristics installation. The motor must run for several hours
The type of lubricant, lubrication interval and type until the temperature of the bearings stabilize.
of bearings are indicated on the motor nameplate If abnormal bearing operating temperature is
like to the bearing. noticed, the motor must be shut down and the
Oil change - The change of the oil in the installation, bearings and sensors must be re-
bearings should be made according to the table checked. Check the whole bearing system (oil
below, referring the bearing working temperature: reservoir, seals) to make sure there is no oil
leakage.
Below of 75C = 20,000 hours
Between 75 and 80C = 16,000 hours
Between 80 and 85C = 12,000 hours 4.2.3.3. THERMAL PROTECTIONS SETTING
Between 85 and 90C = 8,000 hours Each bearing is fitted with a Pt100 temperature
Between 90 and 95C = 6,000 hours detector installed directly in the bearing liner near
Between 95 and 100C = 4,000 hours the point where the load is applied. This device
must be connected to a controlling panel with the
IMPORTANT:
purpose of detecting overheating and protect the
The bearings lifetime, their operating conditions
bearing when operating under high temperature.
and motor operating conditions will depend on the
procedures followed by the maintenance
IMPORTANT: The following
personnel. The following recommendations must
temperature must be set on the
be observed.
bearing protecting system:
ALARM 100C / TRIPPING OFF 120C
45
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 85/458
THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
To disassemble the drive-end bearing, please 9) Remove the spherical roller bearing (7);
follow carefully the instructions given below. 10) If it is necessary to completely disassemble
the bearing, remove the internal bearing cap
Before disassembling (6) and the internal oil reservoir (2).
- Clean completely the outside of bearing;
- Remove the drain plug (12); Opposite drive-end bearing reassembly
- Remove all of the oil from the bearings; - Clean the bearings completely and inspect the
- Remove the temperature detectors (15) from parts and the bearing cap.
the bearing; - Certify that the bearing, shaft and bearing cap
- Remove the grounding brush (if any); surfaces are smooth, with no sign of pitting or
- Provide a support to the shaft so it can rest scratches.
during disassembly. - Before inserting the bearing to the shaft, heat
the bearing to a temperature between 50C
Opposite drive-end bearing disassembly: and 100C.
- Use extra caution to avoid any damage to the - To reassemble the bearing, follow the
balls, rollers and shaft surface. instructions of disassembling in the reverse
- To disassemble the bearing, carefully follow order.
the instructions below:
- Keep all the parts disassembled in a safe and Attention
dust free environment. When reassembling, apply Curril T to seal the
1) Remove the screw (9) that fixes the ring to surfaces of the oil reservoir.
the labyrinth seal (8);
2) Remove the ring with the labyrinth seal (8); NOTE: The motors can be supplied with filter
3) Remove the screws (16) that fixes the (10) in the location indicated on the drawing
external oil reservoir (1); above or in the oil inlet.
4) Remove the external oil reservoir (1);
5) Remove the screw (14) that fixes the
external bearing cap (3);
6) Remove the external bearing cap (3);
7) Remove the screws (5) that fix the oil
retaining ring (4) and remove it;
8) Remove the rear cover (17);
46
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 86/458
THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
Figure 4.5.
47
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 87/458
THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
4.2.4.1. GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS - Loosen and remove the bolts (6) that join the
top and bottom half of the bearing housing (2
Sleeve bearing performance is dependent on and 5).
proper installation, lubrication and maintenance. - Use the lifting eyebolts (9) to lift (by hand or
hoist) the top half of bearing housing(5)
Before assembling the bearing carefully read all
straight up, so that the cap is completely
instructions contained herein to become familiar disengaged from the lower halves of the
with the complete bearing assembly procedure. stationary baffle (11) labyrinth seals, labyrinth
A proper maintenance of sleeve bearings include seal carrier (20) , and the bearing liner (12).
periodical checking of the level and actual - Pull the top bearing housing forward out of
condition of the lubricating oil, checking of noise and away from the bearing area. Loosen and
level and vibration of the bearings, follow-up of remove the bolts (19) securing the top half of
the operating temperature, and fastening of the the stationary baffle. Loosen and remove the
fixing and assembly bolts. The frame must be bolts (10) securing the upper half of the seal
kept clean, free from dust, oil and dirt to facilitate carrier (20).
- Lift (by hand or hoist) the upper half of the
cooling system.
bearing liner (13) and remove it.
Threaded holes for connecting the thermometer, - Loosen and remove the bolts at the split line of
oil sight glass, oil inlet, and immersion heater, or the oil ring (14). Carefully disengage the
cooling coil (for oil sump thermometer or dowels holding the oil ring halves together and
circulating pump with adapter) are provided on remove the oil ring.
either side, so that all connections can be made - Remove the garter springs that encircle the
on the right or left side of the bearing housing as labyrinth seals and remove the top half of each
required. seal. Rotate the bottom half of each seal out
The oil drain plug is located centrally on the of the grooves in the seal carrier and bearing
underside of the bearing housing. housing and remove them.
In case of circulating oil lubrication, the outlet - Disconnect and remove RTD's, thermocouples,
or any other temperature detecting
connection should be screwed into the threaded instruments that enter the lower half of the
hole of an oil sight glass. bearing liner.
If the bearing is electrically insulated, the - Using a hoist or jack, raise the shaft slightly so
spherical liner seat surfaces in the housing are that the lower half of the bearing liner can be
lined with a non-conducting material. rolled out of the bearing housing.
Do not remove this lining. IMPORTANT: To make that feasible it is
The antirotation pin is also insulated and the shaft necessary that bolts 4 and 6 of the other bearing
seals are manufactured from a special non- half be loose.
conducting material. - Roll out (be careful not to use excessive force)
Temperature monitoring instruments with contact the lower half of the bearing liner and remove
it.
to the bearing liner should be insulated
- Loosen and remove the bolts (19) securing the
appropriately (i.e., insulated protection tubes, bottom half of the stationary baffle (11) to the
synthetic fittings, etc.) seal carrier. Loosen and remove the bolts (10)
Water-cooled bearings are provided with the securing the bottom half of the seal carrier
cooling coil installed. Care must be taken to (20) to the bearing housing. Remove the seal
protect the connections from damage when carrier.
handling the housing prior to installation. - Loosen and remove the bolts (4). Remove the
bottom bearing housing (2).
4.2.4.2. DISASSEMBLY OF THE SLEEVE - Remove the frame cover (3).
BEARING SYSTEM (TYPE "EF") - Loosen and remove the bolts (8) securing the
To disassemble the bearing liner and all machine seal (7) to the frame cover. Remove
associated parts from the bearing housing, carry the machine seal.
out the following instructions. Carefully store all - Thoroughly clean and inspect all individual
disassembled parts in a safe location (see figure parts which have been removed. Clean the
4.5). interior of the bearing housing.
- To reassemble the bearing system, follow the
preceding instructions in the reverse order.
Drive end side:
NOTE: Festening torque of the bearing fixing
- Throughly clean the exterior of the bearing
bolts to the motor = 10 Kgfm.
housing. Loosen and remove the oil drain plug
(1) at the bottom of the bearing housing.
Non drive end side:
Drain the oil from the bearing housing.
- Thoroughly clean the exterior of the bearing
- Loosen and remove the bolts (4) that connect
housing. Loosen and remove the oil drain plug
the top half of the bearing housing (5) to the
(1) at the bottom of the bearing housing.
motor frame cover(3).
Drain the oil from the bearing housing.
48
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 88/458
THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
- Loosen and remove the bolts (19) and remove Apply oil to spherical seats in the housing base
the external cover (11). and the shaft and rotate the bottom liner half (12)
- Loosen and remove the bolts (4) that fix the into position. Special care must be taken so that
top bearing housing (5) to the motor frame the axial surfaces of the locating bearing are not
cover(3). damaged.
- Loosen and remove the bolts (6) that join the After the split faces of the bottom liner half and
top and bottom half of the bearing housing (2 the housing base are aligned, lower the shaft into
and 5). place. With a slight hammer blow against the
- Use the lifting eyebolts (9) to lift (by hand or housing base settle the liner into its seating so
hoist) the top half of the bearing housing (5) that the liner axis and shaft axis are parallel. The
straight up, that the cap is completely slight hammer blow produces a high frequency
disengaged from the lower halves of the vibration which reduces the static friction between
bottom bearing housing (2) and the bearing the liner and the housing and allows the correct
liner (12). adjustment of the liner. The self-alignment
- Lift (by hand or hoist) the top half of the feature of the bearing is to compensate for
bearing liner (13) and remove it. normal shaft deflection during the assembling
- Loosen and remove the bolts at the split line of procedure only.
the oil ring (14). Carefully disengage the The loose oil ring is installed next. The ring must
dowels holding the oil ring halves together and be handled with special care as safe operation of
remove the oil ring. the bearing is also dependent on the effective and
- Remove the garter spring that encircles the safe functioning of the oil ring. The bolts must be
labyrinth seal. Remove the top half of the seal,
tightly fastened. Split misalignment must be
then rotate the bottom half of the seal out the
groove in the bearing housing and remove it. avoided and any burrs or edges carefully removed
- Disconnect and remove RTD's, thermocouples, in order to ensure smooth running of the ring. In
or any other temperature detecting any maintenance care must be taken that the ring
instruments that enter the lower half of the is not distorted and its geometrical shape is
bearing liner. maintained.
- Using a hoist or jack, raise the shaft slightly so The outside of the two liner halves is stamped
that the lower half of the bearing liner (12) with identification numbers or marks near the split
can be rolled out of the bearing housing. line. Make sure that these marks align and the
- Roll out (be careful not to use excessive force) split faces are clean when placing the top liner
the bottom half of the bearing liner (12) and
half into position. Incorrect fitting may lead to
remove it.
- Loosen and remove the bolts (4) and remove heavy damage to the bearing liners.
the bottom bearing housing (2). Check to ensure that the loose oil ring can still
- Remove the motor frame cover (3). rotate freely on the shaft. With the top liner half
- Loosen and remove the bolts (8) and remove in place, install the seal on the flange side (see
the machine seal (7). paragraph "Shaft Seals").
- Thoroughly clean and inspect all individual After coating the split faces with a non-hardening
parts which have been removed. Clean the sealing compound, place the housing cap into
interior of the bearing housing. position. Care must be taken that the seal fits
To reassemble the Bearing System, follow he properly into the groove. Ensure also that the
preceding instructions in the reverse order.
anti-rotation pin is seated without any contact
NOTE: Fastening torque of the bearing fixing with the corresponding hole in the liner.
bolts to the motor = 10 Kgfm. NOTE: Housing or liner may be
interchanged as complete assemblies
4.2.4.3. SLEEVE BEARING ASSEMBLY only. Individual halves are not
interchangeable.
Check contact face and mounting recess of the
bracket making sure it is clean and properly
machined. Inspect shaft to ensure it is smooth (Ra 4.2.4.4. SETTING OF THERMAL
0.4, equivalent to 32 micro-inch finish, or better), PROTECTIONS (PT100)
within the dimensions and tolerances given by
RENK and free of burr or any rough spots. Each bearing is fitted with a Pt100 temperature
After removing the upper part of the housing (2) detector installed directly in the bearing liner near
and the bearing liner (12 and 13) the interior of the point where the load is applied. This device
the housing and the running surfaces of the liner must be connected to a controlling panel with the
are to be cleaned thoroughly and checked for any
purpose of detecting overheating and protect the
damage caused in transit.
With the shaft slightly, locate the bearing base bearing when operating under high temperature.
into the mounting recess of the machine end
shield and bolt into position.
49
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 89/458
THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
50
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 90/458
THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
51
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 91/458
THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
Shaft
Figure 4.7 Brush wear mark. Fig. 4.9 Shaft grounding brush.
On machines that always rotate in the same To avoid shaft damage on WEG motors during
direction, the brushes should be set in a single transportation, shaft ends are protected with
direction only. During the backward movement of protective oil. For a correct Grounding Brush
the shaft the brushes must be lifted (figure 4.8). operation, this protective oil must be removed
from the shaft surface before motor operation as
well as any foreign materials that may be present
between shaft and the brush.
Brush must be checked on permanent basis while
in operation and, when getting to the end of its
life time, must be replaced by another of same
quality (granulation).
52
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 92/458
THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
Figure 4.10.
53
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 93/458
THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
Figure 4.11.
54
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 94/458
THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
MANUAL OPERATION:
4.6.2. PROCEDURE FOR MOTOR STARTING
55
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 95/458
THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
2) Before motor start up, make sure CLD, CLE, operates on the control panel of the automatic
CCD and CCE switches are correctly connected brush lifting system.
to the panel.
5) The control and signaling system of the brush
3) When one of the CLE or CLD switches operate, lifting system is not supplied by WEG.
the system must to be reconnected before
checking the reason they have operated. 6) After motor starting, brushes can not remain in
contact with collector rings, which can lead to
4) The end user is supposed to install proper excessive brush and collector ring wear as well
signal indicating how the logical system cause problems to the brush lifting system.
Figure 4.16.
Figure 4.17.
56
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 96/458
THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
4.6.4. ASSEMBLY 2. Mount the bearing in the support pin and fix
with a fixing pin which must be fixed with a
4.6.4.1. BRUSH HOLDER LIFTING DEVICE retaining ring.
1. Fix the pin support disc with the lifting set fixer 3. Fix the bearing support pin on the support
on the protection box of the brush holder set. disc.
Figure 4.18.
57
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 97/458
THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
4.6.4.2. SHORT-CIRCUIT BUSHING 3. Mount the support pin on the movement lever.
MOVEMENT SET
4. Fix the guide support on the support base and
1. Mount the roll on the roll bearing on short the movement lever on the support. The rolls
bushing movement lever, and then the must be aligved with the short circuit bushing
bearings, the spacing bushing and fix the in such way that both touch the bushing
bearing cover. simultaneously.
2. Fix the upper pins on one of the movement NOTE: Bearing of the movement levers: 6003Z.
levers.
Figure 4.19.
58
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 98/458
THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
4.6.4.3. BRUSH HOLDER OPERATION SET 6. Fix the locking device cover on the
electromechanical device and then fix it to the
1. Mount the bearing on the shaft and fix it with device frame.
retaining rings. Then put a retaining ring to
hold the second bearing. After that, mount it 7. Fix the operation set on the brush holder
with retaining ring. protection box.
4. Fix the lifting disc on the operation shaft. 2) All the parts touching mechanically must be
lubricated. After 6 months of use, check the
5. Mount the bushing on the lever operation shaft lubrication of such parts.
and fix it with a retaining ring. Fix the shaft on
the operation disc.
Figure 4.20.
59
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 99/458
THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
Figure 4.21.
60
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 100/458
THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
For the disassembly of the liftable brush holder, 4.8.1. " MASTER" LINE
proceed in the reserve way in relation to assembly
procedures. A) SQUIRREL-CAGE ROTOR
Drive-End:
4.6.6. BRUSHES LIFTING SYSTEM 1. Remove the heat exchanger (if any).
ADJUSTMENT 2. Remove the temperature detectors from the
bearing (if any).
1. Turn the lifting disc up to the short-circuit 3. Unscrew the bolts which fasten the bearing
position and then turn it a bit more to release assembly.
the rolls to avoid unnecessary thrusts on the 4. Remove the external bearing caps (for roller
roller bearings. bearing motors).
4.1. For ball bearing motors, follow the
2. Fasten the adjusting bolt up to the backstop procedures described in item 4.2.4.2.
disc and then lock the adjusting bolt. 5. Unscrew the bolts of the endshield. After being
removed, the bolts should be screwed
3. Turn the lifting disc up to the position of non endshields in order to force its removing. To
short-circuit (brushes lowered) and repeat the prevent the rotor falling onto the rotor, provide
same procedure carried out for the short a support for it.
circuit position. 6. Remove the bearing(s) (for roller bearing
motors).
7. Remove the internal bearing cap (for roller
4.7. DRYING OF THE WINDINGS bearing motors).
61
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 101/458
THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
4.8.2. A LINE
Drive-End:
1. Disconnect the space heater leads from the
terminal boxes.
2. Remove the bearing temperature detectors (if
any).
3. Unscrew the bolts of the bearing assembly.
4. Remove the external bearing caps (for roller
bearing motors).
4.1. For ball bearing motors, follow the
procedures described in item 4.2.2.2.
5. Unscrew the end-shield. By using an
appropriate tool, force the end-shield to
release and at the same time turn it to help
the removal. Make sure that the shaft is held
on a plate and so an eventual fall of the rotor
on the stator is avoided.
6. Remove the bearing(s) (for roller bearing
motors).
7. Remove the internal bearing cap.
Non Drive-End:
1. Remove the fan cover.
2. Release the fan retaining ring.
3. Repeat the procedures from 2 to 7 of item
4.8.2 (A).
NOTE:
1. For removing of rotor, observe section 4.8.1.1.
2. It is not necessary to remove the stator from
the frame to perform an eventual rewinding.
4.8.3. F LINE
Drive-End:
Equal as A and H lines.
Non Drive-End:
1. Repeat the procedures 1 to 3 of item 4.8.2 (B).
2. Remove back protecting cover of the brush
holder.
3. Disconnect the cables from the collector ring.
4. Remove the brushes and dismantle the brush-
holder.
62
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 102/458
THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
4.8.4. H LINE
Figure 4.26.
Safety! ASSEMBLY
Ensure that the power cables have 1) Applying proper device, fit the rotor (pos. 11)
been switched-off. into the stator, from the non drive end side of
the motor, and pay attention to avoid that the
rotor rubs on the stator or on the coil heads;
DISASSEMBLY 2) Place the internal bearing caps;
1) Disconnect the temperature sensor cables (pos. 8 3) Fill out with grease the compartment of the
and 19) of the accessory connection box internal bearing caps and bearings (check type
terminals; of grease on the bearing identification nameplate
2) Remove the non drive end fan cover (pos. 26); attached to motor covers);
3) Unfasten the fixing ring of the external non drive 4) Check carefully shaft and cover surfaces where
end bearing cap and remove the fan (pos.25); bearings will be fitted so as to avoid scratches or
4) Unfasten the bolts that fix the external non drive knocks. Also check for correct mechanical
end bearing caps; dimension tolerances;
5) Remove the external drive end and non drive end 5) Heat up and mount the drive end and non drive
bearing caps (pos. 5 and 22); end bearings (pos. 6 and 20);
6) Remove the drive end and non drive end grease 6) Lift the rotor, place supports underneath the
valve (pos. 4 and 21), unfastening the bolts that shaft and mount drive end and non drive end
fix them to the shaft; covers (pos.9 and 18);
7) Place supports underneath the shaft to avoid that 7) Mount the drive end and non drive end grease
the rotor falls on the stator; valve (pos. 4 and 21) and fix them to the shaft;
8) Unfasten and remove the drive end and non drive 8) Mount the external drive end and non drive end
end covers (pos.9 and 18); bearing caps (pos. 5 and 22), fixing them t the
9) Remove drive end and non drive end bearings internal bearing caps (pos. 7 and 16);
(pos.6 and 20) with the application of proper 9) Mount the external non drive end fan (pos. 25)
device; fixing it with a retaining ring;
10) Remove the internal drive end and non drive end 10) Mount the non drive end fan cover (pos. 26);
bearing caps (pos. 7 and 16); 11) Connect the temperature sensor cables (pos. 8
11) Applying proper device, remove the rotor (pos. and 19) to the accessory connection box
11) from the stator through the non drive end side terminals;
of the motor, and pay attention to avoid that the 12) Fill in remaining grease through the drive end
rotor rubs the stator or on coil heads. and non drive end grease fitting (pos. 27 and
28).
63
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 103/458
THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
Resistance
4.6 5.8 8.8 12.9
Class
Tightening torque (Nm)
Diameter
tolerance 10%
M6 1.9 3.2 5.1 8.7
M8 4.6 7.7 12.5 21
M10 9.1 15 25 41
M12 16 27 42 70
M16 40 65 100 175
M20 75 125 200 340
M24 130 220 350 590
Notes:
- The resistance class normally is marked in the
head of the hexagonal screws.
- When do not have marking at screws,
indicates that the resistance class is 4.6.
- The internal hexagonal screws (type Allen)
possess resistance class 12.9.
64
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 104/458
THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
- Coupling: follow
the maintenance
- After the first week
instructions
of operation: check - Check alignment - Check alignment and
contained in the
the alignment and and fastening. fastening.
manual of the
fastening.
coupling
manufacturer.
- Check the
- Inspect the
cleanliness and
- Slip rings area. cleanliness and
clean it, if
clean it, if required.
required.
Table 4.6.
65
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 105/458
THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
5. SPARE PARTS
66
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 106/458
THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
67
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 107/458
THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
68
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 108/458
THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
69
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 109/458
THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
NOTE: The following chart presents a list of abnormal situations during motor operation, the probable cause
for such abnormal situations, and the corrective measures. In case of further doubts, contact Weg Mquinas.
70
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 110/458
THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
Table 6.2.
71
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 111/458
THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
NOTE: The following chart presents abnormal bearing situations and failures during motor operation, the
probable cause for such abnormal situation and the corrective measures. In certain cases, bearing
manufacturer must be contacted to find out the cause of the failure.
- Dark spots on one side of the ball races - Check the condition between coupling
- Excessive axial strength.
subsequently the formation of grooves. and driving.
Table 6.3.
IMPORTANT:
The motors listed in this manual are constantly updated. For this reason,
the information here with included may change without prior notice.
72
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 112/458
THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS
These products, when operated under the conditions stipulated by WEG in the operating manual for such
product, are warranted against defects in workmanship and materials for twelve (12) months from startup
date or eighteen (18) months from manufacturer shipment date, whichever occurs first.
However, this warranty does not apply to any product which has been subject to misuse, misapplication,
neglect (including without limitation, inadequate maintenance, accident, improper installation, modification,
adjustment, repair or any other cases originated from inadequate applications).
The company will neither be responsible for any expenses incurred in installation, removal from service,
consequential expenses such as financial losses nor transportation costs as well as tickets and
accommodation expenses of a technician when this is requested by the customer.
The repair and/or replacement of parts or components, when effectuated by WEG within the Warranty
period do not give Warranty extension, unless otherwise expressed in writing by Weg.
This constitutes WEG's only warranty in connection with this sale and is in lieu of all other warranties,
expressed or implied, written or oral.
There are no implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose that apply to this sale.
No employee, agent, dealer, repair shop or other person is authorized to give any warranties on behalf of
WEG nor to assume for WEG any other liability in connection with any of its products.
In case this happens without Weg's authorization, Warranty is automatically cancelled.
LIABILITY
Except as specified in the foregoing paragraph entitled "Warranty Terms for Engineering Products", the
company shall have no obligation or liability whatsoever to the purchaser, including, without limitation, any
claims for consequential damages or labor costs, by reason of any breach of the express warranty described
therein.
The purchaser further hereby agrees to indemnify and hold the company harmless from any causes of action
(other than cost of replacing or repairing the defective product as specified in the foregoing paragraph
entitled "Warranty Terms for Engineering Products"), arising directly or indirectly from the acts, omissions or
negligence of the purchaser in connection with or arising out of the testing, use, operation, replacement or
repair of any product described in this quotation and sold or furnished by the company to the purchaser.
1013.02/0295
73
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 113/458
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 114/458
MANUAL DE INSTALACION
Y MANTENIMIENTO
MOTORES ELECTRICOS DE INDUCCION
TRIFASICOS DE ALTA Y BAJA TENSION
PROLOGO
El motor elctrico es el equipo ms utilizado por el hombre en su caminada en busca del progreso,
ya que la mayora de las mquinas y muchos inventos conocidos dependen de l.
Como desempea un papel muy importante para el conforto y bienestar de la humanidad, el motor
elctrico necesita ser identificado y tratado como una mquina motriz cuyas caractersticas envuelven
determinados cuidados, de los cuales la instalacin y mantenimiento. Esto significa decir que el motor
elctrico debe ser tratado de forma adecuada.
El motor elctrico!
9300.0010 E/4
Octubre 2005
2
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 116/458
MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS
NDICE
1. INTRODUCCIN ......................................................................................................................................................................5
3
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 117/458
MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS
4
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 118/458
MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS
1. INTRODUCCIN
IMPORTANTE:
Este manual tiene por objetivo
atender todos los motores trifsicos
de induccin con rotor de jaula y
anillos de la Weg Mquinas. Motores con
especialidades pueden ser fornecidos con
documentos especficos (dibujos, esquema de
conexin, curvas caractersticas...). Estos
documentos deben ser criteriosamente evaluados
juntamente con este manual, antes de proceder la
instalacin, operacin o mantenimiento del motor.
Para los motores con grandes especialidades
constructivas, caso sea necesario alguna
aclaracin adicional, solicitamos entrar en
contacto con Weg Mquinas.
Todos los procedimientos y normas que constan
en este manual deben ser seguidos para
garantizar el buen desempeo del equipo y
seguridad de la persona responsable del mismo.
Seguir correctamente los procedimientos es muy
importante para que el trmino de garanta que
consta en la contra capa de este manual tenga
validez.
Aconsejamos por eso, una lectura detallada de
este manual, antes de instalar y poner en
funcionamiento el motor, en caso de alguna duda,
favor entrar en contacto con Weg Mquinas.
5
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 119/458
MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS
2.2. RECIBIMIENTO
2.3.2. ALMACENAJE EXTERNA
Los motores suministrados pasan por vigorosos
ensayos y estn en perfectas condiciones de Si posible, elija un local de almacenaje seco, libre
operacin. Las superficies torneadas son de inundaciones y libre de vibraciones.
protegidas contra oxidacin. La caja o container Repare todos los daos al embalaje antes de
deber ser revisado luego despus de su llegada poner el equipo en almacenaje, lo que es
para certificarse del perfecto estado o detectar necesario asegurar condiciones de almacenaje
algn dao causado en el transporte. Los motores apropiadas.
son transportados con un sistema de traba del eje Posicione las mquinas, los dispositivos y los
para prevenir daos en los descansos. Sugerimos embalajes en palletes, gavillas de madera o
que el dispositivo de traba sea debidamente fundaciones que garantizan la proteccin contra la
almacenado para ser usado cuando el motor humedad de la tierra.
necesite ser transportado. Impida el equipo de ahondarse en la tierra. La
Cualquier avera deber ser comunicada a la circulacin del aire debajo del equipo tambin no
empresa transportadora, al seguro y a Weg puede ser impedida.
Mquinas. En caso de no tomar estas La cobertura o lona usada para proteger el equipo
providencias ocasionar la prdida de la contra intemperies no deben hacer contacto con
garanta. las superficies del equipo. Asegure la circulacin
Al levantar el embalaje (o container) se deben de aire adecuada posicionando bloques de
observar los puntos de izamiento, el peso indicado madera espaciadores entre el equipo y tales
en el embalaje y la capacidad del guindaste. coberturas.
6
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 120/458
MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS
7
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 121/458
MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS
Evaluacin del
ndice de polarizacin
aislamiento
1 o menor Malo
< 1,5 Peligroso
1,5 2,0 Regular
2,0 3,0 Bueno
3,0 4,0 Muy bueno
> 4,0 Excelente
Tabla 2.3b. ndice de polarizacin (relacin entre 10 y 1
minuto).
Figura 2.3.
8
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 122/458
MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS
LNEA H
9
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 123/458
MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS
Las mquinas elctricas deben ser instaladas en Las fundaciones donde ser colocado el motor
locales que permitan fcil acceso para inspeccin deben ser planas y, si posible, exentos de
y mantenimiento, principalmente en lo referente a vibraciones.
los cojinetes (relubricacin) e inspeccin de las Se recomienda, por este motivo, una fundacin de
escobillas. concreto. El tipo de fundacin elegido depender
Si la atmsfera es hmeda, corrosiva o contiene de la naturaleza del suelo en el local de montaje,
partculas abrasivas, es importante asegurar el o de la resistencia de los pisos.
correcto grado de proteccin. En el dimensionamiento de las fundaciones del
La instalacin de motores donde existen vapores, motor debe ser considerado el hecho de que el
gases, polvaredas peligrosas, inflamables o motor puede, ocasionalmente, ser sometido a un
combustibles ofreciendo posibilidad de fuego o par mayor que el par nominal. Si este
explosin, debe ser hecha de acuerdo con las dimensionamiento no fuere criteriosamente
Normas ABNT NBR, NEC-Art.500 (National ejecutado podr ocasionar serios problemas de
Electrical Code) y UL-674 (Underwriter's vibracin del conjunto fundaciones-motor y
Laboratories Inc.). mquina accionada.
En ninguna circunstancia los motores podrn ser
cubiertos por cajas u otras coberturas que puedan OBS: En la base de concreto deber ser
impedir o disminuir la libre circulacin del aire de prevista una placa metlica para apoyo del perno
ventilacin. de nivelamiento.
Las mquinas dotadas de ventilacin externa
deben quedarse, como mnimo, a 50mm de altura Con base en la figura 3.1, los esfuerzos sobre la
del piso a fin de dejar pasar el aire. fundacin pueden ser calculados a travs de las
Las aberturas de entrada y salida de aire jams ecuaciones:
debern ser obstruidas o disminuidas por objetos, (4C max)
paredes, pilares, etc. F1 = +0.5.m.g. +
El ambiente en el local de la instalacin deber ( A)
tener condiciones de renovar el aire a orden de
20m por minuto para cada 100kW de potencia (4C max)
F2 = +0.5.m.g .
de la mquina. ( A)
3.1. ASPECTOS MECNICOS Donde:
F1 y F2 - Esfuerzo de los pis sobre la base (N)
3.1.1. MONTAJE g - Aceleracin de la gravedad (9,81m/s).
m - masa del motor (Kg).
Afn de asegurar la operacin adecuada, adems Cmx - Par mximo (Nm).
de una fundacin estable, el motor debe estar A - Se obtiene del dibujo dimensional del motor
precisamente aliado con el equipo acoplado y los (m).
componentes montados en su eje,
adecuadamente balanceados.
Observacin:
Con la mquina montada y acoplada, las
relaciones entre la frecuencia natural de la
fundacin y:
- La frecuencia de giro del motor;
- El doble de la frecuencia de giro;
- El doble de la frecuencia de la lnea.
Deben estar segn especificado abajo:
- Frecuencia natural de 1 orden de la
fundacin: Figura 3.1 - Esfuerzos sobre la base.
+25% o -20% con relacin a las frecuencias
arriba. NOTA: El dibujo arriba indica los esfuerzos en el
- Frecuencias naturales de la fundacin de motor cuando el sentido de giro es horario. Para
rdenes superiores: sentido antihorario. (F1, F2, 4. Cmx).
+10% o -10% con relacin a las frecuencias
arriba.
10
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 124/458
MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS
11
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 125/458
MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS
12
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 126/458
MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS
Figura 3.5.
13
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 127/458
MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS
Figura 3.7.
3.1.4. ACOPLAMIENTOS
Figura 3.8 - Montaje de poleas.
a) Acoplamiento directo
Se debe preferir siempre el acoplamiento directo, DESMONTAJE DE POLEAS: Para desmontaje
debido al menor costo, reducido espacio ocupado, las poleas se recomienda el uso de dispositivos
ausencia de deslizamiento (correas) y mayor como es mostrado en la figura 3.9, procedindose
seguridad contra accidentes. En caso de con mucho cuidado para no daar la chaveta y el
transmisin con reduccin de velocidad, es usual asiento de la polea.
tambin el acoplamiento directo a travs de
reductores.
14
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 128/458
MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS
FUNCIONAMIENTO: Deben ser evitados los Debido a tensiones existentes en las correas,
esfuerzos radiales desnecesarios en los cojinetes, curre una reaccin actuando como carga radial en
situando los ejes paralelos entre s y las poleas la punta del eje del motor.
perfectamente alineadas (figura 3.11).
Correas que trabajan lateralmente alternante al Los datos para calcular esta reaccin (fuerza
rotor, y pueden daar las escoras del descanso. radial), son:
El deslice de la correa puede ser evitado con - Potencia transmitida [kW] (P);
aplicacin de un material resinoso, como la brea, - Rotacin motora [rpm] (RPM);
por ejemplo. - Diametro de la polea movida [mm] (DPMV);
- Diametro de la polea motora [mm] (DPMT);
- Distancia entre los centros [mm] (I);
- Coeficiente del rozamiento [-] (MI) -
(normalmente 0,5);
- Coeficiente de deslizamiento [-] (K);
- ngulo de contacto de la correa en la polea
menor [RAD] (alfa).
DPMV DPMT
ALFA =
1
(MIxALFA) + 1
K = 1.1x
(MIxALFA) 1
18836,25N K 2 x[1 COS ( ALFA] + 1.21x[1 + COS ( ALFA)]
FR = x
DPMTxRPM 2
15
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 129/458
MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS
3.2.2. CONEXIN
16
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 130/458
MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS
17
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 131/458
MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS
Los esquemas de conexin a seguir muestran la identificacin de los terminales en la caja de conexin y las
conexiones posibles para el estator (fases) y rotor de los motores de induccin trifsicos.
Los nmeros descritos en cada esquema en la tabla abajo sirven para el usuario identificar el esquema de
conexin correspondiente al su motor a travs de una tarjeta fijada en el motor donde estn descritos los
nmeros de los cdigos correspondientes a los esquemas de conexin del estator, rotor y accesorios:
3 BORNES + NEUTRO
9121
9 BORNES 12 BORNES
9107 9108 9109 9110 9111 9112 9113 9114
YY Y YY Y
18
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 132/458
MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS
3 BORNES + NEUTRO
9221
9 BORNES 12 BORNES
9207 9208 9209 9210 9211 9212 9213 9214
YY Y YY Y
SENTIDO DE GIRO
- El sentido de giro est descrito en la tarjeta de identificacin y debe ser visto en la extremidad del eje del lado
accionado del motor.
- Motores con la identificacin de los terminales y conexiones descritas en los captulos 3.2.4.1 y 3.2.4.2 de este
manual poseen sentido de giro horario.
- Para invertir el sentido de giro se debe invertir la conexin de dos fases.
- Los motores con sentido nico de giro, indicados en la tarjeta de identificacin por una seta fija en la carcasa,
poseen ventilador unidireccional e deben operar solamente en el sentido especificado.
- Para inversin del sentido de giro de motores unidireccionales, se debe consultar la WEG.
19
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 133/458
MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS
Los esquemas de conexin a seguir muestran la identificacin de los terminales en la caja de conexin y las
conexiones de los accesorios de los motores de induccin trifsicos.
Los nmeros descritos en cada esquema de la tabla abajo sirven para el usuario identificar la conexin de
los accesorios correspondiente al su motor a travs de una tarjeta fijada en el motor donde estn descritos
los nmeros de los cdigos correspondientes a los esquemas de conexin del estator, rotor y accesorios:
16 a 29 = Resistencia de calentamiento.
20 a 27 = Termoresistencia en el estator.
36 a 43 = Termistores en el estator.
52 a 59 = Termostatos en el estator.
68 a 71 = Termoresistencias en los descansos.
72 a 75 = Termistores en los descansos.
76 a 79 = Termostatos en los descansos.
80 a 82 = Dnamos taquimtricos.
88 a 91 = Termmetros.
92 a 93 = Frenos.
94 a 99 = Transformadores.
ALARMA PARADA
9032 9036
EN EL ESTATOR EN LOS DESCANSOS
2 POR FASE EN SERIE 1 POR DESCANSO
TERMISTORES
9025 9026 9027
EN EL ESTATOR EN EL ESTATOR EN EL ESTATOR
1 POR FASE 1 POR FASE EN SERIE 2 POR FASE
ALARMA PARADA
9028 9035
EN EL ESTATOR EN LOS DESCANSOS
2 POR FASE EN SERIE 1 POR DESCANSO
DELANTERO TRASERO
ALARMA PARADA
20
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 134/458
MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS
TERMOSENSORES PT100
9021 9022 9023
EN EL ESTATOR EN EL ESTATOR EN EL ESTATOR
1 POR FASE 1 POR FASE CON 3 CABLES 2 POR FASE
ALARMA PARADA
ACCESORIOS ADICIONALES
21
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 135/458
MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS
22
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 136/458
MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS
23
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 137/458
MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS
o
C 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 100.00 100.39 100.78 101.17 101.56 101.95 102.34 102.73 103.12 103.51
10 103.90 104.29 104.68 105.07 105.46 105.95 106.24 106.63 107.02 107.40
20 107.79 108.18 108.57 108.96 109.35 109.73 110.12 110.51 110.90 111.28
30 111.67 112.06 112.45 112.83 113.22 113.61 113.99 114.38 114.77 115.15
40 115.54 115.93 116.31 116.70 117.08 117.47 117.85 118.24 118.62 119.01
50 119.40 119.78 120.16 120.55 120.93 121.32 121.70 122.09 122.47 122.86
60 123.24 123.62 124.01 124.39 124.77 125.16 125.54 125.92 126.31 126.69
70 127.07 127.45 127.84 128.22 128.60 128.98 129.37 129.75 130.13 130.51
80 130.89 131.27 131.66 132.04 132.42 132.80 133.18 133.56 133.94 134.32
90 134.70 135.08 135.46 135.84 136.22 136.60 136.98 137.36 137.74 138.12
100 138.50 138.88 139.26 139.64 140.02 140.39 140.77 141.15 141.53 141.91
110 142.29 142.66 143.04 143.42 143.80 144.17 144.55 144.93 145.31 145.68
120 146.06 146.44 146.81 147.19 147.57 147.94 148.32 148.70 149.07 149.45
130 149.82 150.20 150.57 150.95 151.33 151.70 152.08 152.45 152.83 153.20
140 153.58 153.95 154.32 154.70 155.07 155.45 155.82 156.19 156.57 156.94
150 157.31 157.69 158.06 158.43 158.81 159.18 159.55 159.93 160.30 160.67
Tabla 3.8 - Variacin de la resistencia calibrada de Platino.
OBS.: Cuando exista previsin de una caja de conexin para accesorios, en esta caja estarn los conectores
de instalacin de los protectores trmicos y otros accesorios. Caso contrario, los conectores de los accesorios
estarn en la caja principal.
24
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 138/458
MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS
25
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 139/458
MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS
26
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 140/458
MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS
Accionar el motor acoplado a la carga hasta llegar Para un buen planeamiento del nivel de conforto
a su estabilidad trmica y observar si aparecen acstico en residencias, oficinas y fbricas, es
ruidos y vibraciones anormales o temperaturas muy importante observar como se origina el ruido
excesivas. Caso aparezcan variaciones de de motores y como afecta el nivel de ruido del
vibraciones significativas en el conjunto, entre la ambiente donde estn instalados. Las siguientes
condicin inicial de funcionamiento y la condicin partes de un motor pueden producir ruido en la
despus de la estabilidad trmica, es necesario faja audible:
reanalizar el alineamiento y el nivelamiento. 1) El sistema de refrigeracin.
Comparar la corriente de linea absorvida, con el 2) Las escobillas.
valor indicado en la placa de identificacin. 3) Los rodamientos.
En regimen continuo, sin oscilacin de carga, este 4) El circuito magntico.
no debe exceder la corriente nominal por el factor
de servicio indicado en la placa. La parte del motor que predomina como fuente
Todos los instrumentos y aparatos de medicin y de ruido depende del tamao de la mquina, de
control, debern quedar sobre observacin su velocidad de giro, del grado de proteccin
permanente a fin de que eventuales alteraciones mecnica (involucro) y de la mquina. El ruido
puedan ser constatadas y sanadas sus causas. debido al sistema de refrigeracin es propagado
En caso de motores de anillos se debe hacer un por aire y generalmente afecta el nivel de ruido
levantamiento real de las condiciones de la carga apenas del ambiente donde est instalado. Pero,
a la que el motor ser sometido en regimen de si el ruido se origina en los rodamientos o en el
trabajo, y si necesario recalcular el conjunto de circuito magntico, la situacin es distinta: el
escobillas. En caso de duda, consultar a Weg ruido se debe a vibraciones mecnicas de parte o
Mquinas. de toda la mquina, y el sonido puede propagarse
a travs de las fundaciones, de las paredes o
tubos de la mquina. Este tipo de propagacin, a
travs de los componentes estructurales de la
instalacin, puede ser reducido por el montaje de
la mquina sobre amortiguadores adecuadamente
3.3.4. DESCONEXIN calculados; se debe tener presente que los
amortiguadores colocados inadecuadamente
Cabe aqu, antes de cualquier situacin, una pueden amplificar las vibraciones.
advertencia muy seria: mientras hay un motor
girando, aunque despus de ser desconectado,
constituye peligro de vida tocar en cualquier
3.5. MOTORES APLICADOS EN AREA DE
parte activa de este.
RIESGO / ATMOSFERAS EXPLOSIVAS
a) MOTOR CON ROTOR DE JAULA:
Los motores especificados para operar en reas
Bastar abrir la llave del circuito estatrico y una
de riesgo poseen caractersticas adicionales de
vez parado el motor, recolocar el
seguridad que estn definidas en normas
autotransformador, si existe, en la posicin de
especficas para cada tipo de rea de riesgo,
arranque.
conforme su clasificacin.
Los requerimientos generales para equipamientos
b) MOTOR CON ROTOR DE ANILLOS:
que operan en reas de riesgo, estn descriptos
Deber ser abierta la cuchilla del circuito
en las siguientes normas brasileas e
estatrico. Despus de la parada, el restato
internacionales respectivamente:
deber ser recolocado en la posicin de
NBR 9518 = Equipamientos Elctricos para
"arranque".
atmsferas explosivas.
Requerimientos generales (especificaciones).
*** ATENCIN *** IEC 79-0 = Electrical Apparatus for explosive gas
Las cajas de conexin de motores atmospheres.
equipados con capacitores no deben ser General Requirements.
abiertas antes del tiempo de descarga: EN 50014 = Electrical apparatus for potentially
Tiempo de descarga de los capacitores: 5 explosive atmospheres.
minutos despus de la desconexin del General Requirements.
motor.
27
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 141/458
MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS
28
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 142/458
MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS
29
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 143/458
MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS
4.2.1. DESCANSOS CON RODAMIENTO Los motores WEG son suministrados con grasa
LUBRICADOS A GRASA POLYREX EM 103 (Fabricante: Esso) hasta la
carcasa 450 y grasa STABURAGS N12MF
La finalidad del mantenimiento, en este caso, es (Fabricante: Klber) para la carcasa 500 y
prolongar lo mximo, la vida til del sistema de mayores, en cantidad suficiente para el periodo
descansos. de funcionamiento indicado en la hoja de datos y
El mantenimiento requiere: en la tarjeta de identificacin de los rodamientos.
a) Observacin del estado general en que se Los intervalos de lubricacin, cantidad de grasa y
encuentran los descansos. los rodamientos usados en los motores, estn en
b) Lubricacin y limpieza. las tablas anexadas, como valores orientativos.
c) Examen ms minucioso de los rodamientos. El periodo de relubricacin depende del tamao
El ruido en los motores deber ser observado en del motor, de la velocidad de rotacin, de las
intervalos regulares de 1 a 4 meses. Un odo bien condiciones de trabajo, del tipo de grasa utilizado
entrenado es perfectamente capaz de distinguir el y de la temperatura de trabajo.
aparecimiento de ruidos anmalos, aunque El periodo de lubricacin y el tipo de rodamientos
empleando medios bien simples (como un para cada motor estn gravados en la plaqueta
desarmador, etc.). de identificacin colocada en el motor.
Para un anlisis ms confiable de los descansos,
aconsejamos la utilizacin de equipos que El motor que permanecer en
permitan hacer anlisis predictivas. existencia debe ser re-lubricado a
cada 6 meses. Todos los meses se
El control de la temperatura en los debe girar el eje algunas vueltas para
descansos tambin hace parte de la homogeneizar la grasa por los
rutina del mantenimiento. Donde los descansos.
descansos deben ser Los intervalos de lubricacin, cantidad de grasa y
lubrificados los rodamientos usados en los motores, estn en
utilizando grasas recomendados segn el iten las tablas 4.2 a y 4.2 b, como valores orientativos.
4.2.1.2 y la temperatura nunca deber ultrapasar
los 60oC (T = 60C / Ambiente mximo = 40C,
Los datos de los rodamientos, cantidad y
temperatura absoluta = T + ambiente) medido
tipo de grasa y intervalo de lubricacin
en el anillo externo del rodamiento.
son informados en una placa de
identificacin fijada en el motor.
La temperatura puede ser controlada
Antes del procedimiento de lubricacin
permanentemente con termmetros, colocados de
de los descansos, verifique estos datos.
lado de fuera del soporte, o con termo-elementos
embutidos.
30
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 144/458
MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS
INTERVALO MXIMO DE LUBRICACIN (EN HORAS) PARA MOTORES CON EJE HORIZONTAL 60HZ
Descanso trasero
Descanso Descanso trasero
Descanso Descanso trasero motor de anillos
delantero (con motor de anillos
Carcasa Polos delantero (motor de jaula) (escobillas
polea) (escobillas fijas)
levantables)
Rodamiento Relub Rodamiento Relub Rodamiento Relub Rodamiento Relub Rodamiento Relub
2 6314 3.400 6314 3.400
4 6.400 2.000 8.900 6.600 6.600
315
6 6320 10.000 NU322 4.500 6316 10.000 6222 10.000 6222 10.000
8 10.000 6.400 10.000 10.000 10.000
2 6314 3.400 6314 3.400
4 4.800 1.600 6.400 5.800 5.800
355
6 6322 8.700 NU324 3.900 6320 10.000 6224 10.000 6224 10.000
8 10.000 5.800 10.000 10.000 10.000
4 2.200 1.400 6.400 5.100 3.400
400 6 NU224 4.900 NU228 3.700 6320 10.000 6226 9.300 6230 6.900
8 6.800 5.500 10.000 10.000 9.800
4 2.200 4.800 3.400 6234 2.500
450 6 NU224 4.900 6322 8.700 6230 3.400 5.600
6234
8 6.800 10.000 3.400 8.400
4 1.800 4.800 3.400 2.500
500 6 NU226 4.300 6322 8.700 6230 6.900 6234 5.600
8 6.200 10.000 9.800 8.400
4
6 NU228 3.700 5.500 3.100 2.300
8 5.500 7.500 4.900 3.900
560 NU222 NU230 NU234
4
6 NU232 2.700 5.500 3.100 2.300
8 4.400 7.500 4.900 3.900
4
6 1.200 4.900 3.100 2.300
8 23032 2.200 6.800 4.900 3.900
10 3.100 8.100 6.300 5.200
12 3.800 9.000 7.300 6.200
630 NU224 NU230 NU234
4
6
8 23036 1.600 6.800 4.900 3.900
10 2.400 8.100 6.300 5.200
12 3.100 9.000 7.300 6.200
6
8 1.600 6.200 4.400 3.900
23036
10 2.400 7.500 5.700 5.200
12 3.100 8.400 6.700 6.200
710 NU226 NU232 NU234
6
8 1.300 6.200 4.400 3.900
23040
10 2.000 7.500 5.700 5.200
12 2.600 8.400 6.700 6.200
Grasa Polyrex EM 103 (Esso) Grasa Staburags N12MF (Klber)
Tabla 4.2a.
NOTAS:
- Intervalo de relubricacin normal adoptado para temperatura ambiente de 40C y tipos de grasa
especificados arriba;
- Para aplicacin de los descansos en posicin vertical, disminuir los intervalos a la mitad;
- Temperatura de trabajo del rodamiento = 70C;
- Adoptar los factores de correccin de abajo en los intervalos de lubricacin de la tabla de arriba, en los
siguientes casos:
- Temperatura de operacin menor que 60C: 1,59.
- Temperatura de operacin de 70C hasta 80C: 0,63.
- Temperatura de operacin de 80C hasta 90C: 0,40.
31
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 145/458
MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS
INTERVALO MXIMO DE LUBRICACIN (EN HORAS) PARA MOTORES CON EJE HORIZONTAL - 50Hz
Descanso trasero
Descanso Descanso trasero
Descanso Descanso trasero motor de anillos
delantero (con motor de anillos
Carcasa Polos delantero (motor de jaula) (escobillas
polea) (escobillas fijas)
levantables)
Rodamiento Relub Rodamiento Relub Rodamiento Relub Rodamiento Relub Rodamiento Relub
2 6314 4.900 6314 4.900
4 8.300 3.000 10.000 8.500 8.500
315
6 6320 10.000 NU322 5.700 6316 10.000 6222 10.000 6222 10.000
8 10.000 7.600 10.000 10.000 10.000
2 6314 4.900 6314 4.900
4 6.500 2.500 8.300 7.700 7.700
355
6 6322 10.000 NU324 5.100 6320 10.000 6224 10.000 6224 10.000
8 10.000 6.900 10.000 10.000 10.000
2 6317 3.400 6317 3.400
4 3.300 2.300 8.300 6.900 4.800
400
6 NU224 6.100 NU228 4.900 6320 10.000 6226 10.000 6230 8.700
8 7.900 6.700 10.000 10.000 10.000
4 3.300 6.500 4.800 6234 3.700
450 6 NU224 6.100 6322 10.000 6230 8.700 7.300
6234
8 7.900 10.000 10.000 10.000
4 2.800 6.500 4.800 3.700
500 6 NU226 5.500 6322 10.000 6230 8.700 6234 7.300
8 7.300 10.000 10.000 10.000
4 2.300 3.900 1.900 1.300
6 NU228 4.900 6.800 4.300 3.300
8 6.700 8.600 6.100 5.000
560 NU222 NU230 NU234
4
6 NU232 3.800 6.800 4.300 3.300
8 5.500 8.600 6.100 5.000
4
6 1.800 6.100 4.300 3.300
8 23032 2.900 7.900 6.100 5.000
10 3.800 9.000 7.300 6.200
12 4.400 9.600 8.000 7.100
630 NU224 NU230 NU234
4
6 1.300 6.100 4.300 3.300
8 23036 2.300 7.900 6.100 5.000
10 3.100 9.000 7.300 6.200
12 3.700 9.600 8.000 7.100
6 1.300 5.500 3.800 3.300
8 2.300 7.300 5.500 5.000
23036
10 3.100 8.400 6.700 6.200
12 3.700 9.100 7.600 7.100
710 NU226 NU232 NU234
6 1.000 5.500 3.800 3.300
8 1.800 7.300 5.500 5.000
23040
10 2.600 8.400 6.700 6.200
12 3.200 9.100 7.600 7.100
Grasa Polyrex EM 103 (Esso) Grasa Staburags N12MF (Klber)
Tabla 4.2b.
NOTAS:
- Intervalo de relubricacin normal adoptado para temperatura ambiente de 40C y tipos de grasa
especificados arriba;
- Para aplicacin de los descansos en posicin vertical, disminuir los intervalos a la mitad;
- Temperatura de trabajo del rodamiento = 70C;
- Adoptar los factores de correccin de abajo en los intervalos de lubricacin de la tabla de arriba,
en los siguientes casos:
- Temperatura de operacin menor que 60C: 1,59.
- Temperatura de operacin de 70C hasta 80C: 0,63.
- Temperatura de operacin de 80C hasta 90C: 0,40.
32
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 146/458
MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS
Opciones de grasas
TEMPERATURA DE TRABAJO
FABRICANTE GRASA APLICACIN
CONSTANTE (C)
ESSO UNIREX N2 (BASE COMPLEXO DE LTIO) (-35 hasta +175)
PETROBRAS LUBRAX GMA-2 (BASE DE LTIO) (0 hasta +130) NORMAL
ALVNIA R3 (BASE DE LTIO) (-35 hasta +130)
SHELL
AEROSHELL 7 (MICROGEL) (-55 hasta +100)
BAJA TEMPERATURA
ESSO BEACON 325 (BASE DE LTIO) (-50 hasta +120)
Tabla 4.3b.
Rodamiento de rodillos
Rodamiento de esferas Rodamiento de rodillos
Auto compensador
Rodamiento Grasa (g) Rodamiento Grasa (g) Rodamiento Grasa (g)
6222 40 NU222 40 23032 75
6224 45 NU224 45 23036 105
6226 50 NU226 50 23040 130
6230 65 NU228 55 Tabla 4.4c.
6234 85 NU230 65
6314 30 NU232 70
6316 35 NU234 85
6320 50 Tabla 4.4b.
6322 60
Tabla 4.4a.
33
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 147/458
MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS
Para se evitar cualquier posible problema de no fin de evitar la entrada de materiales extraos en
compatibilidad de grasas, una buena prctica de los rodamientos.
lubricacin consiste en se introducir una nueva
grasa en el equipamiento, eliminndose por Para lubricacin, use exclusivamente pistola
completo la grasa vieja y limpiando perfectamente engrasadora manual.
el local que ser lubricado.
Cuando esto no fuere posible, se debe aplicar
grasa nueva bajo presin, expulsndose la
antigua, hasta salir la grasa limpia por el dreno
del descanso.
En general, grasas con el mismo tipo de jabn
son compatibles entre si, pero dependiendo de la
proporcin de mezcla, puede haber no
compatibilidad. As siendo, no es recomendable la
mezcla de diferentes tipos de grasas, sin antes
consultar el representante tcnico o la WEG.
Algunos espesantes y aceites bsicos, no pueden
ser mezclados entre si. Figura 4.2 - Rodamientos y sistemas de
Se forma entonces una mezcla no homognea. lubricacin.
En este caso, no se puede despreciar una
tendencia al endurecimiento, o al contrario, un 4.2.1.6. ETAPAS DE RELUBRICACIN DE
ablandamiento de la grasa (o cada del punto de LOS RODAMIENTOS
gota de la mezcla resultante). 1. Retirar la tapa del dreno.
2. Limpiar con trapo de algodn las proximidades
4.2.1.5. INSTRUCCIONES PARA del agujero de la grasera.
LUBRICACIN 3. Con el motor en funcionamiento, adicionar la
grasa por medio de la pistola engrasadora
Todos los motores de alta/baja tensin poseen manual hasta que la grasa comiese a salir por
graseras para lubricacin de los rodamientos. El el dreno o hasta haber sido introducida la
sistema de lubricacin fue proyectado para que cantidad de grasa recomendada en la tabla.
en la relubricacin de los rodamientos, toda la 4. Dejar el motor funcionando durante el tiempo
grasa sea retirada de las pistas de los suficiente para que se drene todo el exceso de
rodamientos y expelida a travs de un dreno que grasa.
permita la salida e impide la entrada de polvos u 5. Verifique la temperatura del cojinete para
otros contaminantes nocivos al rodamiento. Este verificar que no ocurri ninguna alteracin
dreno tambin evita el dao de los rodamientos significativa.
por el conocido problema de la relubricacin
excesiva. Es aconsejable hacer la relubricacin 4.2.1.7. DISPOSITIVO DE RESORTE PARA
durante el funcionamiento del motor, de modo a RETIRAR LA GRASA
permitir la renovacin de la grasa en el Cuando la salida de grasa del cojinete no est
alojamiento de rodamiento. Si esto no fuera accesible al operador, algunos motores son
posible debido a la presencia de las piezas provistos con un dispositivo con resorte para
girantes cerca de la engrasadora (poleas, etc.) retirar la grasa durante la relubricacin de los
que pueden poner en riesgo la integridad fsica cojinetes.
del operador, se procede de la siguiente manera: Etapas para relubricacin:
- Se inyecta aproximadamente mitad de la 1. Antes de empezar el procedimiento de
cantidad total estimada de la grasa y se coloca lubricacin del cojinete, limpie la grasera con
el motor a girar durante aproximadamente 1 un trapo de algodn;
minuto en plena rotacin; 2. Retire la varilla con resorte, limpie el resorte y
- Se para el motor y se inyecta el restante de la coloque nuevamente;
grasa. 3. Con el rotor en funcionamiento, adicione la
La inyeccin de toda la grasa con el motor cantidad de grasa especificada en la tarjeta de
parado puede llevar a entrar una parte del identificacin de los rodamientos por medio de
lubrificante en el interior del motor, a travs de la equipamiento engrasador manual.
veda interna de la caja del rodamiento. 4. El exceso de grasa sale por el drenaje inferior
del cojinete y se almacena en el resorte.
OBS.: Es importante mantener las graseras
limpias antes de la introduccin de la grasa con el
34
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 148/458
MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS
4.2.2.1. CARACTERSTICAS
35
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 149/458
MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS
36
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 150/458
MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS
37
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 151/458
MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS
38
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 152/458
MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS
39
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 153/458
MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS
Figura 4.5.
40
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 154/458
MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS
4.2.4.1. INSTRUCCIONES GENERALES - Use los tornillos con ojales (9) para levantar la
parte superior de la carcasa (5)
El mantenimiento de descansos de deslizamiento desencajndola completamente de la inferior
incluye la verificacin peridica del nivel y de las de la veda externa (11), los laberintos de
condiciones del lubrificante, verificar los niveles de veda, de los alojamientos de los laberintos
ruido y de vibraciones del soporte, acompaar el (20) y de casquillo (12).
nivel de temperatura de trabajo y ajuste de los - Siga desmontando la parte superior de la
tornillos de montaje. La carcasa debe ser carcasa sobre una banca. Destornille los
mantenida limpia, sin acumulo de aceite o polvo tornillos (19) y retire la parte superior de la
en la parte externa para facilitar el intercambio de proteccin externa. Remover los tornillos (10)
calor con el medio ambiente. y desencaje la parte superior del alojamiento
Agujeros con rosca para conexin de termmetro, del laberinto (20).
visor de nivel, entrada y salida de aceite, bomba - Desencaje y retire la parte superior del
de circulacin de aceite o termmetro para lectura casquillo (13).
en el depsito son entregados en ambos lados, de - Remover los tornillos que unen las dos partes
manera que las conexiones puedan ser hechas de la anillo pescador (14) y separarlos
por el lado derecho o izquierdo de la carcasa del cuidadosamente y sacarles.
soporte. - Retire los resortes circulares de la anillo
El dreno del aceite esta localizado en la parte laberinto y remover la parte superior de cada
inferior del soporte. anillo. Gire las partes inferiores de las anillos
En caso de descansos con lubricacin por para fuera de sus alojamientos y retiradas.
circulacin de aceite la tubera de salida debe ser - Desconecte y retire el sensor de temperatura
conectada en la posicin del visor de nivel. que est en la parte inferior del casquillo.
Si el soporte es elctricamente aislado las - Usando un levantador o una gata, levantar el
superficies esfricas del asiento del casquillo en la eje apenas unos milmetros para que la parte
carcasa son encapadas con un material aislante. inferior del casquillo pueda girar para fuera de
Nunca retire esta capa. su asiento.
La traba anti-giro tambin es aislada, y los sellos
de veda son hechos de material no conductor. IMPORTANTE: Para esto es necesario que los
Instrumentos de control de temperatura que tornillos 4 y 6 de la otra parte del soporte estn
estn en contacto con el casquillo tambin deben sueltos.
ser debidamente aislados. - Gire cuidadosamente la parte inferior del
Descansos refrigerados con agua son casquillo sobre el eje y retirarla.
suministrados con serpentina de refrigeracin - Desatornille los tornillos (19) y retire la parte
instalada y deben ser manejados con cuidado inferior de la proteccin externa (11).
especialmente para no daar las conexiones - Desatornille los tornillos (10) y remover la
durante el transporte y la propia instalacin. parte inferior del alojamiento del anillo
laberinto (21).
4.2.4.2. DESMONTAJE DEL DESCANSO (TIPO - Retire los tornillos (4) y remover la parte
EF) inferior de la carcasa (2).
- Desatornille los tornillos (8) y remover el sello
Para desmontar el descanso y tener acceso a los mquina (7).
casquillos, bien como a otros componentes siga - Limpie y inspeccione completamente las piezas
cuidadosamente las instrucciones indicadas a removidas y el interior de la carcasa.
seguir. Guardar todas las piezas desmontadas en - Para montar el soporte siga las instrucciones
un local seguro (ver figura 4.5). dadas para desmontar en orden inversa.
41
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 155/458
MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS
- Destornille los tornillos (4) que fijan la parte cuidando para que las superficies axiales de
superior de la carcasa (5) al motor (3). Retire posicionamiento no sean daadas.
los tornillos (6) que unen las fases bipartidas Despus alinear cuidadosamente las caras de la
de la carcasa del soporte (2 y 5). parte inferior del casquillo y de la carcasa baje
- Use los tornillos de ojales (9) para levantar la con mucho cuidado el eje hasta la posicin de
parte superior de la carcasa (5) trabajo. Con un martillo golpee suavemente en la
desencajndola completamente de la parte carcasa para que el casquillo se posicione
inferior de la carcasa (2), del laberinto de veda correctamente en relacin a su asiento y su eje.
y del casquillo (12). Este procedimiento genera una vibracin de alta
- Desencaje y retire la parte superior del frecuencia que disminuye el rozamiento esttico
casquillo (13). entre el casquillo y la carcasa y facilita el correcto
- Remover los tornillos que unen las dos partes alineamiento. La capacidad de auto-alineamiento
del anillo pescadora (14) y separarlos del soporte tiene la funcin de compensar solo la
cuidadosamente y retirarlas. deflexin normal del eje durante el montaje. En
- Retire el resorte circular del anillo laberinto y seguida debe montarse el anillo pescador, lo que
remover la parte superior del anillo. Gire la tendr que ser hecho con mucho cuidado, pues el
parte inferior del anillo laberinto para fuera de funcionamiento perfecto del soporte depende de
su alojamiento y retirarla. la lubricacin provista por el anillo. Los tornillos
- Desconecte y remueva el sensor de deben ser apretados levemente y cualquier
temperatura que esta en la parte inferior del rebaba cuidadosamente retirada para
casquillo. proporcionar un funcionamiento suave y uniforme
- Usando un levantador o una gata levante el del anillo. En un eventual mantenimiento se debe
eje apenas unos milmetros para que la parte cuidar para que la geometra del anillo no sea
inferior del casquillo pueda girar para fuera de alterada.
su asiento. Las partes inferior y superior del casquillo poseen
- Gire cuidadosamente la parte inferior del nmeros de identificacin o marcaciones para
casquillo (12) sobre el eje y removerlo. orientar su posicionamiento. Posicione la parte
- Retire los tornillos (4) y remueva la parte superior del casquillo alineado con las marcas con
inferior de la carcasa (2). las correspondientes de la parte inferior. Montajes
- Desatornille los tornillos (8) y remueva el sello incorrectos pueden causar serios daos a los
mquina (7). casquillos.
- Limpie e inspeccione completamente las piezas Verifique si el anillo pescador gira libremente
removidas y el interior de la carcasa. sobre el eje. Con la parte inferior del casquillo
- Para montar el soporte siga las instrucciones posicionada instale el sello de veda del lado de la
dadas para desmontar de forma inversa. brida del soporte. (Ver pargrafo "Vedas").
Despus revestir las fases bipartidas de la carcasa
NOTA: Par de apriete de los tornillos de fijacin con un componente de vedas que no endurezca
del soporte al motor = 10 Kgfm. rpidamente, monte la parte superior de la
carcasa (5) cuidando para que los sellos de veda
4.2.4.3. MONTAJE DEL DESCANSO ajusten perfectamente en sus encajes.
Certifquese tambin que el buje anti-giro est
Verificar las superficies del encaje de la brida encajado sin ningn contacto con el agujero
certificndose para que estn limpias, planas y sin correspondiente en el casquillo.
rebabas.
Verifique si las medidas del eje estn dentro de NOTA: Carcasa o casquillo son
las tolerancias especificadas por la Renk y si la intercambiables siempre que
rugosidad esta dentro de lo exigido (< 0,4). considerados completos (mitades
Remueva la parte superior de la carcasa (2) y los individuales no son intercambiables).
casquillos (12 y 13), verifique si no hubo ningn
dao durante el transporte y limpie 4.2.4.4. AJUSTE DE LAS PROTECCIONES
completamente las superficies de contacto. (PT100)
Levante el eje algunos milmetros y encaje la Cada soporte est equipado con un detector de
brida de la parte inferior del bancal en el rebajo temperatura tipo PT100 instalado directamente en
torneado en la tapa de la mquina atornillndola el casquillo, prximo a la zona de la carga. Este
en esta posicin. Aplique aceite en el asiento dispositivo deber ser conectado a un panel de
esfrico de la carcasa y el eje, coloque el casquillo comando con la funcin de indicar
inferior (12) sobre el eje y gire para su posicin sobrecalentamientos y de proteger el soporte de
daos debido al trabajo con temperatura elevada.
42
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 156/458
MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS
43
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 157/458
MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS
44
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 158/458
MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS
45
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 159/458
MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS
Figura 4.10.
46
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 160/458
MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS
Figura 4.11.
47
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 161/458
MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS
OBS.:
LLAVES FIN DE CURSO ADICIONALES PARA 1) El sistema automtico de levantamiento de las
SEALIZACIN escobillas, posee un sistema de proteccin de
CCL1 y CCL2 = Llave fin de curso para indicar sobrecarga del actuador eletromecnico de
cuando las escobillas estuvieren totalmente accionamiento (9), a travs de las llaves de
levantadas. par para desconexin bajo sobrecarga, durante
CCA1 y CCA2 = Llave fin de curso para indicar el asentamiento (CLD) o levantamiento de las
cuando las escobillas estuvieren totalmente escobillas (CLE).
asentadas.
48
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 162/458
MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS
Figura 4.16.
Figura 4.17.
49
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 163/458
MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS
PASSADOR RETENTOR
CLAVIJA DEL RODILLO
RODAMIENTO
LA ZONA REBAJADA
DEBE ESTAR EN ESTA
POSICION PARA QUE EL
PASADOR RETENTOR NO
CHOQUE COM EL DISCO
DE LEVANTAMIENTO
DETALLE X
DISCO
SUPORTE DE
FIJADOR DEL CONJUNTO CLAVIJA DE
LAS CLAVIJAS
DE LEVANTAMIENTO LEVANTAMIENTO
Figura 4.18.
50
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 164/458
MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS
1. Montar el rodillo en el casquillo del rodillo en el 4. Fijar el soporte de encaje en la base del
brazo de movimiento del casquillo de corto y soporte y los brazos de movimiento en el
enseguida, los rodamientos, el casquillo soporte. Los rodillos debern estar alineados
distanciador y fijar la tapa del rodamiento. con el casquillo de cortocircuito de manera que
estos toquen simultaneamente en el casquillo.
2. Fijar los pasadores superiores en un de los
brazos de movimiento. NOTA.: Rodamiento del brazos de movimiento:
6003Z.
RODAMIENTOS
BRAZO DE
MOVIMIENTO
TAPA DEL
CASQUILLO
DETALLE X
CASQUILLO
RODILLO DEL CASQUILLO DISTANCIADOR
DETALLE X
Figura 4.19.
51
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 165/458
MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS
4. Fijar el disco de levantamiento en el eje de 2) Todas las partes con contactos mecnicos
accionamiento. debern ser lubricados. Despus de 6 meses
de uso, verificar la lubricacin de estas partes.
ACTUADOR ELECTROMECANICO
TORNILLO DE AJUSTE
DISCO BATIENTE
Figura 4.20.
52
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 166/458
MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS
Figura 4.21.
53
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 167/458
MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS
54
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 168/458
MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS
4.8.2. LNEA A
Lado accionado:
1. Desconecte los cables de las resistencias de
calentamiento de las cajas de conexin.
2. Retire los detectores de temperatura de los
soportes (si hay).
3. Suelte los tornillos que fijan el conjunto del
soporte.
4. Retire los anillos externos de fijacin (para
motores con descansos de rodamiento).
4.1. Para motores con descansos de
deslizamiento, seguir el procedimiento
descrito en el tem 4.2.2.2.
5. Desatornille la tapa. Por medio de herramienta
adecuada vaya forzando la tapa para que
salga, girndola. Certifquese que el eje este
apoyado para evitar la cada del rotor sobre el
estator.
6. Remueva el(los) rodamiento(s) (para motores
con descansos de rodamiento).
7. Retire el anillo interno de fijacin.
Lado no accionado:
1. Retire la tapa deflectora.
5. Suelte el anillo de retencin del ventilador.
6. Repita las operaciones 2 a 7 del tem 4.8.2(a).
OBS.:
1. Para retirar el rotor observe el tem 4.8.1.2.
2. El estator no necesita ser retirado de la
carcasa para eventual reparos en el bobinado.
4.8.3. LNEA F
Lado accionado:
Idntico lnea A y H.
Lado no accionado:
1. Repetir operaciones 1 a 3 del tem 4.8.2(b).
2. Retire la tapa trasera de la proteccin de los
portaescobillas.
3. Desconecte los cables de las anillos colectores.
4. Retire las escobillas y desmonte el
portaescobillas.
55
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 169/458
MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS
4.8.4. LNEA H
Figura 4.26.
Seguridad! MONTAJE
Garantir que los cables fuerza 1) Utilizando el dispositivo adecuado, coloque el rotor
fueran desligados. (pos. 11) dentro del estator, insertndolo por la
parte trasera del motor y con los debidos cuidados
para que el rotor no roce en el paquete del estator
DESMONTAJE
o en las cabezas de bobina;
1) Desconecte los cables de los sensores de
2) Coloque los anillos de fijacin internos;
temperatura (pos. 8 y 19) de los terminales de la
3) Llenar con grasa del compartimiento de los
caja de conexin de los accesorios;
anillos internos y del rodamiento (ver tipo de grasa
2) Retire el deflector trasero (pos. 26)
en las tarjetas de caractersticas de los rodamientos,
3) Suelte el anillo de retencin del ventilador trasero
fijados en las tapas del motor);
externo y retire el ventilador (pos.25)
4) Examinar con cuidado las superficies del eje y de las
4) Suelte los tornillos que fijan los anillos de fijacin
tapas donde quedarn alojados los rodamientos
externos de los cojinetes;
verificando que no existan golpes y certificando las
5) Retire los anillos de fijacin externos delantero y
correctas tolerancias de las dimensiones mecnicas;
trasero (pos. 5 y 22);
5) Calentar y colocar los rodamientos delantero y
6) Retire los centrifugadores de grasa delantero y
trasero (pos. 6 y 20)
trasero (pos. 4 y 21), soltando los tornillos que los
6) Levante el rotor, coloque apoyos abajo del eje y
fijan en el eje;
coloque las tapas delantera y trasera (pos. 9 y 18);
7) Colocar apoyos abajo del eje para evitar la cada
7) Coloque el centrifugador de grasa delantero y
del rotor sobre el estator;
trasero (pos. 4 y 21) y fjelos en el eje;
8) Destornille y retire las tapas delantera y trasera
8) Colocar los anillos de fijacin externos delantero y
(pos. 9 y 18);
trasero (pos. 5 y 22) fijndolos junto con los anillos
9) Retire los rodamientos delantero y trasero (pos. 6
de fijacin internos (pos. 7 y 16)
y 20) utilizando un extractor apropiado;
9) Colocar el ventilador trasero externo (pos. 25)
10) Retire los anillos de fijacin internos delantero y
fijndolo con el anillo de retencin
trasero (pos. 7 y 16)
10) Colocar la tapa deflectora trasera (pos. 26);
11) Utilizando el dispositivo adecuado, retire el rotor
11) Conectar los cables de los sensores de temperatura
(pos. 11) de adentro del estator por la parte
(pos. 8 y 19) en los terminales de la caja de
trasera del motor y con los debidos cuidados para
conexin de los accesorios;
que el rotor no roce en el paquete del estator o en
12) Llenar la grasa de los rodamientos a travs de las
las cabezas de bobina.
graseras trasera y delantera (pos. 27 y 28).
56
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 170/458
MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS
Clase de
4.6 5.8 8.8 12.9
resistencia
Dimetro Par de apriete (Nm) tolerancia 10%
M6 1.9 3.2 5.1 8.7
M8 4.6 7.7 12.5 21
M10 9.1 15 25 41
M12 16 27 42 70
M16 40 65 100 175
M20 75 125 200 340
M24 130 220 350 590
NOTAS:
- La clase de resistencia normalmente est
indicada en la cabeza de los tornillos
sextavados.
- Cuando no hay marcacin en el tornillo, indica
que la clase de resistencia del tornillo es 4.6.
- Los tornillos sextavados internos tipo Allen
son de clase de resistencia 12.9.
57
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 171/458
MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS
- Cajas de
- Limpiar interior, - Limpiar interior y
conexin,
reapretar tornillos. reapretar tornillos.
conexin a tierra.
- Acoplamiento
(observe las
- Despus de la primera - Verifique
instrucciones de - Verifique alineamiento
semana: verifique alineamiento y
mantenimiento del y fijacin.
alineamiento y fijacin. fijacin.
fabricante del
acoplamiento).
- Si es posible,
- Dispositivos de - Registre los valores de desmontar y hacer test
monitorizacin. la medicin. del modo de
funcionamiento.
- Limpie
- Limpie (cuando - Limpie (vea tem
- Filtro. (cuando
necesario). 4.1.2).
necesario).
- Control de la superficie,
- Anillos.
limpieza y contacto.
- Escobillas
- Control, sustituir
(motores de
cuando del tamao
anillos);
haya sido gastado (vea
- Escobillaa de
marca de desgaste,
tierra del eje (si
figura 4.5).
hay).
- Intercambiador de - Limpiar los tubos del
calor aire-aire. intercambiador.
Tabla 4.6.
58
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 172/458
MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS
5. REPUESTOS
5.1. PEDIDO
59
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 173/458
MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS
Gran parte de las anormalidades que perjudican la a) UNA FASE DE LA BOBINA QUEMADA
operacin normal de las mquinas elctricas, Este dao ocurre cuando el motor trabaja
pueden ser evitadas con providencias y cuidadas conectado en tringulo y falta corriente en un
de carcter preventivo. conductor de la red. La corriente sube de 2 a 2,5
Ventilacin suficiente, limpieza y mantenimiento veces en las bobinas restantes, al mismo tiempo
cuidadoso, son factores de mayor importancia.
en que la rotacin cae acentuadamente. Si el
Otro factor importante es la intervencin
inmediata cuando surge o es notado cualquier motor para, la corriente subir de 3,5 hasta 4
fenmeno, como por ejemplo: vibraciones, golpes veces su valor nominal.
de eje, resistencia de aislamiento La mayora de las veces la ocurrencia de ese
permanentemente decreciente, indicios de humo defecto se debe al hecho de no haber sido
y fuego, chispas o fuerte desgaste en los anillos instalado ningn tipo de proteccin o entonces, el
colectores y escobillas, variaciones bruscas de mecanismo de proteccin a sido regulado con
temperatura en los descansos o en los valores muy altos.
rodamientos.
La primera accin a ser tomada cuando ocurren b) DOS FASES DE BOBINAS QUEMADAS
anormalidades de naturaleza elctrica o mecnica, Este defecto ocurrir en caso de que falte
es desconectar los motores y examinar todas las corriente en un conductor de la red y la bobina
partes mecnicas y elctricas de la instalacin.
del motor este conectado en estrella.
En caso de incendio, la instalacin debe ser
aislada de la red; lo que es hecho generalmente Una de las fases de la bobina queda sin corriente
por la desconexin de las respectivas llaves. mientras que las otras pasam a absorver toda la
En la presencia de fuego en el interior del motor, potencia y a conducir una corriente muy elevada.
se debe tratar de detenerlo y sofocarlo, cubriendo El valor del deslizamiento llega casi a duplicar.
las aberturas de la ventilacin.
Para combatirlo, deben ser usados extintores de c) TRES FASES DE LAS BOBINAS
polvo qumico seco o CO2, pero nunca agua. QUEMADAS
Causa probable 1:
El motor es protegido apenas por fusibles;
6.1. DANOS COMUNES A LOS MOTORES sobrecarga en el motor ser la causa de la
DE INDUCCIN anormalidad.
La consecuencia ser la carbonizacin progresiva
Los motores de la Weg Mquinas. son
normalmente proyectados para clase de de los alambres y del aislamiento terminando en
aislamiento F (155C), y para temperatura cortocircuito entre espiras o corto circuito contra
ambiente de 40C (en conformidad con la placa la carcasa.
de identificacin). Si el motor es protegido por una llave de
La mayora de los defectos en las bobinas se proteccin esta anormalidad puede ser fcilmente
originan cuando son ultrapasadas las
temperaturas lmites en toda la bobina, o en evitada.
partes del mismo, en consecuencia de la
sobrecarga de la corriente. Ellos se revelan a Causa probable 2:
travs de oscurecimiento o carbonizacin del El motor est conectado errado.
aislamiento de los alambres. Veamos por ejemplo: Un motor con bobinas
proyectado para 220/380V es conectado a travs
6.1.1. CORTO CIRCUITO ENTRE ESPIRAS de llave estrella-tringulo a una red elctrica de
380V.
El corto circuito entre espiras puede ser La corriente absorbida ser tan alta que las
consecuencia de coincidir casualmente dos puntos bobinas quemarn en pocos segundos si los
defectuosos del aislamiento de los alambres o fusibles o una llave de proteccin incorrectamente
resultar de defectos provocados simultneamente ajustados no reaccionen inmediatamente.
en dos alambres que estn lado a lado.
En las tres fases, se manifiestan corrientes
desiguales cuya diferencia por tanto, conforme las
circunstancias podrn ser tan pequeas que la
proteccin del motor ni sienta.
Corto circuito entre espiras, contra el hierro o
entre las fases en consecuencia de defectos en el
aislamiento, ocurren raramente y as mismo, casi
siempre en los primeros tiempos despus del
inicio de funcionamiento.
60
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 174/458
MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS
61
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 175/458
MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS
62
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 176/458
MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS
NOTA: Las instrucciones a seguir constituyen una relacin bsica de anormalidades, causas y ciones
correctivas. En caso de duda, favor contactar a Weg Mquinas, Asistencia Tcnica o Servicios.
- La corriente del estator oscila en carga - Verificar y arreglar la bobina del rotor y
con el doble de frecuencia de - Bobina del rotor esta interrumpido. dispositivo de corto circuito.
deslizamiento, el motor presenta - Problemas en las escobillas. - Las escobillas pueden estar gastadas,
zumbido en el arranque. sucias o colocadas incorrectamente.
63
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 177/458
MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS
Tabla 6.2.
64
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 178/458
MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS
NOTA: Las instrucciones a seguir relacionan las caractersticas bsicas de problemas en rodamientos. En
algunos casos es necesario un anlisis del propio fabricante del rodamiento para determinar la causa del
defecto.
Tabla 6.3.
IMPORTANTE:
Las mquinas referidas en este manual experimentan perfeccionamientos constantes,
por eso las informaciones de este manual estn sujetas a modificaciones sin previo aviso.
65
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 179/458
MOTORES ELCTRICOS DE INDUCCIN TRIFSICOS
Estos productos, cuando son operados en las Ningn empleado, representante, revendedor u
condiciones estipuladas por Weg en los manuales otra persona est autorizado para dar cualquier
de operacin de cada producto, tienen garanta garanta en nombre de Weg o para asumir por
contra defectos de fabricacin y de materiales por Weg cualquier otra responsabilidad en relacin
un perodo de doce (12) meses contados a partir con cualquiera de sus productos.
del comienzo de operacin o dieciocho (18) En caso de que esto ocurra, sin la autorizacin de
meses la fecha de fabricacin, lo que primero Weg, la garanta estar automticamente
ocurrir. anulada.
Entretanto, esta garanta no es aplicada para
ningn producto que haya sido sometido a mal RESPONSABILIDADES
uso, mal empleo, negligencia (incluyendo sin Excepto lo especificado en el pargrafo anterior
limitacin, mantenimiento inadecuado, accidente, denominado "Trminos de Garanta Para
instalacin inadecuada, modificaciones, Productos de Ingeniera", la empresa no tendr
adaptaciones, reparaciones o cualquier otro caso ninguna obligacin o responsabilidad para con el
originado por aplicaciones inadecuadas). comprador, incluyendo, sin limitacin, cualquier
La garanta no ser responsable por reclamo con referencia a daos consecuentes o
cualquier/gasto incurrido en la instalacin del gastos con mano de obra por razn de cualquier
comprador, desensamblaje, gastos como violacin de la garanta expresa descripta en este
perjuicios financieros, transporte y de locomocin, fascculo.
bien como hospedaje y alimentacin de los El comprador tambin concuerda en indemnizar y
tcnicos cuando solicitados por el comprador. mantener la Compaa libre de daos
Las reparaciones y/o reemplazo de piezas o consecuentes de cualquier causa de accin
componentes, cuando efectuados a criterio de (excepto gastos de reposicin y reparacin de
Weg durante el periodo de garanta, no productos defectuosos, conforme lo especificado
postergar el plazo de garanta original, a menos en el pargrafo anterior denominado "Trminos
que sea expresado por escrito por Weg. de Garanta Para Productos de Ingeniera",
Esto constituye la nica garanta de Weg con consecuente directa o indirectamente de los
relacin a esta venta y la misma substituye todas actos, de negligencia u omisin del comprador
las dems garantas, expresas o implcitas, con relacin a/o proveniente de pruebas, uso,
escritas o verbales. operacin, reposicin o reparacin de cualquier
No existe ninguna garanta implcita de producto descrito en esta cotizacin y vendido o
negociacin o conveniencia para una finalidad suministrado por la Compaa al comprador.
especfica que sea aplicada a esta venta.
1014.04/0696
66
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 180/458
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 181/458
DODGE - SLEEVE OIL RTL PILLOW BLOCKS
Installation and Maintenace Manual
1
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 183/458
Housing caps and liner caps are matched to their bases
and MUST not be interchanged. Housings and liners are to
be interchanged as assemblies only.
Options include: thermocouple, circulating oil kit, heater and Check mounting structure to insure it is rigid, level and
thermostat, vibration detector kit, auxiliary seal kit and end well supported.
closure.
Position housing base on pedestal so oil gauge is in
PRE-ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS position specified on construction drawing. Do NOT
Refer to applicable contract/assembly drawings to verify tighten housing base to pedestal.
that all parts are available prior to assembly.
Disassemble and thoroughly clean all parts of the pillow
block. The installer is the last person to inspect all parts for
fit, damage and cleanliness. Care MUST be taken to avoid
contaminating the internal surfaces of the bearing.
2
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 184/458
Set liner base in
If clamp-on type
housing base.
thrust collar is used,
remove jam screws
and back off set
screws so they do
not protrude into the
I.D. of the thrust
collar. Remove
clamp screws and
make sure joints of
collar are clean.
If shaft is in place, one cooling pipe from lower liner half will
need to be removed to roll liner into place.
ATTENTION Place both halves of
Care should be taken when reinstalling coolant pipes. thrust collar into
Use pipe sealant and tighten securely. OVER- shaft groove and
TIGHTENING MAY RESULT IN LINER DAMAGE. tighten clamp scre-
Because of the closely controlled liner to housing fit, it may ws alternately and
be necessary to bolt the housing base down to allow the liner evenly to torque
to slip into the housing seat. Do a preliminary alignment value specified in
check at this time. Table 1.
Carefully smooth
any scratches on
babbitted face
INSTALLATION OF OIL RINGS with crocus cloth
(NOT emery cloth or
NOTE: Do NOT use oil rings if liner cap has baffles sandpaper). Oil plate
installed in the oil ring grooves. halves genero-
usly.
4
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 186/458
Place the other
thrust plate half (half
with two milled slots Install cap
in steel back) screws and
against thrust collar, tighten alte-
making sure bab- rnately to
bitt faces thrust torque given
collar. Clean and oil in Table 2.
the second thrust
plate set and install
NOTE: If liner cap on non-expansion bearing will not drop into
in same manner. It
place, remove cap and reposition thrust plates tightly against
may be necessary
thrust collar. Reinstall liner cap.
to move the shaft
slightly to obtain TABLE 2
enough clearance RT LINER CAP BOLTS
in the liner cavity to SLEEVOIL THREAD TORQUE
install the lower SIZE SIZE (IN.-LBS.)
plate half. 7
3 /16
5
/16 - 18 132
Total axial clearance between thrust plates and thrust collar 15
3 /16
5
/16 - 18 132
is .015 - .030 inches. 7
4 /16
5
/16 - 18 132
15 5
4 /16 /16 - 18 132
INSTALLATION OF LINER CAP 7
5 /16
5
/16 - 18 132
3
6 /8 - 16 240
Apply oil to the bearing area
7 - 13 600
of liner cap. 8 - 13 600
9 - 13 600
10 - 10 2100
12 - 10 2100
ALIGNMENT
Check alignment of
pillow block by noting
clearance between
housing and shaft at
each end of the
housingclearance
should be uniform
within 1/32". Shim
bearing pedestal
where possible;
otherwise, use full
length shims under base as required. Alignment of pillow block
CAREFULLY should be accurate since the self-aligning feature of the
locate liner bearing is to compensate for normal shaft deflection.
cap on liner
base. These Tighten housing base
SLEEVOIL mounting bolts to torque
liners have value given in Table 3.
match-marks Shaft should rotate freely.
permanently
stamped at
the joint near
one end.
These match marks permanently insure that parts stay
paired and critical orientation of assemblies is maintained.
Makes sure oil rings rotate freely. End faces of liner
should have no appreciable offset.
5
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 187/458
INSTALLATION OF OIL SEALS Back off plunger screw as
Wrap the O-ring far as possible and
(rubber cord) around CAREFULLY locate
the shaft in the seal housing cap on housing
area and cut it to fit base. These SLEEVOIL
the shaft. For most housings have match -
effective sealing, marks permanently
ends of O-ring must stamped on the water pipe
meet. Cementing grommet pad. These match
ends together is marks permanently insure
recommended. that parts stay paired and critical orientation of assemblies is
maintained. Do not damage seals or housing gasket. Torque
Disassemble one housing bolts to value given in Table 4. A non-hardening sealer can
seal and place one be used with the housing gaskets and under bolt heads to eliminate
half on shaft with chances for leakage. The plunger screw must be loose until the
flinger facing liner. housing bolts have been tightened.
Locate O-ring in seal
groove and rotate TABLE 4
seal half around shaft RTL PLUNGER SCREW HOUSING CAP BOLT
SLEEVOIL WRENCH SIZE TORQUE THREAD TORQUE
into housing base SIZE (SOC. HEX) (IN.-LB.) SIZE (IN.-LB.)
groove. 3 7/16 3
/8 850 10 1920
315/16 3
/8 850 10 1920
4 7/16 1260 7
/89 2280
Install other half of 415/16 5
/8 2500 7
/89 2280
seal and tighten 5 7/16 5
/8 2500 18 2640
5
6 /8 2500 18 2640
screws to torque 7 5
/8 2500 11/87 3600
given in Table 3. 8 3600 11/87 3600
Install second seal in 9 3600 17 5040
10 4800 17 5040
same manner. If end 12 4800 16 8880
closure is to be
used, the neoprene Plunger screw will be
disc is to be installed tightened to torque
on one end at this given in Table 4,
time instead of the following procedure
bearing seal. described below.
Consult construc- CAP LOADED
tion drawing. BEARINGS:
TABLE 3 If shaft must be held
RTL HOUSING/PEDESTAL BOLTS SEAL CLAMP SCREWS down to install cap,
SLEEVOIL THREAD TORQU THREAD TORQUE
SIZE SIZE (IN.-LBS.) SIZE (IN.-LBS.)
tighten plunger screw
3 7/16 2100 1024 12 to torque given in
315/16 7
/8 2040 1024 12 Table 4 while shaft is
4 7/16 1 3000 1024 12
415/16 1 3000 1024 12 held down. Mark the
5 7/16 1
1 /8 4200 20 33 position of the plunger
6 1 6000 20 33 screw. Loosen plunger
5
7 1 10000 /1618 65
8 1 11500 5
/1618 65 screw one turn and
9 1 11500 3
/816 120 loosen shaft hold down.
3
10 2 15000
3
/816 120 Next, tighten plunger
12 2 15000 /816 120
screw while tightening
INSALLATION OF HOUSING CAP shaft hold down until
We have replaced plunger screw is tightened to the mark. Do NOT over tighten
SLEEVOIL housing gas - shaft hold down as this can misalign liner. Remove shaft hold
kets with 515 Gasket down and tighten plunger screw locknut.
Eliminator. Apply gasket NOTE: Do NOT tighten plunger screw on accompanying
eliminator to SLEEVOIL base loaded bearing until cap loaded bearing has been
housing base along outer
installed and shaft hold down removed.
contour of joint. NOTE:
Special care should be BASE LOADED BEARINGS: Tighten plunger screw to torque
taken at grommet area. given in Table 4 and secure with locknut.
6
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 188/458
INSTALLATION OF GROMMETS Install grommet, grommet plate and collar over each inlet
AND OIL GAUGE pipe. Press down on collar and tighten collar set screw.
Install grommet and
grommet plate over
coolant pipes.
7
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 189/458
Apply sealant to the Remove and reinstall,
pipe plug furnished using sealer, all pipe
and install it in the plugs not previously
remaining hole. removed.
These SLEEVOIL housings and liners have nameplates near an oil ring inspection hole. Housing nameplates are
attached beginning June of 1988 identified by a six-digit pinned to the housing foot parallel to the shaft. Refer to
part number which fully identifies the housing and/or liner. these part numbers when ordering replacement parts.
Liner nameplates are pinned to the SLEEVOIL liner cap
10
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 192/458
www.baldor.com www.ptplace.com www.dodge-pt.com www.reliance.com
11
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 193/458
AUMA ELECTRIC MULTI-TURN ACTUATOR
Installation and Maintenace Manual
ISO 9001
ISO 14001
Certificate Registration No.
12 100 4269
12 104 4269
Operation instructions
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 195/458
Multi-turn actuators SA 07.1 SA 30.1 / SAR 07.1 SAR 30.1
with actuator controls AUMA MATIC AM 01.1 / AM 02.1 Operation instructions
Scope of these instructions: These instructions are valid for multi-turn actuators of the type range SA(R)
07.1 SA(R) 30.1 with the controls AM 01.1 / AM 02.1. These operation
instructions are only valid for clockwise closing, i.e. driven shaft turns
clockwise to the valve.
Page
17. Closing the switch compartment 25
18. Actuator controls AM 01.1/AM 02.1 26
18.1 Functions of the diagnosis LEDs on the interface board (standard version) 26
18.2 Programming the logic board 27
18.3 EMERGENCY OPEN and EMERGENCY CLOSE signal (option) 28
19. Electronic positioner (option) 29
19.1 Technical data 29
19.2 Programming 29
19.2.1 Setting the type of signal 30
19.2.2 Setting actuator behaviour on loss of signal 31
19.3 Positioner adjustment end position CLOSED (standard version) 32
19.4 Positioner adjustment end position OPEN (standard version) 33
19.5 Setting of the sensitivity 33
19.6 Positioner adjustment end position OPEN (inverse operation) 35
19.7 Positioner adjustment end position CLOSED (inverse operation) 36
19.8 Positioner in Split Range version (option) 37
19.8.1 Split Range: description of functions 37
19.8.2 Programming 37
19.8.3 Positioner adjustment for Split Range 37
20. Timer (option) 39
20.1 Functions of the diagnosis LEDs (timer) 39
20.2 Setting start and end of stepping mode via DUO limit switching (option) 40
20.3 Setting ON and OFF times 41
21. Fuses 42
22. Enclosure protection IP 68 (option) 43
23. Applications in Ex Zone 22 (option) 44
24. Maintenance 45
25. Lubrication 45
26. Disposal and recycling 45
27. Service 45
28. Spare parts list multi-turn actuator SA(R) 07.1 - SA(R) 16.1 46
29. Spare parts list controls AM 01.1/AM 02.1 48
30. Declaration of Conformity and Declaration of Incorporation 50
Index 51
Addresses of AUMA offices and representatives 52
1. Safety instructions
1.1 Range of application AUMA actuators are designed for the operation of industrial valves, e.g.
globe valves, gate valves, butterfly valves and ball valves. For other
applications, please consult us. The manufacturer is not liable for any
possible damage resulting from use in other than the designated
applications. Such risk lies entirely with the user.
Observance of these operation instructions is considered as part of the
controls/ actuators designated use.
1.2 Commissioning During electrical operation, certain parts inevitably carry lethal voltages.
(electrical connection) Work on the electrical system or equipment must only be carried out by a
skilled electrician himself or by specially instructed personnel under the
control and supervision of such an electrician and in accordance with the
applicable electrical engineering rules.
1.3 Maintenance The maintenance instructions (refer to page 45) must be observed,
otherwise a safe operation of the actuator is no longer guaranteed.
1.4 Warnings and notes Non-observance of the warnings and notes may lead to serious injuries or
damage. Qualified personnel must be thoroughly familiar with all warnings
and notes in these operation instructions.
Correct transport, proper storage, mounting, and installation, as well as
careful commissioning are essential to ensure a trouble-free and safe
operation.
During operation, the multi-turn actuator warms up and surface
temperatures > 60 C may occur. Check the surface temperature prior to
contact in order to avoid burns.
2. Short description AUMA multi-turn actuators type SA(R) 07.1 SA(R) 30.1 have a modular
design. The actuators are driven by an electric motor and operated with the
controls AM 01.1/AM 02.1, which are included in the scope of supply. The
limitation of travel is realised via limit switches in both end positions. Torque
seating is also possible in both end positions. The type of seating is
determined by the valve manufacturer.
3. Technical data
Table 1: Multi-turn actuator with actuator controls AUMA MATIC AM 01.1/AM 02.1
Features and functions
Type of duty 1) Standard: SA Short time duty S2 15 min
SAR Intermittent duty S4 25 %
Option: SA Short time duty S2 30 min
SAR Intermittent duty S4 50 %
Intermittent duty S5 - 25 %
Motors Standard: 3-ph AC asynchronous motor, type IM B9 according to IEC 34
Option: Special motors
Insulation class Standard: F, tropicalized
Option: H, tropicalized
Motor protection Standard: Thermoswitches (NC)
Option: PTC thermistors (according to DIN 44082)
Self-locking yes (for output speeds from 4 to 90 rpm)
Limit switching Counter gear mechanism for end positions CLOSED and OPEN
for 1 to 500 turns per stroke (optional for 1 to 5,000 turns per stroke)
Standard: Single switch (1 NC and 1 NO) for each end position:
Options: Tandem switch (2 NC and 2 NO) for each end position, switches galvanically isolated
Triple switch (3 NC and 3 NO) for each end position, switches galvanically isolated
Intermediate position switch (DUO limit switching)
Torque switching Adjustable torque switching for direction OPEN and CLOSE
Standard: Single switch (1 NC and 1 NO) for each direction
Options: Tandem switch (2 NC and 2 NO) for each direction, switches galvanically isolated
Position feedback signal, Potentiometer or 0/4 20 mA
analogue (options) For further details see separate data sheet
Mechanical position indicator Continuous indication, adjustable indicator disc with symbols OPEN and CLOSED
Running indication Blinker transmitter (for SA standard, for SAR option)
Heater in switch compartment Standard: Resistance type heater, 5 W, 24 V DC
Option: Self-regulating PTC heater, 5 20 W
110 250 V DC/AC or 24 48 V DC/AC
Motor heater (option) SA(R) 07.1 10.1: 12.5 W
SA(R) 14.1 16.1: 25 W
SA(R) 25.1 30.1: 50 W
Manual operation Manual drive for setting and emergency operation, handwheel does not rotate during
electrical operation.
Option: Handwheel lockable
Connection to controls AUMA plug/ socket connector with screw type connection
Output drive types A, B1, B2, B3, B4 according to EN ISO 5210
A, B, D, E according to DIN 3210
C according to DIN 3338
Special output drives: AF, AK, AG, IB1, IB3
1) Based on 20 C ambient temperature and at an average load with running torque according to Technical data SA or SAR.
2) The lifetime guaranteed by the manufacturer amounts to min. 2 million cycles. If a higher number of switching cycles are to be expected, thyristor units with
virtually unlimited lifetime should be used.
Service conditions
Enclosure protection according Standard: IP 67
to EN 60 5295) Options: IP 68
IP 67-DS (Double Sealed)
IP 68-DS (Double Sealed)
(Double Sealed = terminal compartment additionally sealed against interior)
Corrosion protection Standard: KN suitable for installation in industrial units,
in water or power plants with a low pollutant concentration
Options: KS suitable for installation in occasionally or permanently aggressive
atmosphere with a moderate pollutant concentration
(e.g. in wastewater treatment plants, chemical industry)
KX suitable for installation in extremely aggressive atmosphere with
high humidity and high pollutant concentration
KX-G same as KX, however aluminium-free version (outer parts)
Finish coating Standard: two-component iron-mica combination.
Colour Standard: silver-grey (DB 701, similar to RAL 9007)
Option: Other colours are possible on request
Ambient temperature Standard: SA 25 C to + 70 C
SAR 25 C to + 60 C
Options: SA 40 C to + 60 C (low temperature)
SAR 40 C to + 60 C (low temperature)
Vibration resistance6) 1 g, from 10 Hz to 200 Hz
according to EN 60068-2-6
Lifetime7) Type Operating cycles (OPENCLOSEOPEN)
with 30 turns per stroke
SA 07.1 SA 10.1 20,000
SA 14.1 SA 16.1 15,000
SA 25.1 SA 30.1 10,000
5) For 3-phase asynchronous motors in enclosure protection IP 68, higher corrosion protection KS or KX is strongly recommended. Additionally, for enclosure
protection IP 68, we recommend to use the double sealed terminal compartment DS.
For special motors, the enclosure protection according to the name plate applies.
6) For standard version SA(R) 07.1 SA(R) 16.1 in combination with the actuator controls AM 01.1
7) The lifetime in operation hours (h) depends on the load and the number of starts. A high starting frequency will rarely improve the modulating accuracy. To
reach the longest possible maintenance and fault-free operation time, the number of starts per hour chosen should be as low as permissible for the process.
8) Cable length between actuator and AUMA MATIC max. 100 m. Not suitable for version with potentiometer in the actuator. Instead of the potentiometer, an
RWG has to be used within the actuator.
Information B: The type of seating in the end positions is determined by the valve
manufacturer. The setting is done at the programming switches S1 2 and
S3 2 (see page 27). The tripping of a torque switch in an intermediate
position switches off the actuator and gives a fault signal.
The limit switches are used for signalisation when switching off by torque
seating. They need to be set so that the appropriate switch is tripped shortly
before reaching the end position. If the torque switch trips before the limit
switch, the actuator is switched off and a fault signal is generated.
For further programming possibilities, e.g. self-retaining in operation mode
REMOTE, see table 7, page 27.
Information D: The following faults are registered and can be transmitted to the control
room as a potential-free collective fault signal:
- Power failure
- Phase failure
- Motor protection tripped
- Torque switch tripped in mid-travel.
This signal can be switched off on the logic board, see table 7, page 27.
Information G: Potential-free contacts are available for signals. The internal control voltage
(XK 11 / + 24 V and XK 5 / 24V) must not be used for external lamps,
relays etc.
. hoist.
If multi-turn actuator is mounted on valve, attach ropes or hooks for the
purpose of lifting by hoist to valve and not to multi-turn actuator.
Fitting the handwheel: For transport purposes, handwheels from a diameter of 400 mm are
supplied separately.
.. Slip handwheel over the red change-over lever on shaft (figure A-2).
Secure handwheel using the circlip supplied.
Figure A-1 Figure A-2
85
.. a wooden pallet.
Cover to protect against dust and dirt.
Apply suitable corrosion protection agent to bright surfaces.
If multi-turn actuators are to be stored for a long time (more than 6 months),
the following points must be observed additionally:
. Prior to storage: Protect bright surfaces, in particular the output drive parts
5.3 Packaging Our products are protected by special packaging for the transport ex works.
The packaging consists of environmentally friendly materials which can
easily be separated and recycled.
We use the following packaging materials: wood, cardboard, paper and PE
foil. For the disposal of the packaging material, we recommend recycling
and collection centres.
6. Mounting to valve/ gearbox . Prior to mounting, the multi-turn actuator must be checked
for damage. Damaged parts must be replaced by original
. spare parts.
After mounting, check multi-turn actuator for damage to
paint finish. If damage to paint-finish have occurred after
mounting, they have to be touched up to avoid corrosion.
Mounting is most easily done with the valve shaft/ gearbox shaft pointing
vertically upward. But mounting is also possible in any other position.
The multi-turn actuator leaves the factory in position CLOSED (limit switch
CLOSED operated).
The output drive types B1, B2, B3, or B4 (figure A-3) are delivered with bore
and keyway (usually according to ISO 5210).
Figure A-3
Output drive type B1/ B2 Output drive type B3/ B4
Plug sleeve Bore with keyway
For output drive type A (figure B-1), the internal thread of the stem nut must
match the thread of the valve stem. If not ordered explicitly with thread, the
stem nut is unbored or with pilot bore when delivered. For finish machining
..
of stem nut refer to next page.
Check whether bore and keyway match the input shaft of valve/ gearbox.
Thoroughly degrease mounting faces at multi-turn actuator and valve/
..
gearbox.
Apply a small quantity of grease to input shaft of valve/ gearbox.
Place actuator on valve/ gearbox and fasten. Fasten bolts (at least quality
8.8, refer to table 2) evenly crosswise.
80.3
80.01/80.02
80.2
The output drive flange does not have to be removed from the actuator.
.. When fixing in the chuck, make sure stem nut runs true!
Clean the machined stem nut.
Apply Lithium soap EP multi-purpose grease to thrust bearing and races,
.. that dogs are placed correctly in the slots of the hollow shaft.
Screw in spigot ring until it is firm against the shoulder.
Press Lithium soap EP multi-purpose grease on mineral oil base into the
grease nipple with a grease gun (for quantities, please refer to table):
.
Protection tube for rising valve stem
Protection tubes may be supplied loose. Seal thread with hemp, Teflon
7. Manual operation The actuator may be operated manually for purposes of setting and
commissioning, and in case of motor failure or power failure.
Manual operation is engaged by an internal change-over mechanism.
Engaging manual operation: . Lift up change-over lever in the centre of the handwheel to approx. 85,
while slightly turning the handwheel back and forth until manual operation
engages (figure C).
Figure C Figure D
. Release change-over lever (should snap back into initial position by spring
action, figure D), if necessary, push it back manually.
Figure E Figure F
Disengaging manual operation: Manual operation is automatically disengaged, when the motor is started
again. The handwheel does not rotate during motor operation.
In case the actuator controls are equipped with a fieldbus interface (Profibus
DP, Modbus, or DeviceNet), refer to the operation instructions of the
respective fieldbus for a description of the bus and electrical connection.
.
Electric power cables, in particular motor cables, are interference sources.
Lay cables being susceptible to interference or sources of interference at the
51.0
. Connect cables according to order-related wiring diagram.
The wiring diagram applicable to the actuator is attached to the
handwheel in a weather-proof bag, together with the operation
instructions. In case the wiring diagram is not available, it can be obtained
51.01 from AUMA (state commission no., refer to name plate) or downloaded
directly from the Internet (www.auma.com).
A special parking frame (figure G-2) for protection against touching the bare
contacts and against environmental influences is available.
Parking frame
.
wall bracket.
For the connection of actuator and AUMA MATIC on wall bracket, use
suitable flexible and screened connecting cables.
.max. of 100 m.
Versions with potentiometer in the actuator are not suitable. Instead of the
8.3 Heater AUMA multi-turn actuators have a heater installed as standard. Unless
ordered otherwise, the heater is internally supplied.
8.4 Motor protection In order to protect against overheating and impermissibly high temperatures
at the actuator, PTC thermistors or thermoswitches are embedded in the
motor winding. The thermoswitch is tripped as soon as the max. permissible
winding temperature has been reached.
8.5 Remote position transmitter For the connection of remote position transmitters (potentiometer, RWG)
screened cables must be used.
. Insert the socket carrier (51.0) into the plug cover (50.0) and fasten it with
.. screws (51.01).
Clean sealing faces at the plug cover and the housing.
. Replace plug cover (50.0) and fasten bolts (50.01) evenly crosswise.
Fasten cable glands with the specified torque to ensure the required
enclosure protection.
9. Opening the switch To be able to carry out the following settings (clauses 10. to 16.), the switch
compartment compartment must be opened and, if installed, the indicator disc must be
removed.
These settings are only valid for clockwise closing, i.e. driven shaft turns
clockwise to close the valve.
. Remove 4 bolts and take off the cover at the switch compartment
(figures H).
Figure H-1: Cover with indicator glass Figure H-2: Cover without indicator glass
Bolts
. If installed, pull off indicator disc (figure J). Open end wrench
(approx. 14 mm) may be used as lever.
RSD
RDW
Indicator disc
T P
B E
C F
A D
10.2 Setting end position OPEN (white section)
. approximately a turn.
Press down and turn setting spindle D (figure K-1) with screw driver
(5 mm) in direction of arrow, thereby observe pointer E.
While a ratchet is felt and heard, the pointer E moves 90 every time.
When pointer E is 90 from mark F, continue turning slowly. When pointer
E has reached the mark F, stop turning and release setting spindle. If you
override the tripping point inadvertently (ratchet is heard after the pointer
has snapped), continue turning the setting spindle in the same direction
and repeat setting process.
10.3 Checking the limit switches The red test buttons T and P (figure K-1) are used for manual operation of
the limit switches.
.. Turning T in direction of the arrow LSC (WSR) triggers limit switch CLOSED.
Turning P in direction of the arrow LSO (WL) triggers limit switch OPEN.
T P
C F
H L
G K
..
11.2 Setting the direction OPEN (white section)
Move valve to desired intermediate position.
Press down and turn setting spindle K (figure K-2) with screw driver
(5 mm) in direction of arrow, thereby observe pointer L.
While a ratchet is felt and heard, the pointer L moves 90 every time.
When pointer L is 90 from mark F, continue turning slowly. When pointer
L has reached the mark F, stop turning and release setting spindle. If you
override the tripping point inadvertently (ratchet is heard after the pointer
has snapped), continue turning the setting spindle in the same direction
and repeat setting process.
11.3 Checking the DUO switches The red test buttons T and P (figure K-2) are used for manual operation of
.
the DUO limit switches.
Turning T in direction of the arrow LSC (WSR) triggers DUO limit switch
O P O P
. operation.
The torque switching acts as overload protection over full
travel, also when stopping in the end positions by limit
switching.
The red test buttons T and P (figure K-2) are used for manual operation of
the torque switches:
. Turning T in direction of the arrow TSC (DSR) triggers torque switch CLOSED.
S1/S2
Table 5:
Direction of rotation of the indicator disc:
counterclockwise correct
Direction of rotation of the hollow shaft:
clockwise correct
..
When limit switching is set correctly:
Set selector switch to local control (I)(figure M-3).
Perform test run at the local controls via push-buttons
OPEN STOP CLOSE.
13.3 Checking the type of seating The valve manufacturer states whether switching off in the end positions
.
should be by limit switch (limit seating) or torque switch (torque seating).
For checking the setting, refer to page 27, subclause 18.2.
.
If no other options (clauses 14. to 16.) require setting:
Close switch compartment (see page 25, clause 17.).
E2
The position transmitter board (figure P-1) is located under the cover plate
(figure P-2).
Cover plate
E2
.. This ensures that the signal remains above the dead and live zero point.
Move valve to end position OPEN.
..
15.2 Setting for 3-/ 4- wire system 4 20 mA
Connect voltage to electronic position transmitter.
..
Move valve to end position CLOSED.
If installed, pull off indicator disc.
Connect ammeter for 0 20 mA to measuring points (figure P-2).
Cover plate
E2
.. is reached.
Move valve to end position OPEN.
Indicator disc
Mark
Cover
Timer board
(option)
Cover plate
Interface board
Logic board
Positioner board
(option)
18.1 Functions of the diagnosis LEDs on the interface board (standard version)
The LEDs STOP, CLOSE, OPEN indicate the available control commands
(only in selector switch position REMOTE).
The type of seating - limit or torque seating - (switch S1-2 and switch S3-2,
figure R-3) must be determined by the valve manufacturer.
Position 2:
Torque seating
in end position OPEN
S3-2
S2-2
Position 1:
Limit seating
S1-2 in end position CLOSED
Position 2:
Torque seating
in end position CLOSED
Table 7
Self-retaining REMOTE
Self-retaining LOCAL
activated deactivated
Blinker transmitter (option)
Figure R-4: Cover plate for option EMERGENCY OPEN or EMERGENCY CLOSE
Links: B1(EMERGENCY CLOSE) LED for EMERGENCY
B2 (EMERGENCY OPEN) run command
B2
B1
19.2 Programming The positioner in the actuator controls AM 01.1/AM 02.1 is programmed
according to the purchase order details and is set together with the actuator
prior to delivery.
Due to peculiarities of the regulating system not known beforehand, a
readjustment may become necessary. Before adjusting the positioner, the
programming of the positioner should be checked.
. Take off cover plate (figure S1) and carry out required programming at
positioner board (figure S2) according to tables 9 and 10.
V10 (red)
P10
P8
V28
V27
Meas- V18
points: V10
E1{MP4()
MP3(+) P10
E2{
MP2(+)
MP1()
S1-7
19.2.1 Setting the type of signal The signal type (current/ voltage signal) of nominal value E1 and actual
value E2 is set in the factory and marked with a label on the cover plate of
the positioner (refer to figure S1).
If the setting is subject to a subsequent change, the marking also has to be
changed. Furthermore the wiring diagram indicated on the name plate of the
actuator controls also changes (see page 48).
Programming
Command signal Feedback via DIP switch S1-7
Nominal value E1 Actual value E21) (refer to figure S2)
4 20 mA 4 20 mA
0 20 mA 0 20 mA
4 20 mA
05V
0 20 mA
4 20 mA
05V
0 20 mA
05V 05V
4 20 mA
0 10 V
0 20 mA
0 10 V 05V
fail as is 4 20 mA 4 20 mA
4 20 mA 4 20 mA
fail close
0 20 mA
4 20 mA
05V
4 20 mA 4 20 mA
fail open
0 20 mA
4 20 mA
05V
4 20 mA
05V
0 20 mA
0 20 mA
0 20 mA
05V
05V
0 10 V
0 20 mA 4 20 mA
fail close fail as is
0 10 V 4 20 mA
1) During loss of signal, signals from 0 20 mA and 0 5 V may be misinterpreted since E1 or E2 (without any fault) can also be < 4 mA (end position CLOSED =
0 mA or 0 V), when working properly.
2) Signals for internal feedback:
0/4 20 mA from electronic positioner or 0 5 V from precision potentiometer 5 k
.. CLOSED.
Supply nominal value E1 of 0 or 4 mA (see wiring diagram).
Turn potentiometer t-off (P10) counterclockwise to the stop
(figure S1).
. Connect voltmeter to measuring points MP3 and MP4 (figure S2) for
measuring the nominal value (0 5 V).
For a nominal value E1 of 0 mA the voltmeter shows 0 V.
For a nominal value E1 of 4 mA the voltmeter shows 1 V.
In case nominal value (0 V or 1 V) is not correct:
Table 11
V28
V27
Meas. V18
points: V10
{
MP4()
E1 MP3(+)
P10
{
MP2(+)
E2 MP1()
S1-7
.. positioner adjustment.
Connect max. command signal (nominal value E1) = 20 mA.
Connect voltmeter to measuring points MP3 and MP4 for measuring the
nominal value E1:
For a nominal value of 20 mA the voltmeter shows 5 V.
If measured value is not 5 V:
Check the externally supplied command signal E1.
Table 12
19.5 Setting of the sensitivity .. Set selector switch at the local controls to position REMOTE.
Set command signal E1 according to label on cover plate
(see figure S1).
The sensitivity (E / dead band) is set to maximum value (2.5 %) in the
. factory.
With the potentiometer E (P9) the dead band can be increased by
turning clockwise. Left stop = small dead band (= high sensitivity). For a
precise setting of the dead band, a set point device with setting options in
V28 (green)
V27 (yellow)
V18 (red)
V10 (red)
P10
V28
V27
Meas. V18
points: V10
{
E1 MP4()
MP3(+) P10
{
E2 MP2(+)
MP1()
S1-7
.
operation to end position OPEN.
By switching the code switch S3-7 (figure S2) to position 1" an inversion
. Connect voltmeter to measuring points MP3 and MP4 (figure S2) for
measuring the nominal value (0 5 V).
For a nominal value E1 of 0 mA the voltmeter shows 0 V.
For a nominal value E1 of 4 mA the voltmeter shows 1 V.
In case nominal value (0 V or 1 V) is not correct:
Table 13
. CLOSED.
Connect voltmeter to measuring points MP2 and MP1 for measuring of the
actual value E2:
When position feedback is set correctly the voltmeter shows 5 V.
If measured value is not correct:
Adjust position feedback according to clauses 14. and 15. and repeat
.. positioner adjustment.
Connect max. command signal (nominal value E1) = 20 mA.
Connect voltmeter to measuring points MP3 and MP4 for measuring the
nominal value E1: For a nominal value of 20 mA the voltmeter shows 5 V.
If measured value is not 5 V:
Check the externally supplied command signal E1.
Table 14
illuminated
counterclockwise until LED (V27 yellow) is illuminated again.
Turn potentiometer max (P4) slightly counterclockwise until LED
LED (V28 green) is
(V28 green) goes out and LED (V27 yellow) is illuminated
illuminated
again.
V28
V27
Meas. V18
points: V10
MP4()
MP3(+) P10
MP2(+)
MP1()
S1-7
19.8.2 Programming DIP 5 at code switch S1-7 must always be in position ON for Split Range
version.
Programming
Command signal Feedback1) via DIP switch S1-7
Nominal value E1 Actual value E2 (refer to figure S2)
4 12/12 20 mA 4 20 mA
0 10/10 20 mA 0 20 mA
4 12/12 20 mA
05V
0 10/10 20 mA
1) Signals for internal feedback:
0/4 20 mA from electronic positioner or 0 5 V from precision potentiometer 5 k
The further programming of the positioner via the code switches S2-7 and
S3-7 can be made in the same way as during normal operation.
19.8.3 Positioner adjustment (See also example further down the page)
for Split Range
. Supply the specified minimum command signal (nominal value E1) for the
positioner and check by measuring with voltmeter at the measuring points
. P6.
Apply the same procedure to the second actuators positioner and set
Meas. points
V28 (green)
V27 (yellow)
V18 (red)
V10 (red)
E1{ P10
E2{
Meas. points
S1-7
Example:
Two actuators are to be operated in Split Range version. Actuator 1 must be
in position CLOSED with a nominal value signal E1 of 0 mA, and in position
OPEN with a signal of 10 mA.
Actuator 2 must be in position CLOSED with a nominal value signal of
10 mA, and in position OPEN with a signal of 20 mA.
. Positioner actuator 1:
set with E1 = 0 mA, set with P5 = 0 V at M3 (measured against MP1),
20. Timer (option) The timer board allows to increase the operating time for the entire or any
portion of the valve travel.
Example:
In order to avoid water hammers in long pipelines, stepping mode can be
chosen for any part of the travel.
. Instead of the interface board, the timer is installed in the actuator controls
. AM 01.1/ AM 02.1.
Electronic timer is not possible in combination with positioner.
V22 illuminated:
Stepping mode in direction OPEN is switched on
V21 illuminated:
Stepping mode in direction CLOSE is switched on
20.2 Setting start and end of stepping mode via DUO limit switching (option)
Start and end of stepping mode can also be set via external switches (use
potential-free contacts).
..
Direction OPEN, first normal operation then stepping mode
Run valve in direction OPEN to the desired start of stepping mode.
Press down and turn setting spindle G (figure U-2) with screw driver
normal operation stepping (5 mm) in direction of arrow, thereby observe LED V22 (figure U-1).
Start of stepping mode in direction OFF is set correctly if the LED changes
V 22 off V22 on from off to on (see sketch on the left).
Start stepping mode OPEN
..
Direction CLOSE, first normal operation then stepping mode
Run valve in direction CLOSE to the desired start of stepping mode.
Press down and turn setting spindle K (figure U-2) with screw driver
stepping normal operation (5 mm) in direction of arrow, thereby observe LED V21 (figure U-1).
Start of stepping mode in direction CLOSE is set correctly if the LED
V 21 on V21 off changes from off to on (see sketch on the left).
Start stepping mode CLOSE Figure U-2: Control unit
G K
..
Direction OPEN, first stepping mode then normal operation
Run valve in direction OPEN to the desired end of stepping mode.
Press down and turn setting spindle G (figure U-2) with screw driver
(5 mm) in direction of arrow, thereby observe LED V22 (figure U-2).
stepping normal operation
End of stepping mode is correctly set if the LED changes from on to off
V 22 on V22 off (see sketch on the left).
End stepping mode OPEN
..
Direction CLOSE, first stepping mode then normal operation
Run valve in direction CLOSE to the desired end of stepping mode.
Press down and turn setting spindle K (figure U-2) with screw driver
Normal operation stepping
(5 mm) in direction of arrow, thereby observe LED V21 (figure U-2).
End of stepping mode is correctly set if the LED changes from on to off
V 21 off V21 on (see sketch on the left).
End stepping mode CLOSE
21. Fuses . Fuses (figures V1 and V2) are accessible after removal of
Figure V1: Fuses on signal and control board Figure V2: Fuses on power supply board
1F1 1F2 F3 F4
Table 16
Dimensions 6.3 x 32 mm 5 x 20 mm 5 x 20 mm
..
following requirements according to AUMA:
Duration of submersion in water max. 72 hours
..
Head of water max. 6 m
Up to 10 operations during submersion
Modulating duty is not possible during submersion
Cable glands . For the entries of the motor and control cables appropriate, cable glands
in enclosure protection IP 68 must be used. The size of the cable glands
must be suitable for the outside diameter of the cables, refer to
. For delivery, the threads are sealed with plugs in the factory.
When ordered, cable glands can also be supplied by AUMA at an
additional charge. For this, it is necessary to state the outside diameter of
. the cables.
The cable glands must be sealed against the housing at the thread with
. an O-ring.
It is recommended to additionally apply a liquid sealing material (Loctite or
similar).
Commissioning
..
During commissioning, the following should be observed:
Sealing faces of housing and covers must be clean
..
O-rings of the covers must not be damaged
A thin film of non-acidic grease must be applied to sealing faces
Covers must be tightened evenly and firmly
. The connection plug may only be plugged in or pulled out when the mains
are switched off.
. The cable glands used have also to meet the requirements of category
II3D and must at least comply with enclosure protection IP 67.
. The screw plug (part no. 27) or the protection tube with cap (part nos.
160.1 and 160.2) for sealing the hollow shaft must imperatively be
mounted to guarantee the combustible dust hazard protection.
24. Maintenance After maintenance, check multi-turn actuator for damage to paint finish. If
damage to paint-finish has occurred after mounting, they have to be
touched up to avoid corrosion. Original paint in small quantities can be
supplied by AUMA.
It is also very important that the O-rings at the covers are placed correctly
and cable glands fastened firmly to prevent ingress of dirt or water.
We recommend additionally:
. If rarely operated, perform a test run about every 6 months. This ensures
25. Lubrication .. The gear housing is filled with lubricant in the factory.
A grease change is recommended after the following operation time:
.. electronic scrap
.. various metals
plastics
greases and oils
.
The following generally applies:
Collect greases and oils during disassembly. As a rule, these substances
.
are hazardous to water and must not be released into the environment.
See disassembled material to a sound disposal or to separate recycling
.
according to materials.
Observe the national regulations for waste disposal.
27. Service AUMA offers extensive services such as maintenance and inspection for
actuators. Addresses of AUMA offices and representatives can be found on
page 52 and on the Internet (www.auma.com).
S2 S2
S2
SA16.1 50.0
SAR 16.1
160.2
S1 / S2
79.0 51.0
S2
54.0 55.0
SA 07.1 SA 14.1 160.1
S2
SAR 07.1 SAR 14.1 53.0 153.2
56.0 58.0
57.0 153.1
152.2
70.0 27 153.3
151.0
20.0 52.0
S1 / S2 152.1 153.0 155.0
S1 / S2
S1 / S2 39
S2
24
59.0 153.5
with actuator controls AUMA MATIC AM 01.1 / AM 02.1
5.7 5.0
25.0 19.0 5.12 S2
019 17.0
020
70.1 24.0 / 23.0 5.8 9.0
Multi-turn actuators SA 07.1 SA 30.1 / SAR 07.1 SAR 30.1
49.0 22.0
5.37 30.0
S2 5.32
10.0
S2
053 S2
18
105.0 012
S1 / S2 1.0 6
Doc. PBPNU5999001
3.0
14
28. Spare parts list multi-turn actuator SA(R) 07.1 - SA(R) 16.1
80.001
156.0 107
60.0
100 80.0
106.0 90.001
80.3
61.0 S2
S2 80.001 85.001
90.0
15.0 Sample name plate 2.0
85.0
Pag. 240/458
Multi-turn actuators SA 07.1 SA 30.1 / SAR 07.1 SAR 30.1
Operation instructions with actuator controls AUMA MATIC AM 01.1 / AM 02.1
Note:
When placing orders for spare parts, it is essential to mention type of actuator and our commission number (refer to
actuator name plate).
1) SA 16.1 with output speeds of 32 to180 rpms without motor plug/ socket connector; motor directly wired to pin carrier (Nr. 52.0).
2) only required for some output speeds
3) not included in basic equipment
10.2
10.0
10.1 8.2
8.0
8.1
9.0 11.2
11.0
6.1 11.1
6.0
6.01
53.0
56.0 4.5 4.1
54.0
4.2 5.1
51.0
with actuator controls AUMA MATIC AM 01.1 / AM 02.1
5.2 5.0
4.3 4.2
52.0 1.0
29. Spare parts list controls AM 01.1/AM 02.1
4.4
Multi-turn actuators SA 07.1 SA 30.1 / SAR 07.1 SAR 30.1
4.3
4.4
13.1
3.01
Doc. PBPNU5999001
2.0
55.0
58.0
3.02
1.01 3.03
1.02 13.0 3.0
2.3
2.1
Sample name plate 2.5
Pag. 242/458
Multi-turn actuators SA 07.1 SA 30.1 / SAR 07.1 SAR 30.1
Operation instructions with actuator controls AUMA MATIC AM 01.1 / AM 02.1
Note:
When placing orders for spare parts, it is essential to mention type of actuator and our commission number (refer to
actuator name plate).
Index
B L S
Blinker transmitter 27 Limit switches 16 Safety instructions 4
Limit switching 16,17,20 Selector switch 20
C
Local controls 20 Self-retaining 27
Collective fault signal 26,27
Logic board 27 Sensitivity 33
Command signal 29,30,31
Loss of signal 31 Service 45
Corrosion protection 9,45
Lubrication 45 Signals 8
D Spare parts list
M
Declaration of Conformity 50 Controls 48
Maintenance 4
Declaration of Incorporation 50 Multi-turn actuator 46
Manual operation 12
Direction of rotation 19 Split Range Version 37
Mechanical position indicator 25
Disposal and recycling 45 Stepping mode
Motor protection 14
DUO limit switching 17 Operating time 39
Mounting to valve/ gearbox 10
Pause time 41
E
N Storage 9
Electrical connections 13
Name plate 46,48 T
Electronic position transmitter RWG 22
2-wire system 23 O Technical data 5
3-/ 4-wire system 24 Output drive types 10 Test run 19
Electronic positioner 29 Thermoswitches 14
P
EMERGENCY signal 28 Timer 39
Packaging 9 Torque setting 18
Enclosure protection IP 68 43
Pause time 29,41 Torque switches 18
F Position indicator 25 Transport 9
Finish machining of stem nut 11 Position transmitter RWG 14,22 Type of seating 27
Fuses 42 Potentiometer 21
Protection tube 11
H
PTC thermistors 14
Handwheel 12
Heater 14 R
Remote indication 21,22
I
Running time 29,41
Indicator disc 15,25
Interface board 26
Internet 51
Inverse operation 35,36
Information also available Terminal plan, inspection records and further actuator information
on the Internet: can be downloaded directly from the Internet by entering the order no.
or comm no. (refer to name plate).
Our website: http://www.auma.com
AUMA Riester GmbH & Co. KG AUMA Riester GmbH & Co. KG
ISO 9001
P. O. Box 1362 P. O. Box 1151 ISO 14001
D - 79373 Mllheim D - 73747 Ostfildern
Certificate Registration No.
Tel +49 (0)7631/809-0 Tel +49 (0)711 / 34803 0 12 100 4269
Fax +49 (0)7631/809 250 Fax +49 (0)711 / 34803 34 12 104 4269
riester@auma.com riester@wof.auma.com
www.auma.com www.auma.com
Alcance de estas instrucciones: Estas instrucciones son vlidas para actuadores multi-vueltas de la gama
SA(R) 07.1 - SA(R) 30.1 con control AUMA MATIC AM01.1 / AM02.1.
Estas instrucciones de servicio son solamente vlidas para cierre en
sentido horario, es decir, el eje gira en el sentido de las agujas del reloj
para cerrar la vlvula.
Pgina
17. Cerrar el recinto de interruptores 25
18. Control de actuador AUMA MATIC AM 01.1/AM 02.1 26
18.1 Funcin de los LEDs de diagnosis en la pletina interface (versin estndar) 26
18.2 Programacin de la pletina lgica 27
18.3 Seal ABRIR-EMERGENCIA y CERRAR-EMERGENCIA (opcin) 28
19. Posicionador electrnico (opcin) 29
19.1 Datos tcnicos 29
19.2 Programacin 29
19.2.1 Ajuste del tipo de seal 30
19.2.2 Ajuste del comportamiento del actuador a prdida de seal 31
19.3 Ajuste posicin final CERRADO (versin estndar) 32
19.4 Ajuste posicin final ABIERTO (versin estndar) 33
19.5 Ajuste de la sensibilidad 33
19.6 Ajuste posicin final ABIERTO (operacin inversa) 35
19.7 Ajuste posicin final CERRADO (operacin inversa) 36
19.8 Versin Rango Partido (opcin) 37
19.8.1 Rango Partido: descripcin de funciones 37
19.8.2 Programacin 37
19.8.3 Ajuste para Rango Partido 37
20. Temporizador (opcin) 39
20.1 Funcin de los LEDs de diagnosis (temporizador) 39
20.2 Ajuste del inicio y fin del modo por pasos mediante los interruptores DUO (opcin) 40
20.3 Ajuste de los tiempos de marcha y pausa 41
21. Fusibles 42
22. Grado de proteccin ambiental IP 68 (opcin) 43
23. Aplicaciones en Zona Ex 22 (opcin) 44
24. Mantenimiento 45
25. Lubricacin 45
26. Disposicin y reciclado 45
27. Servicio 45
28. Lista de piezas de repuesto actuador multi-vueltas SA(R) 07.1 - SA(R) 16.1 46
29. Lista de piezas de repuesto control AUMA MATIC AM 01.1/AM 02.1 48
30. Declaracin de Conformidad y Declaracin de Incorporacin 50
ndice 51
Direcciones de sucursales y representantes de AUMA 52
1. Instrucciones de seguridad
1.1 Rango de aplicacin Los actuadores AUMA estn diseados para la maniobra de vlvulas
industriales (p.ej. vlvulas de globo, compuerta, mariposa, bola, etc.).
Para otras aplicaciones, por favor consltenos. AUMA no se har
responsable de los posibles daos provocados por el uso de los actuadores
en aplicaciones distintas a las descritas. Ese riesgo ser asumido
completamente por el usuario. La observancia de estas instrucciones se
considera como parte del uso designado del actuador.
1.2 Puesta en marcha Los trabajos en el sistema o equipamiento elctrico slo deben ser
(conexin elctrica) realizados por tcnicos calificados o por personal especialmente instruido
bajo el control y supervisin de estos tcnicos, de acuerdo con las normas
de seguridad aplicables.
1.3 Mantenimiento Las instrucciones de mantenimiento (ver pg. 45) deben ser observadas
para poder garantizar un funcionamiento seguro del actuador.
1.4 Avisos y advertencias La no observancia de los avisos y advertencias puede ocasionar serias
lesiones personales o daos materiales. El personal calificado debe estar
bien familiarizado con todos los avisos y advertencias descritos en estas
instrucciones. Un correcto transporte, almacenamiento, instalacin y puesta
en marcha son esenciales para garantizar un servicio seguro y libre de
averas.
Durante de operacin, el actuador multi-vueltas se calienta y se pueden
alcanzar temperaturas superficiales de ms de 60C. Comprobar la
temperatura superficial antes del contacto para evitar quemaduras.
2. Descripcin breve Los actuadores multi-vueltas AUMA SA(R) 07.1 - SA(R) 30.1 tienen un
diseo modular. Son accionados por un motor elctrico y controlados por el
control AUMA MATIC AM01.1/ AM02.1. La limitacin del recorrido se
efecta a travs de interruptores de final de carrera en ambas posiciones
finales. La desconexin por par tambin es posible en ambas direcciones.
El tipo de desconexin debe ser determinado por el fabricante de la vlvula.
3. Datos tcnicos
Tabla 1: Actuador multi-vueltas con control de actuador AUMA MATIC AM 01.1/AM 02.1
Caractersticas y funciones
Tipo de servicio 1) Estndar: SA Reducido S2 - 15 min
SAR Intermitente S4 - 25%
Opcin: SA Reducido S2 - 30 min
SAR Intermitente S4 - 50%
Intermitente S5 - 25%
Motores Estndar: Motor trifsico asncrono, tipo IM B9 segn IEC 34
Opcin: Motores especiales
Clase de aislamiento Estndar: F, tropicalizado
Opcin: H, tropicalizado
Proteccin del motor Estndar: Termostatos (NC)
Opcin: Termistores PTC (segn DIN 44082)
Autobloqueo S; para velocidad 4 - 90 rpm
Finales de carrera Mecanismo cuenta-vueltas para posiciones finales CERRADO y ABIERTO
para 1 - 500 vueltas por carrera (opcional para 1 - 5000 vueltas por carrera)
Estndar: Interruptor sencillo (1 NC + 1 NA) para cada posicin final
Opciones: Interruptor tndem (2 NC + 2 NA) para cada posicin final, con aislamiento galvnico
Interruptor triple (3 NC + 3 NA) para cada posicin final, con aislamiento galvnico
Interruptores para 2 posiciones intermedias (DUO), ajustables en cualquier posicin
Limitadores de par Ajustables para sentidos ABRIR y CERRAR
Estndar: Interruptor sencillo (1 NC + 1 NA) para cada sentido
Opciones: Interruptor tndem (2 NC + 2 NA) para cada sentido, con aislamiento galvnico
Seal analgica de posicin Potencimetro o 0/4 20 mA
(opciones) Para ms detalles, ver hojas de datos por separado
Indicador mecnico de posicin Indicacin continua, disco indicador ajustable con smbolos ABIERTO y CERRADO
(opcin)
Indicacin de marcha Intermitente (estndar par SA, opcin para SAR)
Calefaccin en recinto de Estndar: resistencia, 5 W, 24V CC
interruptores Opcin: elemento PTC auto-regulado, 5 20 W, 110 250 V CC/CA 24 - 48 V CC/CA
Calefaccin de motor SA(R) 07.1 - 10.1: 12,5 W
(opcin) SA(R) 14.1 - 16.1: 25 W
SA(R) 25.1 - 30.1: 50 W
Mando manual Para ajustes y operacin de emergencia, el volante no gira durante la operacin elctrica.
Opcin: Volante bloqueable
Conexin al control Conector mltiple AUMA con terminales para atornillar
Tipos de acoplamiento A, B1, B2, B3, B4 segn EN ISO 5210
A, B, D, E segn DIN 3210
C segn DIN 3338
Acoplamientos especiales: AF, AK, AG, IB1, IB3
1) A temperatura ambiente 20 C y carga media = par de maniobra segn Datos tcnicos SA/ SAR.
2) La vida til garantizada por el fabricante es min. 2x106 ciclos. Si se espera un nmero mayor de ciclos, se recomienda utilizar tiristores con vida til
prcticamente ilimitada.
Condiciones de servicio
Grado de proteccin ambiental Estndar: IP 67
segn EN 60 5295) Opciones: IP 68
IP 67-DS (Doble Sellado)
IP 68-DS (Doble Sellado)
(Doble Sellado = Recinto de terminales sellado adicionalmente)
Proteccin anti-corrosin Estndar: KN Indicada para instalacin en plantas industriales, plantas de agua o
centrales elctricas con baja concentracin de agentes corrosivos
Opciones: KS Indicada para instalacin bajo atmsferas ocasional o
permanentemente agresivas con moderada concentracin de agentes
corrosivos.
KX Indicada para instalacin bajo atmsferas extremadamente agresivas
con alta humedad y alta concentracin de agentes corrosivos.
KX-G Igual a KX, con partes exteriores libres de aluminio
Pintura de acabado Estndar: Combinacin hierro-mica de dos componentes
Color Estndar: Gris (DB 701, similar a RAL 9007)
Opcin: Otros colores posibles bajo demanda
Temperatura ambiente Estndar: SA 25 C hasta + 70 C
SAR 25 C hasta + 60 C
Opciones: SA 40 C hasta + 60 C (baja temperatura)
SAR 40 C hasta + 60 C (baja temperatura)
Resistencia a vibraciones6) 1 g, desde 10 hasta 200 Hz
segn EN 60068-2-6
Vida til7) Tipo Ciclos de operacin (ABRIR-CERRAR-ABRIR)
con 30 vueltas/carrera
SA 07.1 SA 10.1 20.000
SA 14.1 SA 16.1 15.000
SA 25.1 SA 30.1 10.000
5) Para versin con motor trifsico con grado de proteccin ambiental IP 68, se recomienda proteccin anti-corrosin aumentada KS o KX y utilizar la opcin de
doble sellado DS.
Para versiones con motor especial, ser de aplicacin el grado de proteccin ambiental indicado en la placa de caractersticas.
6) Para versin estndar SA(R) 07.1 SA(R) 16.1 en combinacin con control de actuador AM 01.1/ AM02.1.
7) La vida til en horas de operacin depende de la carga y del nmero de arrancadas. La precisin de la regulacin raramente es mejorada con un alto nmero
de arrancadas. Para alcanzar el mximo tiempo de operacin posible sin fallos y sin necesidad de mantenimiento, el nmero de arrancadas debe ser elegido
lo ms bajo posible teniendo en cuenta las necesidades del proceso.
8) Longitud del cable entre actuador y AUMA MATIC mx. 100 m. No adecuado para versin con potencimetro, en su lugar se debe utilizar RWG.
Informacin D: Los siguientes fallos son registrados y pueden ser transmitidos a la sala de
control como seal colectiva de fallo (libre de potencial):
- Fallo de alimentacin
- Fallo de fase
- Proteccin motor actuada
- Limitador de par actuado antes de posicin final.
Esta seal se puede suprimir mediante programacin, ver tabla 7,
pgina 27.
5.
..
Transporte, almacenamiento y embalaje
.
5.1 Transporte Transportar al lugar de instalacin en embalaje resistente.
No atar cuerdas al volante para elevar el actuador.
Si el actuador est montado sobre una vlvula, fijar las cuerdas o
ganchos para elevacin en el cuerpo de la vlvula, no en el actuador.
Montaje del volante: Por motivos de transporte, los volantes con volantes a partir de 400 mm DE
dimetro se suministran por separado.
.
manual.
.. en el mecanismo.
Deslizar el volante sobre la palanca roja o el eje (figura A-2).
Asegurar el volante con el circlip suministrado.
Figura A-1 Figura A-2
85
..
Proteger contra la humedad del suelo almacenando en estanteras o
palets de madera.
Cubrir para proteger contra polvo y suciedad.
Aplicar agente anti-corrosin a las superficies mecanizadas.
.
Si los actuadores van a ser almacenados por largo tiempo (ms de 6
meses), se deben observar adicionalmente los siguientes puntos:
.
Antes de almacenar, proteger superficies mecanizadas, especialmente
bridas y acoplamientos, con un agente anti-corrosin de larga duracin.
Comprobar la corrosin aproximadamente cada 6 meses y aplicar
nuevamente agente protector si es necesario.
6. Montaje a vlvula/ reductor . Antes del montaje, se deber comprobar que el actuador
no est daado. Las piezas daadas deben ser sustituidas
.
(interruptor final de carrera CERRADO actuado).
Para acoplamiento tipo A (figura B-1), la rosca interna de la tuerca tiene que
coincidir con la del husillo de la vlvula. Si no se pide explcitamente
.
roscada, la tuerca se suministra en bruto o con orificio piloto.
Mecanizacin de la tuerca, ver pgina siguiente.
.
Comprobar que el acoplamiento corresponde con el eje de la vlvula/
reductor.
..
Desengrasar completamente las superficies de contacto entre actuador y
vlvula/ reductor.
Aplicar un poco de grasa no cida al eje de la vlvula/ reductor.
Montar y encajar el actuador sobre la vlvula/ reductor; fijar con tornillos
(calidad min. 8.8, ver tabla 2) y apretar firmemente en cruz.
80.3
80.01/80.02
80.2
..
No es necesario desmontar la brida de acoplamiento del actuador.
..
Extraer la tuerca (80.3) junto con los rodamientos (80.01) y pistas de
rodamientos (80.02).
Separar rodamientos y pistas de la tuerca.
..
Tornear y roscar la tuerca.
Al fijar en el torno, comprobar giro y cabeceo.
Limpiar la tuerca mecanizada.
.
Lubricar los rodamientos y pistas con grasa adecuada y montar en la
tuerca.
..
Volver a montar la tuerca y los rodamientos en la brida. Comprobar que
las garras estn ajustadas correctamente en las ranuras del eje hueco.
Roscar el anillo de centraje y apretar a tope.
Lubricar con una pistola en el engrasador con grasa adecuada
(cantidades segn la siguiente tabla):
.
Tubo de proteccin para vlvulas de husillo ascendente
..
Aplicar banda de tefln o estopa sobre la rosca del tubo de proteccin
(suministrado por separado).
.
Roscar el tubo de proteccin (1) (figura B-2) y apretar con firmeza.
Presionar la junta (2) contra la carcasa.
Comprobar que el tapn (3) est incluido y ste no est daado.
Figura B-2: Tubo de proteccin para husillo ascendente
7. Mando manual El actuador puede ser operado manualmente para ajustes y puesta en
marcha, o en caso de fallo de motor o falta de suministro elctrico.
El mando manual se activa mediante un mecanismo interno.
Activar el mando manual: . Levantar la palanca roja en el centro del volante aprox. 85, al mismo
tiempo que se gira levemente el volante hacia ambos lados hasta que el
mando manual queda activado (figura C).
Figura C Figura D
.
mecanismo.
Figura E Figura F
.
Los cables de sealizacin y bus son sensibles a interferencias.
Los cables de fuerza son fuentes de interferencias.
.
Instalar los cables sensibles a interferencias y los cables generadores de
interferencias lo ms lejos posible los unos de los otros.
.
La inmunidad a interferencias para cables de sealizacin o bus aumenta
si los cables se colocan cerca del potencial de tierra.
.
Si es posible, evitar instalar cables de mucha longitud y asegurarse que
se instalan en reas con bajas interferencias.
Evitar trayectorias paralelas largas con cables sensibles a interferencias o
generadores de interferencias.
8.1 Conexin con conector mltiple AUMA
.
..
Comprobar si el tipo de corriente, voltaje y frecuencia corresponden con
los del motor (ver placa de caractersticas del motor).
Aflojar tornillos (50.01) (figura G-1) y extraer la tapa del conector.
.
Aflojar tornillos (51.01) y extraer el conector hembra (51.0) de la tapa del
conector (50.0).
Figura G-1: Conexin Colocar los prensa-estopas adecuados para el cable.
..
(El grado de proteccin ambiental se indica en la placa de caractersticas
y slo ser efectivo si se instalan los prensaestopas adecuados).
50.0
.
Sellar entradas de cables no utilizadas con tapones adecuados.
Conectar cables de acuerdo con el diagrama de cableado.
El diagrama de cableado aplicable se encuentra dentro de la bolsa de
50.01 plstico atada al volante, junto con las instrucciones de servicio. Si el
diagrama de cableado no est disponible, se puede obtener de AUMA
51.0
citando el n de comisin que aparece en la placa de caractersticas, o
directamente a travs de internet en www.auma.com.
51.01
.
El control AUMA MATIC se puede montar tambin por separado en un
soporte mural.
Para la conexin entre actuador y AUMA MATIC en soporte mural, utilizar
..
cables flexibles y apantallados adecuados (disponibles en AUMA bajo
demanda).
Distancia permisible entre actuador y AUMA MATIC mx. 100 m.
.
No es posible con potencimetro en actuador. En lugar de potencimetro
se debe utilizar el transmisor electrnico de posicin RWG.
Conectar las tres fases en la secuencia correcta.
Comprobar el sentido de giro antes de arrancar (ver pgina 19).
8.4 Proteccin del motor Los termostatos (estndar) o termistores PTC (opcin) alojados en los
devanados protegen el motor contra sobrecalentamientos o temperaturas
excesivas en el actuador. Los termostatos actan cuando se alcanza la
temperatura mxima permisible en los devanados.
.
8.6 Montaje de la tapa Despus de la conexin:
..
Insertar el conector hembra (51.0) (figura G-1, pgina 13) dentro de la
tapa (50.0) y apretar con los tornillos (51.01).
.
Limpiar las superficies de contacto de la tapa del conector.
Comprobar que la junta trica no est daada.
..
Aplicar una fina capa de grasa no cida (p.ej. vaselina) a las superficies
de contacto.
Colocar la tapa (50.0) y apretar en cruz por igual los 4 tornillos (50.01).
Apretar los prensa-estopas con el par especificado para garantizar el
grado de proteccin requerido.
9. Abrir el recinto Para realizar los ajustes descritos a continuacin (epgrafes 10 a 16), se
de interruptores tiene que abrir la tapa del recinto de interruptores, y si existe, extraer el
disco indicador.
.
9.1 Extraer la tapa del recinto de interruptores
Retirar los 4 tornillos y extraer la tapa del recinto de terminales (figuras H).
Figura H-1: Tapa con mirilla Figura H-2: Tapa sin mirilla
Tornillos
.
9.2 Extraer el disco indicador (opcin)
RSD
RDW
Disco indicador
..
10.1 Ajuste para posicin final CERRADO (sector negro)
.
aprox. 1/2 vuelta (post-recorrido). En la maniobra de prueba, comprobar el
post-recorrido y, si es necesario, corregir el ajuste del final de carrera.
Presionar y girar el tornillo A (figura K-1) con un destornillador (5 mm) en
el sentido de la flecha. Se percibe un sonido de carraca y el indicador B
gira cada 90. Cuando el indicador B est a 90 del punto C, seguir
girando lentamente. Cuando el indicador B alcanza el punto C, dejar de
girar y soltar el tornillo (debe quedar en la posicin inicial, no hundido). Si
se ha sobrepasado la posicin de ajuste por error (se sigue oyendo el
sonido de carraca), continuar girando hasta realizar el ajuste correcto
segn lo descrito anteriormente.
T P
B E
C F
A D
.
10.2 Ajuste para posicin final ABIERTO (sector blanco)
.
Girar el volante en sentido anti-horario hasta que la vlvula est abierta,
luego girar aprox. 1/2 vuelta en sentido contrario.
Presionar y girar el tornillo D (figura K-1) con un destornillador (5 mm) en
el sentido de la flecha. Se percibe un sonido de carraca y el indicador E
gira cada 90. Cuando el indicador E est a 90 del punto F, seguir
girando lentamente. Cuando el indicador E alcanza el punto F, dejar de
girar y soltar el tornillo (debe quedar en la posicin inicial, no hundido). Si
se ha sobrepasado la posicin de ajuste por error (se sigue oyendo el
sonido de carraca), continuar girando hasta realizar el ajuste correcto
segn lo descrito anteriormente.
10.3 Comprobacin de los Con los botones rojos de prueba T y P (figura K-1) se pueden actuar los
interruptores
.
interruptores manualmente.
.
Girando T en el sentido de la flecha LSC (WSR), se acta el final de
carrera CERRADO.
Girando P en el sentido de la flecha LSO (WL), se acta el final de
carrera ABIERTO.
..
11.1 Ajuste para sentido CERRAR (sector negro)
T P
C F
H L
G K
..
11.2 Ajuste para sentido ABRIR (sector blanco)
Llevar la vlvula a la posicin intermedia deseada.
Presionar y girar el tornillo K (figura K-2) con un destornillador (5 mm) en
el sentido de la flecha. Se percibe un sonido de carraca y el indicador L
gira cada 90. Cuando el indicador L est a 90 del punto F, seguir
girando lentamente. Cuando el indicador L alcanza el punto F, dejar de
girar y soltar el tornillo (debe quedar en la posicin inicial no hundido). Si
se ha sobrepasado la posicin de ajuste por error (se sigue oyendo el
sonido de carraca), continuar girando hasta realizar el ajuste correcto
segn lo descrito anteriormente.
.
11.3 Comprobacin de los Con los botones rojos de prueba T y P (figura K-2) se pueden actuar los
interruptores DUO interruptores DUO manualmente.
.
Girando T en el sentido de la flecha TSC (DSR), se acta el interruptor
DUO sentido CERRAR y el limitador de par en sentido CERRAR.
.
Girando P en el sentido de la flecha TSO (DL), se acta el interruptor
DUO sentido ABRIR y el limitador de par en sentido ABRIR.
Despus de comprobar los interruptores, se debe eliminar el fallo de par
(lmpara roja) presionando los pulsadores locales ABRIR o CERRAR en
el sentido contrario para el que se produjo el fallo de par.
O P O P
.
3,5 da Nm = 35 Nm para sentido CERRAR
4,5 da Nm = 45 Nm para sentido ABRIR
.
Apretar los tornillos O de nuevo.
. manual.
El limitador de par acta como proteccin de sobrecarga
durante toda la carrera, tambin cuando se desconecta el
actuador por final de carrera.
Con los botones rojos de prueba T y P (figura K-2) se pueden actuar los
.
interruptores manualmente.
.
par en sentido CERRAR.
Se ilumina la lmpara roja de FALLO en los mandos locales.
Girando P en el sentido de la flecha TSO (DL), se acta el limitador de
.
par en sentido ABRIR.
Se ilumina la lmpara roja de FALLO en los mandos locales.
.
Si existen finales de carrera DUO (opcin), los interruptores de las
posiciones intermedias se actan al mismo tiempo.
Despus de comprobar los interruptores, se debe eliminar el fallo de par
(lmpara roja) presionando los pulsadores locales ABRIR o CERRAR en
el sentido contrario para el que se produjo el fallo de par.
.
si se invierten las fases en la instalacin elctrica
.
El sentido de giro del disco indicador (figura M-1), muestra el sentido de
giro del eje de salida.
Si no existe disco indicador, el sentido de giro tambin se puede observar
en el eje hueco. Para ello, extraer tapn roscado (n 27) (figura M-2).
Figura M-1: Disco indicador Figura M-2: Descubrir el eje hueco
CERRADO ABIERTO 27
S1/S2
.. Conectar tensin.
Operar pulsador CERRAR (figura M-4) y observar el sentido de giro.
Figura M-4 Pulsador CERRAR Figura M-5: Pulsador PARAR
Tabla 5:
Sentido de giro del disco indicador:
anti-horario correcto
Sentido de giro del eje hueco:
horario correcto
.
13.2 Comprobacin del ajuste de los finales de carrera
Poner selector en posicin OFF (0) (figura M-6).
Figura M-6: Selector en mandos locales
..
Si los finales de carrera estn ajustados correctamente:
Poner el selector en LOCAL (I) (figura M-3).
Efectuar maniobra de prueba con los pulsadores de los mandos locales
ABRIR-PARAR-CERRAR.
13.3 Comprobacin del tipo El fabricante de la vlvula debe determinar el tipo de desconexin en
.
de desconexin en posiciones finales, por final de carrera o por par.
posiciones finales
Comprobacin del ajuste: ver pgina 27, epgrafe 18.2.
..
Para indicacin remota de posicin de vlvula
.
Llevar la vlvula hasta la posicin final CERRADO.
Si existe, extraer el disco indicador.
.
Girar el potencimetro (E2) en sentido horario hasta que haga tope.
Posicin CERRADO corresponde a 0 %, posicin ABIERTO a 100 %.
Girar el potencimetro (E2) levemente para liberarlo del tope.
.
ajuste).
E2
La tarjeta del transmisor de posicin (figura P-1) est situada bajo la placa
de smbolos (figura P-2).
..
15.1 Ajuste para sistema de 2 hilos 4 - 20 mA y 3/4 hilos 0 - 20 mA
..
Conectar tensin.
Llevar la vlvula a la posicin final CERRADO.
Si existe, extraer el disco indicador.
Conectar miliampermetro para 0 - 20 mA en los puntos de medida
(figura P-2).
..
no se podr medir ningn valor.
E2
Punto de Punto de
medida (+) medida ()
0/4 20 mA 0/4 20 mA
.
.
Girar el potencimetro "0" en sentido horario hasta que la intensidad
empiece a aumentar.
Girar el potencimetro "0" en sentido contrario hasta que se estabilice un
valor de:
para sistema 3/4 hilos: aprox. 0,1 mA
..
para sistema 2 hilos: aprox. 4,1 mA
Con esto se asegura que el punto 0 no es sobrepasado.
.
Llevar la vlvula a la posicin final ABIERTO.
Ajustar con el potencimetro "max." el valor 20 mA.
Llevar el actuador de nuevo a la posicin final CERRADO para comprobar
el valor mnimo (0,1 mA 4,1 mA); reajustar si es necesario.
..
15.2 Ajuste para sistema de 3/4 hilos 4 - 20 mA
..
Conectar tensin.
Llevar la vlvula a la posicin final CERRADO.
Si existe, extraer el disco indicador.
Conectar miliampermetro para 0 - 20 mA en los puntos de medida
(figura P-2).
..
se podr medir ningn valor.
Placa de smbolos
E2
Punto de Punto de
medida (+) medida ()
0/4 20 mA 0/4 mA 20 mA
.
.
Girar el potencimetro "0" en sentido horario hasta que la intensidad
empiece a aumentar.
..
Girar el potencimetro "0" hasta que se estabilice un valor de aprox. 0,1
mA.
..
Llevar la vlvula a la posicin final ABIERTO.
Ajustar con el potencimetro "max." el valor final 16 mA.
Llevar el actuador a la posicin final CERRADO.
Ajustar potencimetro "max." desde 0,1 mA al valor inicial 4 mA.
.
Con esto el valor final aumenta simultneamente en 4 mA, quedando
ahora el rango 4 - 20 mA.
Alcanzar de nuevo ambas posiciones finales y comprobar el ajuste. Si es
necesario, reajustar.
..
Girar el disco indicador inferior (figura Q-1) hasta que el smbolo
CERRADO est alineado con la marca en la tapa (figura Q-2).
Llevar el actuador a la posicin final ABIERTO.
Sujetar el disco inferior en su posicin y girar el disco superior con
smbolo ABIERTO hasta que est alineado con la marca en la tapa.
Figura Q-1: Figura Q-2:
Disco indicador
Marca
El disco indicador gira aprox. entre 180 y 230 para la carrera completa
desde ABIERTO-CERRADO o viceversa. El engranaje reductor adecuado
para la vlvula fue instalado en fbrica. Si posteriormente se modifican las
vueltas por carrera de la vlvula, es posible que sea necesario sustituir el
engranaje reductor.
.
Aplicar una fina capa de grasa no cida (p.ej. vaselina) a las superficies
de contacto.
Colocar la tapa y apretar en cruz por igual los 4 tornillos.
Figura R-1: Ubicacin de las pletinas y cubiertas dentro del control integrado
Cubierta
Temporizador
(opcin)
Cubierta
pletina interface
Pletina lgica
Posicionador
(opcin)
Posicin 2:
desconexin por
par en posicin final
S3-2 ABIERTO
S2-2
Posicin 1:
desconexin por
S1-2 final de carrera
en posicin final
CERRADO
Posicin 2:
desconexin por
par en posicin
final CERRADO
Tabla 7
Auto-retencin en REMOTO
Auto-retencin en LOCAL
activado desactivado
Intermitente
.
LOCAL, OFF o REMOTO).
.
El terminal XK 1 (ver diagrama de cableado) debe ser conectado a un
contacto NC a + 24 V CC.
Si se quiere eliminar la seal ABRIR-EMERGENCIA o
CERRAR-EMERGENCIA:
Extraer la cubierta y deshacer puente B1 (para CERRAR-EMERGENCIA)
o B2 (ABRIR-EMERGENCIA).
B2
B1
.
posicionador, debe ser comprobada la programacin.
.
(ver tabla 7) debe ser desactivada.
V10 (rojo)
P10
P8
V28
V27
Puntos de V18
medida: V10
E1{MP4()
MP3(+) P10
E2{
MP2(+)
MP1()
S1-7
19.2.1 Ajuste del tipo de seal El tipo de seal (intensidad o voltaje) del valor nominal E1 y valor real E2 se
establece en fbrica y se indica en una etiqueta adherida sobre la cubierta
del posicionador (ver figura S1).
Si estos ajustes son modificados posteriormente, se debe modificar
tambin el marcado. Tambin cambia el diagrama de cableado indicado en
la placa de caractersticas del control integrado (ver pgina 48).
Programacin
Seal de consigna Seal de posicin con switch S1-7
valor nominal E1 valor real E21) (ver figura S2)
4 20 mA 4 20 mA
0 20 mA 0 20 mA
4 20 mA
05V
0 20 mA
4 20 mA
05V
0 20 mA
05V 05V
4 20 mA
0 10 V
0 20 mA
0 10 V 05V
1) Seales de posicin:
0/4 20 mA del transmisor electrnico de posicin, o 0 5 V del potencimetro 5 k
Tabla 10: Ajustes disponibles (ajustes recomendados resaltados con fondo gris)
fail as is 4 20 mA 4 20 mA
4 20 mA 4 20 mA
fail close
0 20 mA
4 20 mA
05V
4 20 mA 4 20 mA
fail open
0 20 mA
4 20 mA
05V
4 20 mA
05V
0 20 mA
0 20 mA
0 20 mA
05V
05V
0 10 V
0 20 mA 4 20 mA
fail close fail as is
0 10 V 4 20 mA
1) Durante la prdia de seal, seales en los rangos 0 - 20 mA y 0 - 5 V, pueden ser malinterpretadas, ya que E1 o E2 normales (sin fallo),
tambin pueden ser < 4 mA (posicin final CERRADO 0 mA 0 V).
2) Seales de posicin:
0/4 20 mA del transmisor electrnico de posicin, o 0 5 V del potencimetro 5 k .
19.3 Ajuste del posicionador para posicin final CERRADO (versin estndar)
..
efectuado correctamente.
..
Poner el selector en posicin LOCAL.
Llevar el actuador con el pulsador a la posicin final CERRADO.
Suministrar valor nominal E1, 0 4 mA (ver diagrama de cableado).
Girar potencimetro "t-off" (P10) en sentido anti-horario hasta el tope.
(figura S1).
.
seal E1/E2 o polaridad incorrecta
Conectar voltmetro en los puntos de medida MP3 y MP4 (figura S2) para
medir el valor nominal (0 - 5 V).
Para E1 (valor nominal) = 0 mA el voltmetro muestra 0 V.
Para E1 (valor nominal) = 4 mA el voltmetro muestra 1 V.
.
Si el valor nominal (0 V 1 V) no es correcto:
Corregir el valor nominal en la sala de control.
Conectar voltmetro para medir el valor real en los puntos MP2 y MP1.
Para E2 (valor real) = 0 mA el voltmetro muestra 0 V.
Para E2 (valor real) = 4 mA el voltmetro muestra 1 V.
Si el valor real medido no es correcto:
Ajustar el transmisor de posicin segn lo descrito en epgrafes 15 y 16
y repetir el ajuste del posicionador.
Tabla 11
LEDs apagados
LED (V27 amarillo) luzca.
Si
V28
V27
Puntos de V18
medida: V10
{MP4()
E1 MP3(+)
P10
{MP2(+)
E2 MP1()
S1-7
..
19.4 Ajuste del posicionador para posicin final ABIERTO (versin estndar)
..
Ajustar el transmisor de posicin segn lo descrito en epgrafes 14. y 15.
y repetir el ajuste del posicionador.
Conectar seal de consigna mxima (valor nominal E1) = 20 mA
Conectar voltmetro en los puntos MP3 y MP4 para medir el valor nominal
E1.
Para un valor nominal de 20 mA el voltmetro muestra 5 V.
Si el valor medido no es 5 V:
..
Comprobar la seal de consigna externa E1.
Tabla 12
LEDs apagados
que el LED (V28 verde) luzca.
Si
.
La sensibilidad (E / banda muerta) viene ajustada de fbrica al valor
mximo (2,5 %).
La sensibilidad se puede aumentar girando el potencimetro E (P9) en
sentido horario. Tope izquierda = banda muerta pequea = sensibilidad
.
alta. Para un ajuste correcto de la banda muerta, se requiere un aparato
con precisin mnima 0,1 mA.
-1
Para actuadores con n < 16 min se puede conseguir una mejor
sensibilidad (Emin= 0,25 %) girando el potencimetro P7 (sens) en
sentido horario.
V28 (verde)
V27 (amarillo)
V18 (rojo)
V10 (rojo)
P10
V28
V27
Puntos de V18
medida: V10
{
E1 MP4()
MP3(+) P10
{
E2 MP2(+)
MP1()
S1-7
19.6 Ajuste del posicionador para posicin final ABIERTO (operacin inversa)
.
En la versin estndar la seal de entrada mxima (E1 = 20 mA) se
corresponde con la posicin final ABIERTO.
.
Poniendo el switch S3-7 (figura S2) en posicin 1, se consigue la
inversin de esta definicin de seal.
Si est instalado un transmisor de posicin RWG (opcin), se deben
.
intercambiar los hilos 7 (rojo, RD) y 5 (negro, BK) en la tarjeta del
transmisor de posicin (figura P-1).
Si est instalado un potencimetro (opcin), se deben intercambiar los
hilos 21 (rojo) y 22 (negro).
..
efectuado correctamente.
..
Poner el selector en posicin LOCAL.
Llevar el actuador con el pulsador a la posicin final ABIERTO.
Suministrar valor nominal E1, 0 4 mA (ver diagrama de cableado).
Girar potencimetro "t-off" en sentido anti-horario hasta el tope
(figura S2).
.
E1/E2 o polaridad incorrecta.
Conectar voltmetro en los puntos de medida MP3 y MP4 (figura S2) para
medir el valor nominal (0 - 5 V).
Para E1 (valor nominal) = 0 mA el voltmetro muestra 0 V.
Para E1 (valor nominal) = 4 mA el voltmetro muestra 1 V.
.
Si el valor nominal (0 V 1 V) no es correcto:
Corregir el valor nominal en la sala de control.
Conectar voltmetro para medir el valor real en los puntos MP2 y MP1.
Para E2 (valor real) = 0 mA el voltmetro muestra 0 V.
Para E2 (valor real) = 4 mA el voltmetro muestra 1 V.
Si el valor real medido no es correcto:
Ajustar el transmisor de posicin segn lo descrito en epgrafes 14. y 15.
y repetir el ajuste del posicionador.
Tabla 13
LEDs apagados
LED (V28 verde) luzca.
Si
..
19.7 Ajuste del posicionador para posicin final CERRADO (operacin inversa)
..
Si el valor medido no es correcto: ajustar el transmisor de posicin segn
lo descrito en epgrafes 14. y 15. y repetir el ajuste del posicionador.
Conectar seal de consigna mxima (valor nominal E1) = 20 mA
Conectar voltmetro en los puntos MP3 y MP4 para medir el valor nominal
E1. Para un valor nominal de 20 mA el voltmetro muestra 5 V.
Si el valor medido no es 5 V:
Comprobar la seal de consigna externa E1.
Tabla 14
LEDs apagados
que el LED (V27 amarillo) luzca.
Si
V28
V27
Puntos V18
de medida: V10
MP4()
MP3(+) P10
MP2(+)
MP1()
S1-7
19.8.2 Programacin El switch 5 del bloque S1-7 siempre debe estar en posicin ON para rango
partido.
Programacin
Seal de consigna Seal de posicin con switch S1-7
valor nominal E1 valor real E2 (ver figura S2)
4 12/12 20 mA 4 20 mA
0 10/10 20 mA 0 20 mA
4 12/12 20 mA
05V
0 10/10 20 mA
1) Seales de posicin:
0/4 - 20 mA de transmisor electrnico de posicin o 0 - 5 V de potencimetro 5 k
.
posicionador y comprobar midiendo con un voltmetro en los puntos de
medida MP3 y MP4 (Figura T).
Conectar voltmetro en los puntos M3 y MP1.
Calcular valor de ajuste:
.
valor inicial = E 1min [en Amperios] x 250 Ohm
Ajustar el valor inicial con potencimetro P5.
.
Suministrar la seal de entrada mxima E1 (valor nominal) y comprobar
midiendo en los puntos MP3 y MP4.
.
Conectar voltmetro entre los puntos M9 y MP1.
Ajustar a 5 V con potencimetro P6.
Suministrar seal de entrada E1 oscilando entre valores min. y max. y
.
comprobar el rango 0 - 5 V en el punto de medida M9. Si fuera necesario,
reajustar con P5 y P6.
.
Aplicar el mismo procedimiento al posicionador del segundo actuador
segn la seal de entrada requerida E1.
Despus de ajustar la operacin con rango partido, efectuar reajuste
posterior segn lo descrito en el epgrafe 19.3, pgina 32.
Puntos de medida
V28 (verde)
V27 (amarillo)
V18 (rojo)
V10 (rojo)
E1{ P10
Puntos de medida
E2{
S1-7
Ejemplo:
Dos actuadores van a ser operados con rango partido. Para el Actuador 1 la
posicin CERRADO se corresponde con 0 mA, y la posicin ABIERTO con
10 mA.
Para el Actuador 2, la posicin CERRADO se corresponde con 10 mA y
ABIERTO con 20 mA.
. Posicionador de actuador 1:
.
Suministrar E1 = 0 mA, ajustar P5 = 0V en M3 (medido en MP1)
suministrar E1 = 10 mA y ajustar P6 = 5V en M9 (medido en MP1).
Posicionador de actuador 2:
.
Suministrar E1 = 10 mA, ajustar P5 = 0 V en M3 (medido en MP1)
suministrar E1 = 20 mA, ajustar P6 = 5V en M9 (medido en MP1).
Realizar los ajustes para E2, etc. Una vez hecho esto, el valor nominal E1
puede ser transmitido a travs de ambos actuadores (conectados en
serie).
Cuando se trabaja con el rango E1 = 0 - 10 mA, se mueve el actuador 1 y
el actuador 2 permanece en posicin CERRADO.
Cuando se trabaja con el rango E1 = 10 - 20 mA, se mueve el actuador 2
y el actuador 1 permanece en posicin ABIERTO.
20. Temporizador (opcin) Con el temporizador, se puede incrementar el tiempo de maniobra para
toda o parte de la carrera de la vlvula.
Ejemplo:
Con el fin de evitar el efecto golpe de ariete en tuberas de mucha longitud,
se puede dividir la carrera en intervalos de marcha-pausa (modo por
.
pasos).
.
El temporizador se monta en el control integrado AM 01.1/AM 02.1 en
lugar de la pletina interface.
El temporizador no es posible en combinacin con posicionador.
V15 luce: Fallo de par: lim.de par actuado antes de posicin final
V14 luce: Fallo de fase y/o proteccin de motor actuada,
En combinacin con termistores PTC: reset con selector
en posicin III
V22 luce:
Modo por pasos en sentido ABRIR activado
V21 luce:
Modo por pasos en sentido CERRAR activado
20.2 Ajuste inicio / fin modo por pasos con los finales de carrera DUO (opcin)
El inicio y fin del modo por pasos tambin se puede determinar a travs de
contactos externos (usar contactos libres de potencial).
.
Sentido ABRIR, primero operacin normal, luego modo por pasos
.
Mover la vlvula en sentido ABRIR hasta la posicin deseada de inicio del
modo por pasos.
operacin normal pasos Presionar y girar el tornillo G (figura U-2) con un destornillador (5 mm) en
el sentido de la flecha, observando al mismo tiempo el LED V22 (figura
V 22 off V22 on U-1). Cuando el LED se enciende, el inicio del modo por pasos en sentido
ABRIR est ajustado correctamente (ver grfico izquierda).
Inicio moo por pasos ABRIR
.
Sentido CERRAR, primero operacin normal, luego modo por pasos
.
Mover la vlvula en sentido CERRAR hasta la posicin deseada de inicio
del modo por pasos.
Presionar y girar el tornillo K (figura U-2) con un destornillador (5 mm) en
pasos operacin normal el sentido de la flecha, observando al mismo tiempo el LED V21 (figura
U-1). Cuando el LED se enciende, el inicio del modo por pasos en sentido
V 21 on V21 off CERRAR est ajustado correctamente (ver grfico izquierda).
Inicio moo por pasos CERRAR
Figura U-2: Unidad de mandos
G K
.
Sentido ABRIR, primero modo por pasos, luego operacin normal
.
Mover la vlvula en sentido ABRIR hasta la posicin deseada de fin del
modo por pasos.
Presionar y girar el tornillo G (figura U-2) con un destornillador (5 mm) en
pasos operacin normal
el sentido de la flecha, observando al mismo tiempo el LED V22 (figura
V 22 on V22 off U-1). Cuando el LED se enciende, el fin del modo por pasos en sentido
ABRIR est ajustado correctamente (ver grfico izquierda).
Fin modo por pasos ABRIR
.
Sentido CERRAR, primero modo por pasos, luego operacin normal
.
Mover la vlvula en sentido CERRAR hasta la posicin deseada de fin del
modo por pasos.
operacin normal pasos
Presionar y girar el tornillo K (figura U-2) con un destornillador (5 mm) en
el sentido de la flecha, observando al mismo tiempo el LED V21 (figura
V 21 off V21 on U-1). Cuando el LED se enciende, el fin del modo por pasos en sentido
CERRAR est ajustado correctamente (ver grfico izquierda).
Fin modo por pasos CERRAR
21. Fusibles . Los fusibles (figuras V1 y V2) son accesibles una vez
Figura V1: Fusibles en la pletina de control y sealizacin Figure V2: Fusibles en la fuente de alimentacin
1F1 1F2 F3 F4
Tabla 16
Tamao 6.3 x 32 mm 5 x 20 mm 5 x 20 mm
. Una vez sustituidos los fusibles, colocar y apretar la tapa de los mandos
locales de nuevo.
..
Los actuadores y controles AUMA con grado de proteccin ambiental IP 68
cumplen los siguientes requerimientos segn AUMA:
..
Duracin de la inmersin bajo agua max. 72 horas
Columna de agua max. 6 m
Hasta 10 operaciones durante la inmersin
El servicio de regulacin no es posible durante la inmersin
.
son sometidos a ensayos de estanqueidad en fbrica.
Prensaestopas Para las entradas de cables de motor y mando se deben utilizar los
prensaestopas IP 68 adecuados. El tamao de los prensaestopas debe
.
ser el adecuado para el dimetro exterior de los cables de acuerdo con
las recomendaciones del fabricante.
.
Normalmente, los actuadores y controles se suministran sin
prensaestopas con las entradas selladas con tapones.
..
Bajo demanda, AUMA puede suministrar tambin los prensaestopas, para
lo cual es necesario informar del dimetro exterior de los cables.
Los prensaestopas deben ser fijados con junta trica a la rosca.
Se recomienda aplicar adicionalmente un lquido sellador (Loctite o
similar).
Puesta en marcha
..
Durante la puesta en marcha, se deber observar lo siguiente:
..
Las superficies de contacto de carcasa y tapas deben estar limpias.
Las juntas tricas de las tapas deben estar en perfecto estado.
Aplicar una fina capa de grasa no cida a las superficies de contacto.
..
Las tapas deben ser apretadas firmemente por igual.
.
debern observar de forma imperativa los siguientes puntos:
.
II3D IP 6X T150 C.
.
hora de determinar la temperatura superficial mxima.
.
actuadores.
.
elctrico interrumpido.
.
IP 67 como mnimo.
.
sistema de tierra canalizado.
.
combustible.
Tambin es muy importante que las juntas tricas de las tapas estn
colocadas correctamente, y los prensa-estopas bien apretados para evitar
entrada de agua o suciedad.
.
Recomendaciones adicionales:
Si el actuador funciona espordicamente, hacer una maniobra cada 6
.
meses. Con esto se asegura que el actuador est siempre listo para
funcionar.
Aproximadamente 6 meses tras la puesta en marcha y luego una vez al
.
ao, comprobar el apriete de los tornillos entre actuador y
vlvula/reductor. Si es necesario, volver a apretar (ver tabla 2, pgina 10).
Para actuadores con acoplamiento tipo A: cada 6 meses, lubricar con
grasa de rodamientos en los engrasadores (cantidad, ver tabla 3, pgina
11).
..
Se recomienda la sustitucin de la grasa en los siguientes casos:
Funcionamiento espordico, tras 10 - 12 aos
Funcionamiento frecuente, tras 6 - 8 aos
26. Disposicin y reciclado Los actuadores AUMA tienen una vida muy larga. En cualquier caso,
siempre llegar un momento en el que tengan que ser sustituidos.
Los actuadores tienen un diseo modular, lo que facilita su desguace y la
..
separacin de componentes, como p.ej.:
..
chatarra electrnica
metales varios
plsticos
grasas y aceites
.
Recomendaciones generales:
Guardar las grasas y aceites. Estas sustancias, por regla general, son
.
perjudiciales para el medio ambiente y deben ser entregadas para su
tratamiento a empresas o instituciones autorizadas.
.
Depositar los materiales de desguace en un centro de tratamiento
autorizado.
Observar las regulaciones nacionales en relacin al tratamiento de
residuos.
27. Servicio AUMA ofrece servicios de mantenimiento e inspeccin para sus actuadores.
En pgina 52 o en internet (www.auma.com), se puede encontrar una
relacin completa de direcciones de sucursales y representantes de AUMA.
S2 S2
S2
SA16.1 50.0
SAR 16.1
160.2
S1 / S2
79.0 51.0
S2
54.0 55.0
SA 07.1 SA 14.1 160.1
S2
SAR 07.1 SAR 14.1 53.0 153.2
56.0 58.0
57.0 153.1
152.2
70.0 27 153.3
151.0
20.0 52.0
S1 / S2 152.1 153.0 155.0
S1 / S2
S1 / S2 39
S2
24
59.0 153.5
5.7 5.0
25.0 19.0 5.12 S2
con control de actuador AUMA MATIC AM 01.1 / AM 02.1
019 17.0
020
70.1 24.0 / 23.0 5.8 9.0
49.0 22.0
5.37 30.0
S2 5.32
10.0
Actuadores multi-vueltas SA 07.1 SA 30.1 / SAR 07.1 SAR 30.1
S2
053 S2
18
105.0 012
S1 / S2 1.0 6
Doc. PBPNU5999001
3.0
14
80.001
156.0 107
60.0
100 80.0
106.0 90.001
80.3
61.0 S2
S2 80.001 85.001
90.0
15.0 Placa de caractersticas de muestra 2.0
85.0
S2 90.001 85.001
28. Lista de piezas de repuesto actuador multi-vueltas SA(R) 07.1 - SA(R) 16.1
- Tipo de actuador
- Nmero de comisin
- Nmero de fabricacin B1 / C A D B3 / B4 / E
- Grado de proteccin ambiental
Rango de par
CERRAR/ABRIR
- Lubricante
- Rango de temperatura
Instrucciones de servicio
Pag. 292/458
Actuadores multi-vueltas SA 07.1 SA 30.1 / SAR 07.1 SAR 30.1
Instrucciones de servicio con control de actuador AUMA MATIC AM 01.1 / AM 02.1
Nota:
En los pedidos de piezas de repuesto, es imprescindible mencionar el tipo de actuador y su nmero de comisin.
Estos datos se encuentran en la placa de caractersticas en el cuerpo del actuador.
1) SA 16.1 con velocidad 32 - 180 rpm sin conector de motor.; motor cableado directamente a conector macho (52.0)
2) Slo requerido para algunas velocidades
3) No incluido en el equipamiento bsico
10.2
10.0
10.1 8.2
8.0
8.1
9.0 11.2
11.0
6.1 11.1
6.0
6.01
53.0
56.0 4.5 4.1
54.0
4.2 5.1
51.0
5.2 5.0
con control de actuador AUMA MATIC AM 01.1 / AM 02.1
4.3 4.2
52.0 1.0
4.4
4.3
4.4
Actuadores multi-vueltas SA 07.1 SA 30.1 / SAR 07.1 SAR 30.1
13.1
3.01
Doc. PBPNU5999001
2.0
55.0
58.0
3.02
1.01 3.03
1.02 13.0 3.0
2.3
29. Lista de piezas de repuesto control AUMA MATIC AM 01.1/AM 02.1
2.1
Placa de caractersticas de muestra 2.5
Pag. 294/458
Actuadores multi-vueltas SA 07.1 SA 30.1 / SAR 07.1 SAR 30.1
Instrucciones de servicio con control de actuador AUMA MATIC AM 01.1 / AM 02.1
Nota:
En los pedidos de piezas de repuesto, es imprescindible mencionar el tipo de control y su nmero de comisin.
Estos datos se encuentran en la placa de caractersticas del control.
ndice
A L S
Almacenamiento 9 Limitadores de par 18 Selector 20
Auto-retencin 27 Lista de piezas de repuesto Sensibilidad 33
actuador multi-vueltas 46 Sentido de giro 19
C
control 48 Seal colectiva de fallo 26,27
Calefaccin 14
Lubricacin 45 Seales 8
Conexin elctrica 13
Servicio 45
M
D
Mandos locales 20 T
Datos tcnicos 5
Maniobra de prueba 19 Temporizador 39
Declaracin de Conformidad 50
Mantenimiento 4 Termistores PTC 14
Declaracin de Incorporacin 50
Mecanizacin de la Termostatos 14
Desconexin por par 18
tuerca de roce 11 Tiempo de marcha 29,41
Disco indicador 15,25
Modo por pasos Tiempo de pausa 29,41
Disposicin y reciclado 45
tiempo de marcha 39 Tipo de desconexin en
E tiempo de pausa 41 posiciones finales 27
Embalaje 9 Montaje a vlvula/ reductor 10 Tipos de acoplamiento 10
Transmisor electrnico de
F O
posicin RWG 22
Finales de carrera DUO 17 Operacin inversa 35,36
sistema de 2 hilos 23
Finales de carrera 16,17,20 Operacin manual 12
sistema de 3/4 hilos 24
Fusibles 42 Orden de EMERGENCIA 28
Transmisor de posicin
rdenes 29,30,31
G RWG 14,22
Grado de proteccin ambiental P Transporte 9
IP 68 43 Prdida de seal 31 Tubo de proteccin 11
Placa de caractersticas 46,48 V
I
Pletina interface 26
Indicacin remota 21,22 Versin con rango partido 37
Pletina lgica 27
Indicador de posicin 25 Volante 12
Posicionador electrnico 29
Indicador mecnico de posicin 25 Potencimetro 21
Instrucciones de seguridad 4 Proteccin anti-corrosin 9,45
Intermitente 27 Proteccin del motor 14
Internet 51
AUMA Riester GmbH & Co. KG AUMA Riester GmbH & Co. KG
P. O. Box 1362 P. O. Box 1151
D - 79373 Mllheim D - 73747 Ostfildern
Tel +49 (0)7631/809-0 Tel +49 (0)711 / 34803 0
o
Fax +49 (0)7631/809 250 Fax +49 (0)711 / 34803 34 N de registro del certificado
12 100/104 4269
riester@auma.com riester@wof.auma.com
www.auma.com www.auma.com
Scope of these instructions: These instructions apply to lever gearboxes of the type range:
GF 50.3 GF 250.3.
1. Safety instructions
1.1 Range of application AUMA lever gearboxes GF 50.3 GF 250.3 are used for the operation of
valves via lever arrangement, such as dampers. They are designed for
mounting to multi-turn actuators for motor operation.
For other applications, please consult us. The manufacturer is not liable for
any possible damage resulting from use in other than the designated appli-
cations. Such risk lies entirely with the user.
Observance of these operation instructions is considered as part of the
gearboxes designated use.
1.2 Maintenance The maintenance instructions (refer to page 18) must be observed, other-
wise a safe operation of the lever gearbox is no longer guaranteed.
1.3 Warnings and notes Failure to observe the warnings and notes may lead to serious injuries or
damage. Qualified personnel must be thoroughly familiar with all warnings
and notes in these operation instructions.
Correct transport, proper storage, mounting and installation, as well as
careful commissioning are essential to ensure a trouble-free and safe
operation.
The following references draw special attention to safety-relevant proce-
dures in these operation instructions. Each is marked by the appropriate
pictograph.
2. Short description AUMA lever gearboxes are based on the proven AUMA worm gearbox range
GS. The installation of base and lever converts a worm gearbox into lever
gearbox.
When converting the gearbox from GS into GF, respect correct housing size.
3. Technical data
Features and functions
Type of duty According to actuator
Version Standard: clockwise rotation RR, counterclockwise rotation LL, option: RL or LR
Housing material Standard: Cast iron (GJL-250)
Option: Spheroidal cast iron (GJS-400-15)
Self-locking The gearboxes are self-locking when at stand-still under normal service conditions; strong
vibrations may cancel the self-locking effect. While in motion, safe breaking is not
guaranteed. If this is required, a separate brake must be used.
Output torques Type Output torques
worm wheel made of spheroidal cast iron or bronze spheroidal cast iron only
100 % (nominal torque) 140 % 200 %
max. Nm max. Nm max. Nm
GF 50.3 250 350 500
GF 63.3 500 700 1,000
GF 80.3 1,000 1,400 2,000
GF 100.3 2,000 2,800 4,000
GF 125.3 4,000 5,600 8,000
GF 160.3 8,000 11,250
GF 200.3 16,000 22,500
GF 250.3 32,000 45,000
End stops Positive for both end positions by travelling nut, sensitive adjustment
Strength of end stop Guaranteed strength of end stop (in Nm) for input side operation
Typ GF 50.3 GF 63.3 GF 80.3 GF 100.3 GF 125.3
Primary red.
gearing VZ 2.3 VZ 3.3 VZ 4.3 VZ 2.3 VZ 3.3 VZ 4.3
Nm 250 450 450 500 250 500 250
Swing angle Standard: fixed swing angle up to max. 100; set in the factory to 92 unless ordered otherwise.
GF 50.3 GF 125.3 Options: adjustable in steps of:
10 35, 35 60, 60 80, 80 100, 100 125, 125 150,
150 170, 170 190
for version with worm wheel made of bronze: Swing angle > 190,
multi-turn version without end stops, version GSD
Swing angle Standard: adjustable 80 100; set in the factory to 92 unless ordered otherwise.
GF 160.3 GF 250.3 Options: adjustable in steps of: 20 40, 40 60, 60 80,
for version with worm wheel made of bronze: Swing angle > 100,
multi-turn version without end stops, version GSD
Mechanical position indicator Standard: no position indicator (protection cover)
Options: pointer cover instead of protection cover for continuous position indication
Input shaft Cylindrical with parallel key according to DIN 6885.1
Operation
Motor operation With electric multi-turn actuator, directly or through primary reduction gearing VZ/ GZ
Flanges for mounting the multi-turn actuator, refer to separate technical data sheets.
Manual operation Via handwheel, directly or through primary reduction gearing VZ/ GZ
Available handwheel diameters, selection according to the max. output torque:
Typ GF 50.3 GF 63.3 GF 80.3 GF 100.3 GF 125.3
Primary red.
gearing VZ 2.3 VZ 3.3 VZ 4.3 VZ 2.3 VZ 3.3 VZ 4.3
Handwheel 160 250 315 400 315 315 250 500 400 400 315
mm 200 315 400 500 400 400 315 630 500 500 400
250 800
Accessories
Valve position indicators Position indicator WSG for the signalisation of intermediate and end positions for precise
and low-backlash feedback for swing angles ranging from 82 98 (refer to separate data
sheet)
Valve position indicator WSG for signalisation of intermediate and end positions for swing
angles > 180 (refer to separate data sheet)
Special features for use in potentially explosive atmospheres
Explosion protection II2G c IIC T4 in compliance with ATEX 94/9/EC
Type of duty Short-time duty S2 - 15 min., max. 3 cycles (OPEN - CLOSE - OPEN) 90, then cool-down
to ambient temperature
Intermittent duty S4 - 25 % up to the maximum modulating torque
Swing angle Swing angle > 90 on request
Ambient temperature Standard: 20 C to + 40 C
Options: 40 C to + 40 C (low temperature)
20 C to + 60 C
40 C to + 60 C(low temperature)
50 C to + 60 C (extreme low temperature)
60 C to + 60 C (extreme low temperature)
Combinations with actuators SA(R)ExC at ambient temperatures > 40 C with special sizing
Further information
Reference documents Product description lever gearboxes GF 50.3 GF 250.3
Dimension sheets GF 50.3 GF 125.3, GF 160.3 GF 250.3
Dimension sheet ball joints
Technical data GF 50.3 GF 250.3
Technical data SA, SAR, WSG, WGD
..
Protect against floor dampness by storage on a shelf or on a
wooden pallet.
Cover to protect against dust and dirt.
Apply suitable corrosion protection agent to bare surfaces.
In case lever gearboxes are to be stored for a long period (more than 6
.
months), the following points must be observed additionally:
.
Prior to storage: Protect bare surfaces, in particular the output drive parts
and mounting surface, with long-term corrosion protection agent.
Check for corrosion approximately every 6 months. If first signs of corro-
sion show, apply new corrosion protection.
4.3 Packaging Our products are protected by special packaging for the transport ex works.
The packaging consists of environmentally friendly materials which can
easily be separated and recycled.
For the disposal of the packaging material, we recommend recycling and
collection centres.
We use the following packaging materials:
Wooden material boards (OSB)/ cardboard/ paper/ PE film
5. Fitting the handwheel For lever gearboxes designed for manual operation, the handwheel is supp-
lied separately. Fitting is done on site according to figure 1.
Figure 1: Handwheel
Ball handle
Spacer (option)
(partly required)
Spacer
Circlip (partly required)
Circlip
RR RL LL LR
Code Direction of rotation at input shaft Position of worm shaft Direction of rotation at output drive
RR clockwise Right side clockwise
LL clockwise Left side counterclockwise
RL clockwise Right side counterclockwise
LR clockwise Left side clockwise
Delivery status in end position CLOSED
Mounting positions of AUMA multi-turn actuator with AUMA worm gearbox GF 50.3 GF 125.3
(please indicate when ordering) GF versions RR/ RL
RL RL RL RL
RR RR RR RR
A B C D
GF versions LL/ LR
LR LR LR LR
LL LL LL LL
A B C D
For packing reasons, actuator and gearbox will be delivered separately from size GF 160.3, whereas the levers
are vertically mounted.
.
In case flange for actuator is not attached to gearbox or reduction
gearing:
..
Thoroughly degrease the mounting faces of the gearbox or reduction
gearing as well as the flange for actuator.
Fit flange for actuator and fasten with bolts and lock washers.
Fasten bolts crosswise with a torque according to table 2.
Figure 2: Mounting of multi-turn actuator on lever gearbox
Bearing flange
Prim. reduction
Bearing flange
.
Mounting the multi-turn actuator:
.
Thoroughly degrease the faces of the bearing flange at actuator and of the
flange for actuator at lever gearbox or reduction gearing.
Place the multi-turn actuator on the lever gearbox or reduction gearing.
.
The multi-turn actuator can be mounted on the valve at every 90 (see
page 7, mounting positions).
.
Ensure that the spigot mates uniformly in the recess and that the mounting
faces are in complete contact.
.
Fasten actuator with bolts and lock washers (see table 1) at the flange of
the lever gearbox.
.
Fasten bolts crosswise with a torque according to table 2.
. actuator.
Prior to mounting, check whether there is enough room for
mounting the actuator. The actuator must be outside the
Table 1: Bolts for mounting AUMA multi-turn actuator on lever gearbox/ primary reduction gearing
(Strength class min. 8.8)
8. Installation and mounting Prior to mounting, check whether there is enough room for
lever gearbox operation. The actuator or other parts must be
outside the swivel range of the lever (refer to page 7 Moun-
ting positions).
.
wise lead to changes in the lever deflection.
Adjust mounting position so that the worm gearbox swing lever and the
valve lever are in alignment (figure 3).
The permissible angle deviation is:
Figure 3 Figure 4
Tube
Output shaft
Circlip
max. 3
..
If necessary, the lever position can be changed:
Remove circlip (figure 4).
.
Take off swing lever and attach again in desired position to output drive
shaft.
Secure swing lever with circlip.
Figure 5
Valve lever
Lever gearbox
. Insert suitable ball joint (available from AUMA upon special order) into
.
bore at swing lever, fasten with castellated nut and secure with split pin
(figure 6).
Unscrew weld nut (figure 6) of both ball joints and weld on the tube.
Figure 6
Lock nut Weld nut Tube Ball joint
Castellated nut
xmin.
Valve lever Split pin Swing lever
.. Move worm gearbox and valve into the same end position.
Adjust length by rotating the lever arrangement.
When using the ball joints delivered with the gearbox, one ball joint has a
right-handed thread, the other a left-handed thread.
min.
y
max.
x
Swing lever
The limits for the angle (figure 5) must be defined by the valve
manufacturer.
.
.
Insert ball joint into valve lever, fasten with castellated nut, and secure with
split pin.
Tightly fasten both lock nuts at tube.
..
.
9.1 Setting end position CLOSED Remove all bolts (03) at limit stop housing (10) (figures 8, 9).
Turn valve manually to end position CLOSED.
.
In case limit stop housing (10) has not yet rotated, turn it clockwise up to
the stop.
If the fixing holes of limit stop housing (10) do not correspond to the
..
threads of the housing (1), take off the limit stop housing (10) and replace
it in suitable position.
.
Fasten bolts (03) with lock washers (04).
Fasten bolts crosswise with a torque according to table 2.
For the version with pointer cover (option):
If the position of the pointer cover does not correspond to the symbol
CLOSED, slightly loosen the screws of the pointer cover. Turn the pointer
cover to the CLOSED symbol and fasten the screws again.
Figure 8: End stop up to GF 125.3 Figure 9: End stop GF 160.3 and larger
03/04
03/04
10 1 10 1
9.2 Setting end position OPEN The end stop need not be set since the required swing angle has been set
in the factory.
If the swing angle does not match, refer to clause 11
.
..
10.1 Setting end position CLOSED Determine the overrun of the multi-turn actuator for both directions, i. e. how
much does the valve move after the motor has been switched off?
Remove all bolts (03) at limit stop housing (10) (figures 10, 11).
.
Change actuator to manual drive and move the valve manually to end
position CLOSED.
.
In case limit stop housing (10) has not yet rotated, turn it clockwise up to the
stop.
Turn back counterclockwise the limit stop housing (10) by 1/2 turn. This
ensures that the mechanical end stop is not reached in electric operation
.
and thus the valve can close tightly, provided that torque seating has been
specified.
If the fixing holes of limit stop housing (10) do not correspond to the
..
threads of the housing (1), take off the limit stop housing (10) and replace
it in suitable position.
.
Fasten bolts (03) with lock washers (04).
Fasten bolts crosswise with a torque according to table 2.
For the version with pointer cover (option):
If the position of the pointer cover does not correspond to the symbol
CLOSED, slightly loosen the screws of the pointer cover. Turn the pointer
cover to the CLOSED symbol and fasten the screws again.
.
Limit seating in end position CLOSED
..
Turn back the valve from the end position by an amount equal to the
overrun.
Set limit switching according to the operation instructions SA/ SAR.
Check torque switching for end position CLOSED according to the opera-
tion instructions SA/ SAR, and, if necessary, set to the required value.
..
Torque seating in end position CLOSED
Turn handwheel counterclockwise by approx. 4 6 turns.
.
Set limit switching for the end position CLOSED according to the operation
instructions SA/ SAR (for signalisation).
Check torque switching for end position CLOSED or set to the required
value.
Figure 10: End stop up to GF 125.3 Figure 11: End stop GF 160.3 and larger
03/04
03/04
10 1 10 1
10.2 Setting end position OPEN The end stop need not be set since the required swing angle has been set
.
in the factory.
Move gearbox to the end stop in position OPEN.
. To turn the valve back manually from the end position by an amount equal
to the overrun, proceed as follows:
For actuators mounted directly:
by approx. 4 to 6 turns at the handwheel.
With mounted primary reduction gearing VZ/ GZ:
by approx. 10 to 50 turns at the handwheel, according to the reduction
11. Changing the swing angle The adjustment is made in end position OPEN.
Optional for size GF 50.3 GF 125.3
Standard for size GF 160.3 GF 250.3
Accuracy:
GF 50.3 GF 125.3: 0.6
GF 160.3 GF 250.3: 0.11 to 0.14
..
11.1 Changing the swing angle for sizes GF 50.3 GF 125.3 (option)
Unscrew protective cap (16) at limit stop housing (10) (figure 12).
Remove roll pin (020) with appropriate fitting tool (available from AUMA).
.
Increasing the swing angle
Turn back end stop nut (15) counterclockwise.
When turning back the end stop nut (015), make sure the roll
pin (020) can still be tapped in within the oblong hole.
..
Reducing the swing angle
Move valve into the desired end position.
Turn end stop nut (15) clockwise until it is tight up to the stop nut (7).
The end stop nut (015) must entirely cover the roll pin (020).
Figure 12: End stop up to GF 125.3 Figure 13: End stop GF 160.3 and larger
082/083 03/04
058
16 34 15 054 056 10 7
055
16 020 15 08 10 7
. Tap in roll pin (020) with fitting tool. If slot in end stop nut (15) does not
..
correspond to the hole in the worm shaft, turn end stop nut (15) slightly
counterclockwise until it is in alignment, then tap in roll pin.
.
Check O-ring (08) and replace, if damaged.
Fasten protective cap (16).
Set again limit switching for the end position OPEN according to the
operation instructions SA/ SAR. Allow for overrun.
.
11.2 Changing the swing angle for sizes GF 160.3 - GF 250.3
.
Remove all bolts (054) and pull off protective cap (16)
(figure 13).
Remove screw (082) with washer (058) and setting ring (34).
..
Increasing the swing angle
.
Turn back end stop nut (15) counterclockwise.
Move valve into the desired end position.
Turn end stop nut (15) clockwise until it is tight up to the stop nut (7).
..
Reducing the swing angle
..
Move valve into the desired end position.
Turn end stop nut (15) clockwise until it is tight up to the stop nut (7).
..
Place setting ring (34), secure with washer (058) and screw (082).
Check O-ring (056) and replace, if damaged.
.
Place protective cap (16), fasten bolts (054) with lock washers (055).
Fasten bolts crosswise with a torque according to table 2.
Set again limit switching for the end position OPEN according to the
operation instructions SA/ SAR. Allow for overrun.
12. Maintenance
12.1 General notes After commissioning, check lever gearbox for damage to paint finish.
Do a thorough touch-up to prevent corrosion.
Original paint in small quantities can be supplied by AUMA.
.
per year the following measures:
Approximately six months after commissioning and then every year, check
bolts between multi-turn actuator, lever gearbox, as well as base and fixing
.
element for tightness. If required, tighten applying the torques given in
table 2 (page 12).
.
Perform a test run as well as a visual inspection for grease leakage every
six months.
.
Carry out a detailed functional test for each gearbox every 5 years. Record
the results for future reference.
For gearboxes permanently exposed to ambient temperatures above 40
C, maintenance must be performed at shorter intervals.
Seals:
Seals made of elastomeric materials are subject to ageing. The theoretical
usable lifetime of the seals made of NBR is 13.5 years from the date of
manufacture. These figures are based on an average ambient temperature
of 40 C. Seal kits may be obtained from AUMA.
Grease:
..
A grease and seal change is recommended after the following operation
time:
.
if operated seldom after 10 12 years
if operated frequently, after 6 8 years
..
in modulating duty after 4 6 years
Table 3: Grease quantities for lever gearboxes and primary reduction gearings
GF 50.3 63.3 80.3 100.3 125.3 160.3 200.3 250.3
Qty dm 0.14 0.33 0.55 1.3 1.65 4.3 8.5 15.5
Weight1) kg 0.13 0.3 0.5 1.2 1.5 3.85 7.65 14.0
Primary red. VZ GZ
gearing 2.3 3.3 4.3 160.3 200.3 250.3
4:1/8:1 16:1 4:1/8:1 16:1
Qty dm 0,35 0,35 0,35 1,0 1,5 2,0 2,2 2,5
Weight1) kg 0,32 0,32 0,32 0,9 1,4 1,8 2,0 2,25
1) for = approx. 0,9 kg / dm3
..
12.2 Grease replacement for lever gearbox GF 50.3 GF 125.3 and primary reduction gearing VZ 2.3 VZ 4.3
12.2.1 Lever gearbox Refer to spare parts list GF 50.3 GF 125.3, page 22.
..
Grease type, see name plate; grease quantities, see page 18, table 3.
.
Mark position of the lever gearbox on the base, loosen connecting bolts to
the base and remove the lever gearbox.
.
Remove fastening bolts with lock washers from the housing cover (2.0)
and take off housing cover.
Remove bolts with lock washers from the bearing cover (8.0). Lift worm
.
wheel carefully from the housing. For this, the worm shaft must be pulled
from the bearings and tilted slightly in the worm channel.
Remove old grease completely from the housing and the individual parts
.
and clean gear housing. For this purpose, kerosene or a similar cleaning
agent may be used.
.
Clean mounting faces at housing and housing cover (2.0). Replace
O-rings at the worm wheel (010, 011, 012) by new ones.
..
Re-insert worm wheel carefully and bring worm shaft into correct position,
fasten bearing cover (8.0) at housing with bolts and lock washers.
Fill with new grease.
Place housing cover (2.0) on housing, whilst ensuring the proper position
..
of the O-rings (010, 011) at the worm wheel. Place bolts with lock washers
and fasten them evenly crosswise.
Clean mounting surfaces on the base.
..
Mount lever gearbox at marked position and fasten with bolts and lock
washers.
Insert ball joint at lever and fasten.
.
Gearbox without primary reduction gearing: Continue with clause After
maintenance.
Gearbox with reduction gearings VZ 2.3 VZ 4.3: Perform grease change
at the reduction gearing according to the following clause.
12.2.2 Primary reduction gearing Refer to spare parts list VZ 2.3 VZ 4.3, page 22.
.
Grease type, see name plate; grease quantities, see page 18, table 3.
.
Remove bolts with lock washers from housing cover (20.0) and pull off
housing cover (20.0) with the complete input drive shaft (21).
.
Take off plate with internal teeth (45) and planet carrier (22) with the
planet wheels (24).
Remove old grease completely from the housing and the individual parts
.
and clean them. For this purpose, kerosene or a similar cleaning agent
may be used.
..
Clean mounting faces at housing (19.0), housing cover (20.0), and plate
with internal teeth (45). Replace O-rings by new ones.
.
Insert planet carrier (22) with planet wheels (24).
Fill with new grease.
Place plate with internal teeth (45) and completely insert the input drive
.
shaft (21). Screw in bolts with lock washers and fasten them evenly cross-
wise to the appropriate torque according to table 2, page 12.
Continue with clause After maintenance, page 21.
..
12.3 Grease change for lever gearbox GF 160.3 GF 250.3 and primary reduction gearing GZ 160.3 GZ 250.3
..
Tools: Lock nut tool, can be obtained from AUMA.
.
Mark position of the lever gearbox on the base, loosen connecting bolts to
the base and remove the lever gearbox.
.
Remove fastening bolts with lock washers from the housing cover (2) and
take off housing cover.
Remove bolts with lock washers from the bearing cover (8). Take off
bearing lock nut (30) by loosening the grub screw (07). Lift worm wheel
.
carefully from the housing. For this, the worm shaft must be pulled from
the bearings and tilted slightly in the worm channel.
Remove old grease completely from the housing and the individual parts
.
and clean gear housing. For this purpose, kerosene or a similar cleaning
agent may be used.
.
Clean mounting faces at housing and housing cover (2). Replace O-rings
at the worm wheel (010, 011) by new ones.
Re-insert worm wheel carefully and bring worm shaft into correct position.
..
Screw in bearing lock nut (30) and secure with grub screw (07). Fasten
bearing cover (8) at the housing with bolts and lock nuts.
Fill with new grease.
Place housing cover (2) on housing, whilst ensuring the proper position of
.
the O-rings (010, 011) at the worm wheel. Place bolts with lock washers
and fasten them evenly crosswise.
..
Mount lever gearbox at marked position and fasten with bolts and lock
washers.
Insert ball joint at lever and fasten.
.
Gearbox without primary reduction gearing: Continue with clause After
maintenance.
Gearbox with reduction gearings GZ 160.3 GZ 250.3: Perform grease
change at the reduction gearing according to the following clauses.
12.3.2 Single-stage reduction gearings GZ 160.3 GZ 250.3 (reduction ratios 4:1 and 8:1)
.
Grease type, see name plate; grease quantities, see page 18, table 3.
Remove bolts with lock washers at housing cover (2) and pull off housing
.
cover (2) with the input drive shaft (3.0) and the plate with internal teeth
(5.0).
.
Remove screws (021) from the plate with internal teeth and separate it
from the input drive shaft.
..
Remove old grease completely from the housing and the individual parts
and clean them.
For this purpose, kerosene or a similar cleaning agent may be used.
..
Clean mounting faces at housing (1), housing cover (2), and plate with
internal teeth (5.0). Replace O-rings by new ones.
.
Fill housing cover (2) with new grease.
Fasten plate with internal teeth (5.0) with screws (021) at housing cover.
Fill housing (1) with remaining grease and replace the complete housing
cover with input drive shaft (3.0). Screw in bolts with lock washers and
.
fasten them evenly crosswise to the appropriate torque according to
table 2, page 12.
Continue with clause After maintenance, page 21.
12.3.3 Double-stage primary reduction gearings GZ 200.3 GZ 250.3 (reduction ratio 16:1)
.
Grease type, see name plate; grease quantities, see page 18, table 3.
.
Remove bolts with lock washers from housing cover (2) and pull off
housing cover with the complete input drive shaft (3.0).
.
Take off screws with lock washers from housing frame (10) and remove
housing frame with planet carrier and plate with internal teeth.
.
Take off screws (035) and plate with internal teeth (13) and separate them
from input drive shaft (3.0).
.
Remove screws (021) from the plate with internal teeth (5.0) and separate
it from the pinion (11).
Remove old grease completely from the housing and the individual parts
.
and clean them. For this purpose, kerosene or a similar cleaning agent
may be used.
..
Clean mounting faces at housing (1), housing frame, housing cover (2)
and plates with internal teeth (5.0, 13). Replace O-rings by new ones.
Fill housing (1) with new grease.
.
Fix plate with internal teeth hollow wheel (5.0) with screws (021) at
housing frame (10).
Replace complete housing frame. Screw in bolts with lock washers and
.
fasten them evenly crosswise to the appropriate torque according to
table 2, page 12.
..
Fill intermediate housing (10) and housing cover (2) with the remaining
grease.
Fix plate with internal teeth (13) with screws (034) at housing cover (2).
Place complete housing cover with input drive shaft onto housing frame.
Screw in bolts with lock washers and fasten them evenly crosswise to the
appropriate torque according to table 2, page 12.
..
.
12.4 After maintenance If applicable, mount multi-turn actuator.
Reset the end stops.
..
For gearboxes with actuator, check the setting of the limit switching accor-
ding to the operation instructions for multi-turn actuators; if required, reset.
Perform test run to ensure the proper function.
Check the lever gearbox for damage to paint finish. Do a thorough
touch-up to prevent corrosion. Original paint in small quantities can be
supplied by AUMA.
..
sembled, separated and sorted according to materials, i.e.:
.
various metals
plastics
greases and oils
.
The following generally applies:
.
Collect greases and oils during disassembly. As a rule, these substances
are hazardous to water and must not be released into the environment.
.
See disassembled material to a sound disposal or to separate recycling
according to materials.
Observe the national regulations for waste disposal.
14. Service AUMA offers extensive services such as maintenance and inspection for
gearboxes. Addresses of AUMA offices and representatives can be found on
page and on the Internet (www.auma.com).
15. Spare parts list lever gearboxes GF 50.3 - GF 125.3 and primary reduction gearing VZ 2.3 VZ 4.3
39 / 40
063 / 064
27
065 / 066
079
045
080
042
043
044
041
29
48
28
4.0
6 1
017
18.0 6
09
020
GF 100.3 - GF 125.3
048 7
046 15
047
014 10.0
31
4.0
017
8.0
09
010
18.0
010
012
073 2.0
17.0
Note: Please state type and commission no. of the gearbox (see name plate) when ordering spare parts. Only
original AUMA spare parts may be used.
Delivered spare parts may slightly vary from the representation in these instructions.
17. Spare parts list reduction gearings GZ 160.3 GZ 250.3 (reduction ratios 4:1 and 8:1)
S1(003)
006.0
S1(003)
S1(004)
S1(009)
001.0
003.0
003.3
512.0
S1(014)
002.0
Note: Please state type and commission no. of the gearbox (see name plate) when ordering spare parts. Es drfen
nur original AUMA Ersatzteile verwendet werden. Only original AUMA spare parts may be used.
Delivered spare parts may slightly vary from the representation in these instructions.
No. Designation
001.0 Housing Sub-assembly
002.0 Housing cover Sub-assembly
003.0 Housing cover Sub-assembly
003.3 Input drive shaft Sub-assembly
006.0 Planetary gear Sub-assembly
512.0 Flange for actuator Sub-assembly
S1 Seal kit Set
18. Spare parts list primary reduction gearings GZ 200.3 - GZ 250.3 (reduction ratio 16:1)
006.0 S1(003)
S1(003)
003.0
S1(004)
S1(009)
S1(029)
001.0 003.3
S1(029)
S1(014)
512.0
002.0
011.1
013.0
010.0
Note: Please state type and commission no. of the gearbox (see name plate) when ordering spare parts. Es drfen
nur original AUMA Ersatzteile verwendet werden. Only original AUMA spare parts may be used.
Delivered spare parts may slightly vary from the representation in these instructions.
No. Designation
001.0 Housing Sub-assembly
002.0 Housing cover Sub-assembly
003.0 Housing cover Sub-assembly
003.3 Input drive shaft Sub-assembly
006.0 Planetary gear Sub-assembly
010.0 Housing frame Sub-assembly
011.1 Pinion Component
013.0 Planetary gear, 1st stage Sub-assembly
512.0 Flange for actuator Sub-assembly
S1 Seal kit Set
Index
B M T
Bolts for mounting the multi-turn Maintenance 3,18 Technical data 4
actuator 9 Manual operation 13 Transport 6
Motor operation 14
C
Mounting of multi-turn actuators 8
Changing the swing angle 16
Mounting positions 7
Corrosion protection 6
P
D
Packaging 6
Declaration of Conformity 26
Declaration of Incorporation 26 S
Disposal and recycling 21 Safety instructions 3
Service 21
F
Setting end stops
Fitting the handwheel 6
for manual operation 13
H with mounted
Handwheel 6 multi-turn actuator 14
Spare parts lists
L
GF 160.3 - GF 250.3 23
Lubricant 19 GF 50.3 - GF 125.3 22
GZ 160.3 - GZ 250.3 (4:1/8:1) 24
GZ 200.3 - GZ 250.3 (16:1) 25
Storage 6
Information also available Inspection records and further gearbox information can be downloaded
on the Internet: directly from the Internet by entering the order no. or comm. no.
(refer to name plate).
Our website: http://www.auma.com
AUMA Riester GmbH & Co. KG AUMA Riester GmbH & Co. KG
P. O. Box 1362 P. O. Box 1151
D - 79373 Mllheim D - 73747 Ostfildern
Tel +49 (0)7631/809-0 Tel +49 (0)711 / 34803 0
Fax +49 (0)7631/809 250 Fax +49 (0)711 / 34803 34
riester@auma.com riester@wof.auma.com Certificate Registration No.
12 100/104 4269
www.auma.com www.auma.com
Alcance de estas instrucciones: Estas instrucciones son vlidas para reductores sinfn
GS 50.3 GS 125.3 con pre-reductores VZ 2.3 VZ 4.3 y reductores
GS 160.3 GS 250.3 con pre-reductores GZ 160.3 250.3.
1. Instrucciones de seguridad
1.1 Rango de aplicacin Los reductores sinfn AUMA GS50.3 - GS250.3 se utilizan para la maniobra
de vlvulas industriales (p.ej. vlvulas de mariposa, bola, etc.)
Estn diseados para operacin manual u operacin motorizada en
combinacin con actuadores elctricos.
Para otras aplicaciones, por favor consltenos. El fabricante no se har
responsable de los posibles daos provocados por el uso de los actuadores
en aplicaciones distintas a las descritas. Ese riesgo ser asumido
completamente por el usuario. La observancia de estas instrucciones se
considera como parte del uso designado del actuador.
1.2 Mantenimiento Las instrucciones de mantenimiento (ver pgina 18) deben ser observadas
para poder garantizar un funcionamiento seguro del reductor sinfn.
1.3 Avisos y advertencias La no observancia de los avisos y advertencias puede ocasionar serias
lesiones personales o daos materiales. El personal calificado debe estar
bien familiarizado con todos los avisos y advertencias descritos en estas
instrucciones. Un correcto transporte, almacenamiento, instalacin y puesta
en marcha son esenciales para garantizar un servicio seguro y libre de
averas. Las siguientes referencias llaman la atencin sobre los
procedimientos de seguridad invocados en estas instrucciones. Cada una
est identificada con un pictograma.
2. Datos tcnicos
Tabla 1: Reductores sinfn GS 50.3 GS 250.3
Caractersticas y funciones
Tipo de servicio Segn actuador
Versin Estndar: giro horario RR, giro anti-horario LL, RL LR (como opcin)
Autobloqueo Los reductores son autoblocantes en reposo bajo condiciones de servicio normales; en
presencia de fuertes vibraciones se podra cancelar el autobloqueo. Con el reductor en
movimiento, no se puede garantizar un frenado con seguridad. Si esto se requiere se debe
utilizar un freno adicional
Par de salida Tipo Par de salida
100 % 140 % 175 %1) 200 %1) Par en regulacin2)
max. Nm max. Nm max. Nm max. Nm max. Nm
GS 50.3 250 350 500 125
GS 63.3 500 700 1.000 250
GS 80.3 1.000 1.400 2.000 500
GS 100.3 2.000 2.800 4.000 1.000
GS 125.3 4.000 5.600 8.000 2.000
GS 160.3 8.000 11.250 14.000 4.000
GS 200.3 16.000 22.500 28.000 8.000
GS 250.3 32.000 45.000 56.000 16.000
Topes Ajustables para ambas posiciones finales mediante tuerca deslizante
Resistencia del tope Resistencia garantizada del tope (en Nm) en la entrada:
Tipo GS 50.3 GS 63.3 GS 80.3 GS 100.3 GS 126.3
Pre-reductor VZ 2.3 VZ 3.3 VZ 4.3 VZ 2.3 VZ 3.3 VZ 4.3
Nm 250 450 450 500 250 500 500 250
ngulo de apertura Estndar: ngulo de apertura fijo hasta max. 100; ajustado en fbrica a 92 si no
GS 50.3 GS 125.3 se menciona otro valor en el pedido
Opciones: Ajustable en etapas:
10 35, 35 60, 60 80, 80 100,
100 125, 125 150, 150 170, 170 190
Con corona en bronce: ngulo de apertura >190,
versin multi-vueltas sin topes GSD
ngulo de apertura Estndar Ajustable 80 100; ajustado en fbrica a 92 si no se menciona otro
GS 160.3 GS 250.3 valor en el pedido.
Opciones: Ajustable en etapas: 20 40, 40 60, 60 80,
Con corona en bronce: ngulo de apertura >100,
versin multi-vueltas sin topes GSD
Indicador mecnico de posicin Estndar: Tapa con indicador
Opciones: Tapa sellada con indicador para instalacin horizontal en intemperie3)
Tapa protectora para servicio enterrado en lugar de tapa con indicador
Eje de entrada Cilndrico con chaveta segn DIN 6885.1
Operacin
Operacin motorizada Con actuador elctrico multi-vueltas, directo o a travs de pre-reductor VZ/ GZ
Bridas de acoplamiento para actuador, ver Hojas de datos tcnicos
Operacin manual A travs de volante, directo o a travs de pre-reductor VZ/ GZ
Dimetros de volante disponibles, seleccin segn el par max. de salida:
Tipo GS 50.3 GS 63.3 GS 80.3 GS 100.3 GS 125.3
Pre-reductor VZ 2.3 VZ 3.3 VZ 4.3 VZ 2.3 VZ 3.3 VZ 4.3
160 250 315 400 315 315 250 500 400 400 315
Volante 200 315 400 500 400 400 315 630 500 500 400
mm 250 800
Pre-reductor
Pre-reductor Tipo planetario con diversas desmultiplicaciones para reducir el par de entrada
Acoplamiento a vlvula
Acoplamiento a vlvula Dimensiones segn EN ISO 5211:
Estndar: brida integrada en la carcasa (ver tambin Montaje a la vlvula, pgina 11)
GS 50.3 GS 125.3: sin centraje
GS 160.3 GS 250.3: con centraje
Opciones: GS 50.3 GS 125.3: con centraje
GS 160.3 GS 250.3: sin centraje
Embrague estriado para conexin Estndar: En bruto o con orificio piloto desde GS 160.3
al eje de la vlvula El reductor sinfn se puede recolocar 4 x 90 sobre el embrague
Opciones: Mecanizado (orificio con chavetero, cuadrado o lados paralelos)
Condiciones de servicio
Grado de proteccin ambiental Estndar: IP 68-3, estanco a polvo y agua (altura max. 3 m)
segn EN 60 5294) Opciones5): IP 68-6, estanco a polvo y agua (altura max. 6 m)
IP 68-10, estanco a polvo y agua (altura max. 10 m)
IP 68-20, estanco a polvo y agua (altura max. 20 m)
Proteccin anti-corrosin Estndar: KN Indicada para instalacin en plantas industriales, plantas de agua o
centrales elctricas con baja concentracin de agentes corrosivos
Opciones: KS Indicada para instalacin bajo atmsferas ocasional o
permanentemente agresivas con moderada concentracin de
agentes corrosivos
KX Indicada para instalacin bajo atmsferas extremadamente
agresivas con alta humedad y alta concentracin de agentes
corrosivos
Pintura Estndar: GS 50.3 GS 125.3: Combinacin hierro-mica de dos componentes
GS 160.3 GS 250.3: Imprimacin
Opcin: GS 160.3 GS 250.3: Combinacin hierro-mica de dos componentes
Color Estndar: Gris (DB 701, similar a RAL 9007)
Opcin: Otros colores bajo demanda
Temperatura ambiente Estndar: 25 C hasta + 80 C
Opciones: 40 C hasta + 60 C (baja temperatura), versin L
60 C hasta + 60 C (muy baja temperatura), versin EL
0 C hasta + 120 C (alta temperatura), versin H
Vida til La vida til est basada en una carga tpica para vlvulas de 1/4 de vuelta.
Accesorios
Indicadores de posicin Indicador de posicin WSG para sealizacin de posiciones intermedias y finales.
de vlvula
Indicacin precisa para ngulos de apertura 82 98 (ver hoja de datos por separado)
Indicador de posicin WSG para sealizacin de posiciones intermedias y finales para
ngulos de apertura > 180 (ver hoja de datos por separado)
Finales de carrera Finales de carrera WSH para vlvulas operadas manualmente.
Sealizacin de posiciones intermedias y finales (ver hoja de datos por separado)
Caractersticas especiales para utilizacin en zonas potencialmente explosivas
Proteccin anti-explosin II2G c IIC T4 segn ATEX 94/9/EC
Tipo de servicio Reducido S2 - 15 min., max. 3 ciclos (ABRIR-CERRAR-ABRIR) 90, despus enfriar
hasta temperatura ambiente
Intermitente S4 - 25 % hasta el par mximo en regulacin
ngulo de apertura > 90 bajo demanda
Temperatura ambiente Estndar: 20 C hasta + 40 C
Opciones: 40 C hasta + 40 C (baja temperatura)
20 C hasta + 60 C
40 C hasta + 60 C (baja temperatura)
50 C hasta + 60 C (muy baja temperatura)
60 C hasta + 60 C (muy baja temperatura)
Combinaciones con actuadores SA (R)ExC a temperatura ambiente > 40 C con
dimensionamiento especial
Informaciones adicionales
Documentos de referencia Folleto Reductores sinfn GS 50.3 - GS 250.3 / GS 315 - GS 500
Hojas de dimensiones GS 50.3 GS 125.3, GS 160.3 GS 250.3
Datos tcnicos GS 50.3 GS 125.3, GS 160.3 GS 250.3
Datos tcnicos SA, WSG, WGD, WSH
Reductores de palanca Ver documentos por separado
..
Proteger contra la humedad del suelo almacenando en estanteras, palets
de madera o medios similares.
Cubrir para proteger contra polvo y suciedad.
Aplicar agente anti-corrosin adecuado a las superficies mecanizadas.
Si los reductores sinfn van a ser almacenados por largo tiempo (ms de 6
.
meses), se deben observar adicionalmente los siguientes puntos:
.
Antes de almacenar, proteger superficies mecanizadas, especialmente
bridas y acoplamientos, con un agente anti-corrosin de larga duracin.
Comprobar la corrosin aproximadamente cada 6 meses y aplicar
nuevamente agente protector si es necesario.
4. Montaje del volante El volante de los reductores sinfn para operacin manual se suministra
suelto. El montaje se realiza segn figura A.
Figura A: Volante
Maneta
Distanciador (opcin)
(a veces necesario)
Distanciador
Circlip (a veces necesario)
Circlip
Sinfn Volante
RR LL RL LR
Cdigo Sentido de rotacin eje de entrada Posicin del sinfn Sentido de rotacin eje de salida
RR horario lado derecho horario
LL horario lado izquierdo anti-horario
RL horario lado derecho anti-horario
LR horario lado izquierdo horario
RR RR RR RR
RL RL RL RL
A B C D
GS versiones LL / LR
LL LL LL LL
LR LR LR LR
A B C D
.
Si la brida de acoplamiento no est fijada al reductor o pre-reductor:
..
Desengrasar completamente las superficies de contacto del reductor o
pre-reductor, as como la brida de acoplamiento.
Fijar la brida de acoplamiento y apretar con tornillos y arandelas.
Apretar tornillos en cruz con el par indicado en tabla 3.
Figura B: Montaje de actuador multi-vueltas en reductor sinfn
Brida de acoplamiento
Brida de amarre
Brida de acoplamiento
Pre-reductor
Brida de amarre
.
Montaje de actuadores multi-vueltas:
.
Desengrasar completamente las superficies de contacto del reductor o
pre-reductor, as como la brida de amarre del actuador.
Colocar el actuador sobre el reductor sinfn o pre-reductor.
.
El actuador puede ser montado sobre el reductor cada 90
(ver pgina 8, posiciones de montaje).
.
Asegurarse que el resalte de centraje se encaja uniformemente en el
rebaje y que las bridas hacen contacto completo.
.
Fijar el actuador con tornillos y arandelas (ver tabla 2) sobre la brida del
reductor sinfn.
Apretar tornillos en cruz con el par indicado en tabla 3.
7. Montaje a la vlvula Los reductores sinfn AUMA GS y pre-reductores VZ/GZ pueden ser
.
operados en cualquier posicin de montaje.
Para vlvulas de mariposa, se recomienda el montaje en posicin final
.
CERRADO (antes de montar, llevar el reductor hasta el tope mecnico
CERRADO girando el volante en sentido horario)
Para vlvulas de bola, se recomienda el montaje en posicin final
ABIERTO (antes de montar, el reductor hasta el tope mecnico ABIERTO
.
Desengrasar completamente las superficies de contacto de reductor y
vlvula.
Introducir el embrague en el eje de la vlvula y asegurarlo (figura C,
..
detalle A o B); comprobar que se respetan las dimensiones X, Y, Z
(tabla 3).
Aplicar grasa no cida en las estras del embrague.
Montar el reductor sobre la vlvula. Asegurarse que el resalte de centraje
..
(si existe) se encaja uniformemente en el rebaje y que las bridas hacen
contacto completo.
Fijar el reductor con tornillos (calidad min. 8.8) y arandelas.
Apretar tornillos en cruz con el par indicado en tabla 3.
Figura C
A B
Embrague
Prisionero
Z
X Y
Vlvula
Nota:
La experiencia ha demostrado que es muy difcil apretar tornillos o tuercas
de tamao M30 o mayor con los pares especificados. El reductor sinfn
puede ser desplazado axialmente contra la brida de la vlvula.
Para mejorar la adherencia entre vlvula y reductor, se recomienda aplicar
Loctite 243 (o producto similar) sobre las superficies de contacto.
..
8.1 Reductores sinfn en vlvulas de mariposa
Posicin final CERRADO Extraer todos los tornillos (03) del tope (10) (figuras D1, D2).
..
Si los taladros en (10) no coinciden con las roscas en la carcasa (1),
extraer el tope (10) e insertarlo de nuevo en la posicin adecuada.
Colocar los tornillos (03) con arandela (04).
Apretar tornillos en cruz con el par indicado en tabla 3.
Figura D1: Tope hasta GS 125.3 Figura D2: Tope a partir de GS 160.3
03/04 03/04
10 1
10 1
Posicin final ABIERTO El ngulo de giro deseado ha sido ajustado en fbrica, por lo que no es
necesario ajustar el tope.
8.2 Reductores sinfn en vlvulas de bola
Posicin final ABIERTO .. Extraer todos los tornillos (03) del tope (10) (figuras D1, D2).
.
Si el tope (10) an no ha girado, girar en sentido anti-horario hasta el
tope.
..
Si los taladros en (10) no coinciden con las roscas en la carcasa (1),
extraer el tope (10) e insertarlo de nuevo en la posicin adecuada.
.
Colocar los tornillos (03) con arandela (04).
Apretar tornillos en cruz con el par indicado en tabla 3.
Si la posicin del indicador no coincide con el smbolo ABIERTO, aflojar
ligeramente los tornillos de la tapa. Girar la tapa hasta el smbolo
ABIERTO y apretar los tornillos de nuevo.
Posicin final CERRADO El ngulo de giro deseado ha sido ajustado en fbrica, por lo que no es
necesario ajustar el tope.
. la vlvula.
El fabricante de la vlvula debe determinar el tipo de
desconexin en posiciones finales: por final de carrera o
por par.
9.1
.
Reductores sinfn en vlvulas de mariposa
Cuantificar el post-recorrido del actuador en ambos sentidos, es decir,
..
cunto se mueve la vlvula despus de que el motor ha sido
desconectado.
Posicin final CERRADO Extraer todos los tornillos (03) del tope (10) (figuras D1, D2).
..
Activar el mando manual y llevar la vlvula manualmente hasta la
posicin final CERRADO.
Si el tope (10) an no ha girado, girar en sentido horario hasta el tope.
Girar el tope (10) en sentido anti-horario de vuelta para asegurar que el
.
tope mecnico no es alcanzado en operacin elctrica y evitar el
enclavamiento del reductor si se produce desconexin por par.
..
Si los taladros en (10) no coinciden con las roscas en la carcasa (1),
extraer el tope (10) e insertarlo de nuevo en la posicin adecuada.
.
Colocar los tornillos (03) con arandela (04).
Apretar tornillos en cruz con el par indicado en tabla 3.
Si la posicin del indicador no coincide con el smbolo CERRADO, aflojar
ligeramente los tornillos de la tapa. Girar la tapa hasta el smbolo
CERRADO y apretar los tornillos de nuevo.
..
Desconexin por final de carrera en posicin final CERRADO
.
Eliminar de la posicin final el post-recorrido observado.
Ajustar los finales de carrera segn las instrucciones SA/SAR.
Comprobar los limitadores de par en posicin final CERRADO segn las
instrucciones SA/SAR o reajustar al valor requerido.
..
Desconexin por par en posicin final CERRADO
Girar el volante en sentido anti-horario 4 - 6 vueltas.
.
Ajustar el final de carrera CERRADO segn las instrucciones SA/SAR
(para sealizacin).
Comprobar los limitadores de par en posicin final CERRADO segn las
instrucciones SA/SAR o reajustar al valor requerido.
Posicin final ABIERTO El ngulo de giro deseado ha sido ajustado en fbrica, por lo que no es
.
necesario ajustar el tope.
. del pre-reductor.
Ajustar el final de carrera ABIERTO segn las instrucciones SA/SAR.
Figura E1: Tope hasta GS 125.3 Figura E2: Tope desde GS 160.3
03/04 03/04
10 1
10 1
..
cunto se mueve la vlvula despus de que el motor ha sido
desconectado.
Posicin final ABIERTO Extraer todos los tornillos (03) del tope (10) (figuras E1, E2).
.
Activar el mando manual y llevar la vlvula manualmente hasta la posicin
final ABIERTO.
.
Si el tope (10) an no ha girado, girar en sentido anti-horario hasta el
tope.
.
Girar el tope (10) en sentido horario de vuelta para asegurar que el
tope mecnico no es alcanzado en operacin elctrica.
..
Si los taladros en (10) no coinciden con las roscas en la carcasa (1),
extraer el tope (10) e insertarlo de nuevo en la posicin adecuada.
..
Colocar los tornillos (03) con arandela (04).
Apretar tornillos en cruz con el par indicado en tabla 3.
Ajustar los finales de carrera segn las instrucciones SA/SAR.
Si la posicin del indicador no coincide con el smbolo ABIERTO, aflojar
ligeramente los tornillos de la tapa. Girar la tapa hasta el smbolo
.
ABIERTO y apretar los tornillos de nuevo.
Posicin final CERRADO El ngulo de giro deseado ha sido ajustado en fbrica, por lo que no es
.
necesario ajustar el tope.
. del pre-reductor.
Ajustar el final de carrera CERRADO segn las instrucciones SA/SAR.
Precisin:
GS 50.3 GS 125.3: 0,6
GS 160.3 GS 250.3: 0,11 - 0,14
..
10.1 Modificacin del ngulo de apertura para tamaos GS 50.3 GS 125.3 (opcin)
Desenroscar el tapn (16) del tope (10) (figura F1).
Extraer pasador (020) con el til apropiado (disponible en AUMA).
.
Aumentar el ngulo de apertura
Girar la tuerca del tope (15) en sentido anti-horario.
Al girar la tuerca del tope (015), asegurarse que el pasador
(020) todava se pueda introducir dentro del orificio
alargado.
..
Reducir el ngulo de apertura
Llevar la vlvula a la posicin final deseada.
Girar la tuerca del tope (15) en sentido horario hasta que haga tope fuerte
contra la tuerca (7).
16 020 15 08 10 7
. Introducir pasador (020) con el til. Si la ranura en la tuerca del tope (15)
no coincide con el taladro en el sinfn, girar la tuerca del tope levemente
..
en sentido anti-horario hasta que est alineada, luego introducir el
pasador.
.
Comprobar junta trica (08) y sustituir si est daada.
Volver a colocar el tapn (16).
Si est montado un actuador elctrico en el reductor, ajustar de nuevo el
final de carrera para posicin final ABIERTO segn las instrucciones de
servicio SA/ SAR. Tener en cuenta el post-recorrido.
.
10.2 Modificacin del ngulo de apertura para tamaos GS 160.3 GS 250.3
.
Extraer todos los tornillos (054) y quitar el tapn (16)
(figura F2).
Extraer tornillo (082) con disco (058) y anillo de ajuste (34).
..
Aumentar el ngulo de apertura
.
Girar la tuerca del tope (15) en sentido anti-horario.
Llevar la vlvula a la posicin final deseada.
Girar la tuerca del tope (15) en sentido horario hasta que haga tope fuerte
contra la tuerca (7).
..
Reducir el ngulo de apertura
Llevar la vlvula a la posicin final deseada.
Girar la tuerca del tope (15) en sentido horario hasta que haga tope fuerte
contra la tuerca (7).
082/083 03/04
058
16 34 15 054 056 10 7
055
.
..
Colocar el anillo de ajuste (34), asegurar con arandela (058) y tornillo
(082).
.
Comprobar junta trica (056) y sustituir si est daada.
Colocar tapn (16), tornillos (054) y arandelas (055).
Si est montado un actuador elctrico en el reductor, ajustar de nuevo el
final de carrera para posicin final ABIERTO segn las instrucciones de
servicio SA/ SAR. Tener en cuenta el post-recorrido.
..
requerimientos segn AUMA:
..
IP 68-3, sumergible en agua hasta 3 m columna de agua
IP 68-6, sumergible en agua hasta 6 m columna de agua
IP 68-10, sumergible en agua hasta 10 m columna de agua
IP 68-20, sumergible en agua hasta 20 m columna de agua
Ensayos Los reductores con grado de proteccin ambiental IP 68-3 han sido
sometidos a un ensayo de tipo en fbrica.
Los reductores con grados de proteccin ambiental IP 68-6, IP 68-10 e
IP 68-20 son sometidos a un ensayo rutinario de estanqueidad en fbrica.
.
.
Notas: El grado de proteccin ambiental IP 68 se refiere al interior de los
reductores, no al recinto del embrague.
.
Si la probabilidad de inmersiones repetidas es alta, se debe utilizar
proteccin anti-corrosin aumentada KS o KX.
.
Para reductores enterrados es altamente recomendable utilizar proteccin
anti-corrosin aumentada KS o KX.
Para instalacin horizontal en intemperie, se debera utilizar una tapa con
indicador sellada.
Para aplicacin en gas con tapa sellada con indicador, se debe proveer
.
una purga de aire en la tapa o ranuras de ventilacin en la brida de la
vlvula.
En caso de inmersin permanente o servicio enterrado, se debe utilizar
.
una tapa protectora en lugar de la tapa con indicador (debe ser
mencionado en el pedido). La sustitucin posterior de la tapa es posible.
.
Se debe utilizar un material sellante adecuado entre la brida de la vlvula
y el reductor.
Es posible la entrada de agua desde el eje de la vlvula al recinto del
embrague, que puede provocar corrosin en el embrague y el recinto del
.
embrague. Para evitarlo, se debe aplicar un agente anti-corrosin
adecuado.
Con el tipo KX, el embrague y el recinto del embrague estn provistos de
una proteccin anti-corrosin de alta calidad.
12. Mantenimiento
12.1 Notas generales Tras la puesta en marcha, comprobar posibles daos en la pintura. Si es
necesario, retocar para evitar corrosin. AUMA puede suministrar pintura
original en pequeas cantidades bajo demanda.
.
medidas:
..
vlvula. Si es necesario, volver a apretar aplicando los pares indicados en
tabla 3 (pgina 11).
.
Realizar una maniobra de prueba cada 6 meses.
Realizar una inspeccin visual de posible fuga de grasa cada 2 aos.
.
Realizar un ensayo funcional detallado cada 5 aos.
Registrar los resultados para referencia futura.
Para reductores expuestos permanentemente a temperatura ambiente
superior a 40 C, los intervalos de mantenimiento deben ser ms cortos.
Juntas:
Las juntas de elastmero sufren envejecimiento. La vida til terica de las
juntas de NBR es 13,5 aos desde la fecha de fabricacin. Esta cifra est
basada en una temperatura ambiente media de 40 C. AUMA puede
suministrar juegos de juntas.
Grasa:
..
Se recomienda la sustitucin de la grasa y las juntas en los siguientes
casos:
.
Operacin espordica, tras 10 12 aos
Operacin frecuente, tras 6 8 aos
..
Servicio de regulacin, tras 4 6 aos
..
12.2 Cambio de grasa para reductores sinfn GS 50.3 GS 125.3 y pre-reductores VZ 2.3 VZ 4.3
12.2.1 Reductores sinfn Ver lista de piezas de repuesto GS 50.3 GS 125.3, pgina 24.
Tipo de grasa, ver placa de caractersticas; cantidad de grasa,
.
ver pgina 18, tabla 4.
.
Marcar la posicin del reductor en la vlvula, aflojar tornillos de amarre a
la vlvula y desmontar el reductor sinfn.
.
Desmontar la tapa de la carcasa (2.0) extrayendo los tornillos con
arandela.
Extraer tornillos con arandela de la tapa del rodamiento (8.0). Extraer la
.
corona con cuidado, para ello hay que sacar el eje sinfn de su
alojamiento e inclinarlo ligeramente hasta desengranar la corona.
.
Eliminar completamente la grasa y limpiar el recinto con keroseno o
producto similar.
.
Limpiar superficies de contacto de carcasa y tapa (2.0). Sustituir juntas
tricas en la corona (010, 011, 012).
Reinsertar la corona con cuidado y colocar el eje sinfn en su posicin
..
correcta, fijar la tapa del rodamiento (8.0) sobre la carcasa con tornillos y
arandelas.
Rellenar con grasa nueva.
Colocar la tapa de la carcasa (2.0), manteniendo la posicin correcta de
las juntas tricas (010, 011) en la corona. Colocar tornillos con arandelas
y apretar en cruz por igual.
Desengrasar completamente superficies de contacto.
Aplicar grasa no cida sobre las estras del embrague.
Montar reductor sobre vlvula en su posicin correcta,
observar marca.
.
Apretar con tornillos de calidad mnima 8.8 y arandelas;
apretar tornillos en cruz con pares indicados en tabla 3, pgina 11.
.
Reductor sin pre-reductor: Continuar con epgrafe "Despus del
mantenimiento", pgina 21.
Reductor con pre-reductor VZ 2.3 - VZ 4.3: Realizar cambio de grasa en
el pre-reductor segn el epgrafe siguiente.
12.2.2 Pre-reductores Ver lista de piezas de repuesto VZ 2.3 - VZ 4.3, pgina 24.
Tipo de grasa, ver placa de caractersticas; cantidad de grasa,
.
ver pgina 18, tabla 4.
.
Desmontar la tapa de la carcasa (20.0) con el eje de transmisin (21)
extrayendo los tornillos con arandela.
.
Extraer la placa dentada interiormente (45), la carcasa del planetario (22)
y el planetario (24).
.
Eliminar completamente la grasa y limpiar el recinto con keroseno o
producto similar.
..
Limpiar superficies de contacto en carcasa (19.0), tapa de la carcasa
(20.0), y placa dentada interiormente (45). Sustituir juntas tricas.
.
Insertar la carcasa del planetario (22) y el planetario (24).
Rellenar con grasa nueva.
Colocar placa dentada interiormente (45) e insertar el eje de transmisin
.
(21) completamente. Fijar con tornillos y arandelas, apretar tornillos en
cruz por igual con pares indicados en tabla 3, pgina 11.
Continuar con epgrafe "Despus del mantenimiento", pgina 21.
..
12.3 Cambio de grasa para reductores sinfn GS 160.3 GS 250.3 y pre-reductores GZ 160.3 GZ 250.3
12.3.1 Reductores sinfn Ver lista de piezas de repuesto GS 160.3 GS 250.3, pgina 26.
Tipo de grasa, ver placa de caractersticas; cantidad de grasa,
ver pgina 18, tabla 4.
.
Herramientas: til para la tuerca de bloqueo disponible en AUMA.
.
Marcar la posicin del reductor en la vlvula, aflojar tornillos de amarre a
la vlvula y desmontar el reductor sinfn.
.
Desmontar la tapa de la carcasa (2.0) extrayendo los tornillos con
arandela.
Extraer tornillos con arandela de la tapa del rodamiento (8.0). Extraer la
tuerca de bloqueo del rodamiento (30) aflojando el prisionero (07). Extraer
.
la corona con cuidado, para ello hay que sacar el eje sinfn de los
rodamientos e inclinarlo ligeramente hasta desengranar la corona.
.
Eliminar completamente la grasa y limpiar el recinto con keroseno o
producto similar.
.
Limpiar superficies de contacto de carcasa y tapa (2.0). Sustituir juntas
tricas en la corona (010, 011, 012).
Reinsertar la corona con cuidado y colocar el eje sinfn en su posicin
correcta. Roscar la tuerca de bloqueo del rodamiento (30) y asegurar con
..
el prisionero (07). Fijar la tapa del rodamiento (8.0) sobre la carcasa con
tornillos y tuercas de bloqueo.
Rellenar con grasa nueva.
Colocar la tapa de la carcasa (2.0), manteniendo la posicin correcta de
las juntas tricas (010, 011) en la corona. Fijar con tornillos y arandelas y
apretar en cruz por igual.
Desengrasar completamente superficies de contacto.
Aplicar grasa no cida sobre las estras del embrague.
Montar reductor sobre vlvula en su posicin correcta, observar marca.
.
Fijar con tornillos de calidad mnima 8.8 y arandelas;
apretar tornillos en cruz con pares indicados en tabla 3, pgina 11.
.
Reductor sin pre-reductor: Continuar con epgrafe "Despus del
mantenimiento", pgina 21.
Reductor con pre-reductor GZ 160.3 - GZ 250.3: Realizar cambio de
grasa en el pre-reductor segn los epgrafes siguientes.
12.3.2 Pre-reductores de simple etapa GZ 160.3 GZ 250.3 (desmultiplicacin 4:1 y 8:1)
Ver lista de piezas de repuesto GZ 160.3 - GZ 250.3, pgina 28.
Tipo de grasa, ver placa de caractersticas; cantidad de grasa,
.
ver pgina 18, tabla 4.
.
Desmontar la tapa de la carcasa (2.0) con el eje de transmisin (3.0) y la
placa dentada interiormente (5.0) extrayendo los tornillos con arandela.
.
Extraer tornillos (021) de la placa dentada interiormente y separarla del
eje de transmisin.
.
Extraer completamente la grasa y limpiar el recinto con keroseno o
producto similar.
..
Limpiar superficies de contacto en carcasa (1.0), tapa de la carcasa (2.0),
y placa dentada interiormente (5.0). Sustituir juntas tricas.
Rellenar la tapa de la carcasa (2.0) con grasa nueva.
.
Fijar la placa dentada interiormente (5.0) con tornillos (021) sobre la tapa
de la carcasa.
Rellenar carcasa (1.0) con la grasa restante y colocar la tapa de la
.
carcasa con el eje de transmisin (3.0). Fijar con tornillos y arandelas,
apretar tornillos en cruz por igual con pares indicados en tabla 3, pg.11.
Continuar con epgrafe "Despus del mantenimiento", pgina 21.
.
ver pgina 18, tabla 4.
.
Desmontar la tapa de la carcasa (2.0) con el eje de transmisin (3.0)
extrayendo los tornillos con arandela.
.
Desmontar la carcasa intermedia (10) con la tapa del planetario y placa
dentada interiormente extrayendo los tornillos con arandela.
.
Extraer tornillos (035) y placa dentada interiormente (13) y separar del eje
de transmisin (3.0).
.
Extraer tornillos (021) de la placa dentada interiormente (5.0) y separar
del pin (11).
.
Extraer completamente la grasa y limpiar el recinto con keroseno o
producto similar.
Limpiar superficies de contacto en carcasa (1), carcasa intermedia (10),
..
tapa de la carcasa (2.0), y placas dentadas interiormente (5.0, 13).
Sustituir juntas tricas.
Rellenar el recinto (1.0) con grasa nueva.
.
Fijar la placa dentada interiormente (5.0) con tornillos (021) sobre la
carcasa intermedia (10).
.
Colocar la carcasa intermedia. Fijar con tornillos y arandelas, apretar
tornillos en cruz por igual con pares indicados en tabla 3, pgina 11.
.
Rellenar la carcasa intermedia (10) y tapa de la carcasa (2.0) con la
grasa restante.
.
Fijar la placa dentada interiormente (13) con tornillos (035) sobre la tapa
de la carcasa (2.0).
Fijar la tapa de la carcasa con eje del pin sobre la carcasa intermedia.
Fijar con tornillos y arandelas, apretar tornillos en cruz por igual con
pares indicados en tabla 3, pgina 11.
..
.
12.4 Despus del mantenimiento Si aplica, montar actuador multi-vueltas.
Reajustar los topes.
Para reductores con actuador, comprobar los ajustes de finales de
..
carrera, segn las instrucciones de servicio SA/ SAR. Reajustar si es
necesario.
Realizar maniobra de prueba para asegurar un correcto funcionamiento.
Comprobar posibles daos en la pintura. Si es necesario, retocar para
evitar corrosin. AUMA puede suministrar pintura original en pequeas
cantidades bajo demanda.
..
separacin de componentes, como p.ej.:
.
metales varios
plsticos
grasas y aceites
.
Recomendaciones generales:
Guardar las grasas y aceites. Estas sustancias, por regla general, son
.
perjudiciales para el medio ambiente y deben ser entregadas para su
tratamiento a empresas o instituciones autorizadas.
.
Depositar los materiales de desguace en un centro de tratamiento
autorizado.
Observar las regulaciones nacionales en relacin al tratamiento de
residuos.
14. Servicio AUMA ofrece servicios de mantenimiento e inspeccin para sus productos.
En pgina 32 o en internet (www.auma.com), se puede encontrar una
relacin completa de direcciones de sucursales y representantes.
Notas
11.0
32
12
2.0
GS 50.3 - GS 80.3
S1 (012) 4.0
1 6
18.0
020
6
10.0 7 015
017
S1 8.0
S1
S1 (011)
15
S1 (010)
048
GS 100.3 - GS 125.3 046
047
31
3
4.0
25.0
S1 (010)
017
8.0
S1
14
S1 21 035
S1 45
VZ 2.3-VZ 4.3 028
22
032
19.0
S1
4.0
030 25.0
24
031
031 20.0 061 034
23
030
029
S1 024
060
060
024
Nota:
En los pedidos de piezas de repuesto, es imprescindible mencionar el tipo de reductor sinfn y su nmero de
comisin (ver placa de caractersticas). La presentacin de las piezas puede diferir del suministro.
11.0
17.0
S1 2.0
S1
1.0
10.0
S1
S1 (011)
S1 (010)
7 6
S1
15.0 3
16.0
S1 (010)
14
30 07
4.0
6 8.0
S1
31.31
S1
18.0
31.0
Nota:
En los pedidos de piezas de repuesto, es imprescindible mencionar el tipo de reductor sinfn y su nmero de
comisin (ver placa de caractersticas). La presentacin de las piezas puede diferir del suministro.
6.0
021 5.0 S1
S1
3.0 S1
S1
S1
1.0
3.3
18.0
2.0
Nota:
En los pedidos de piezas de repuesto, es imprescindible mencionar el tipo de pre-reductor y su nmero de comisin
(ver placa de caractersticas). La presentacin de las piezas puede diferir del suministro.
6.0 S1
021 5.0
S1
3.0 S1
S1 3.3
035
S1 S1 S1 13
1.0
18.0
2.0
13.0
11 10
Nota:
En los pedidos de piezas de repuesto, es imprescindible mencionar el tipo de pre-reductor y su nmero de comisin
(ver placa de caractersticas). La presentacin de las piezas puede diferir del suministro.
Index
B M T
Bolts for mounting actuators 10 Maintenance 3,18 Technical data 4
Mounting of multi-turn actuators 9 Transport 7
C
Mounting positions 8
Changing the swing angle 15
Mounting to valve 11
D
R
Declaration of Conformity 30
Range of application 3
Declaration of Incorporation 30
Disposal and recycling 22 S
Safety instructions 3
E
Service 22
Enclosure protection IP 68 17
Setting the end stops
F for manual operation 12
Fitting of handwheel 7 with mounted multi-turn actuator
13
L
Spare parts lists
Lubricant 19 GS 160.3 - GS 250.3 26
GZ 160.3 - GZ 250.3 (4:1/8:1) 28
AUMA Riester GmbH & Co. KG AUMA Riester GmbH & Co. KG
P. O. Box 1362 P. O. Box 1151
D - 79373 Mllheim D - 73747 Ostfildern
Tel +49 (0)7631/809-0 Tel +49 (0)711 / 34803 0
o
Fax +49 (0)7631/809 1250 Fax +49 (0)711 / 34803 34 N de registro del certificado
12 100/104 4269
riester@auma.com riester@wof.auma.com
www.auma.com www.auma.com
Ms informacin en
www.auma.com Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 358/458
Y003.822/011/es /1.05
AUTOGARD FLEXIBLE COUPLING
Installation and Maintenace Manual
USA +1 815 229 3190 Japan +81 3 3449 9621 Germany +49 221 431026 Australia +61 3 9532 0901
Registered Number 387564 England
ATEX CERTIFICATION
The Autoflex ECS range of couplings has been approved for use in potentially
explosive atmospheres, in accordance with the ATEX Directive 94/9/EC. The full
marking details for couplings approved for this use are:
On being put into service in a potentially hazardous atmosphere, the machinery into
which the coupling is installed must be declared in conformity with Directive
94/9/EC. Special note is to be made of the ambient operating conditions, to ensure
that surface temperature restrictions are met for the assembled machinery. It is a
condition of safe use, that the limiting performance parameters (torque, speed and
misalignment) specified in this manual are adhered to.
2
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 361/458
PERFORMANCE PARAMETERS
The coupling is designed to be used within the parameters set out in the table below,
according to the coupling size designation and actual distance between shaft ends
(DBSE) supplied. The torque ratings are nominal and service factors may have been
applied, depending on the duty requirements. See Selection Verification
* Quoted values are for min DBSE. For longer DBSEs, allowable offset = r + (extra
DBSE x tan 0.5)
+ Quoted values are for min DBSE. For longer DBSEs, allowable offset = r + (extra
DBSE x tan 0.3)
3
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 362/458
ECS HVII COUPLING
The following instructions apply to standard ECS HVII couplings. The actual
coupling supplied may vary depending on the customers requirements and
specifications. Where supplied, these instructions should be read in conjunction with
the coupling general arrangement drawing.
SELECTION VERIFICATION
The user is responsible for ensuring that the coupling ordered will in fact meet the
duty requirements and the duty has not changed from the time that the coupling was
originally selected. The selection procedure is as follows:
1. Determine the service Factor (SF) from the table below.
2. Calculate the nominal driving torque, T = kW x 9550/rpm
3. Calculate the torque rating for the application = T * SF
4. Select the coupling which has the next highest continuous torque rating
5. Check the limiting conditions:
That the bore capacity is suitable
Check the speed capability according to whether or not it is balanced
Check the coupling dimensions: DBSE, overall length and outside diameter
Check that the peak torque capacity will not be exceeded
Autogard can supply the duty under which the coupling was originally selected.
Load Characteristics Electric Motor Steam engine 6 cyl Recip 4 Cyl Recip
Steam Turbine Water Turbine Engine Engine
GasTurbine 8cyl Recip Engine
Constant Torque 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5
Slight Fluctuations 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0
Moderate fluctuations/light shock 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5
Large Fluctuations/Mod. Shock 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0
Shock + light torque reversals 3.0 3.5 4.0 *
Heavy shock/large torque reverse * * * *
* Consult Autogard Engineering
4
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 363/458
INSTALLATION
Preparation
The coupling should be unpacked and examined for any signs of damage, which may
have occurred during transit. Verify that all the parts have been properly supplied as
per the order. Check that the coupling bores and shaft separation are per the original
order. Care should be taken to ensure that all spigots and bores are free from burrs.
Fit Hubs
Autoflex ECSHVII hubs typically have a straight parallel bore and keyway for a light
interference fit. Refer to the order for specifics related to the actual bore and keyway
specified.
For standard interference, the coupling hubs should be heated to 150 degrees C (300
degrees F) in an oil bath or an oven. Do not use spot heat or exceed 300 degrees C
(600 degrees F) as this may cause flange distortion. Fit the hubs onto the shafts with
the hub face flush with the shaft end or as specified in the General Arrangement
Drawing. When clearance fit hubs are supplied, slide the hub onto the shaft and
tighten the set-screws.
Where Taper Bores and/or Hydraulic Mounting is supplied, consult Autogard for the
appropriate installation instructions.
NOTE: Care must be taken to ensure that the coupling hubs are properly supported
during installation to ensure that they do not slip.
Shaft Alignment
To align the shafts place the equipment into its approximate location. Measure and
set the DBSE (Distance Between Shaft Ends) of the equipment as per the original
specification. This should correspond to the DBSE supplied on the General
Arrangement Drawing where supplied.
Note: The DBSE is usually measured from the inner face of the hub, which usually
relates to the overall length of the transmission unit.
Align the centre line of the driving and driven shafts using the best available methods.
Autogard recommends the use of Laser Alignment where available. The better the
alignment the lower the resultant loads will be transmitted onto the bearings of the
driving and driven equipment. Autogard recommends that the misalignment be set at
no more than 10% of the catalogue values. This will allow for misalignment, which
occurs due to foundation settling, thermal growth etc. The coupling alignment should
be checked periodically to ensure that alignment deterioration is properly
compensated.
5
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 364/458
ASSEMBLY
6
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 365/458
Installation Between Hubs
Check the spigot on both the hubs and the transmission unit to ensure that they are
free from dirt and burrs. Using three of the standard hub bolts, uniformly collapse the
guard ring and the spacer flange as shown and place the transmission unit between the
mounted hubs.
Spacer Flange
Guard Ring
Remove the compression bolts ensuring the transmission unit properly engages the
hub spigot. Install the bolts through the hub and tighten to the torque shown in Table
2 or as shown in the General Arrangement Drawing. Bolts should be tightened in a
diametrically opposite sequence.
Caution:
Ensure compression bolts are removed prior to tightening any of the hub bolts.
Balance coupling hub bolts have been weigh balanced and must only be supplied as a set.
Disc packs are factory assembled. DO NOT loosen the disc pack fasteners.
7
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 366/458
Table 2
8
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 367/458
The standard for balancing the ECS HVII is to component balance and as such match marks
are not used. If match marks are present, the coupling has been specially balanced. The
coupling must be assembled with the match marks in-line.
Once the coupling has been installed as noted above, slowly rotate the machinery to
ensure that everything moves freely.
Make sure all fasteners have been properly installed and tightened per the
supplied tables or the General Arrangement Draws.
If possible, re-check the coupling alignment after the driver and driven
foundation bolts have been tightened.
USA +1 815 229 3190 Japan +81 3 3449 9621 Germany +49 221 431026 Australia +61 3 9532 0901
Registered Number 387564 England
9
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 368/458
FISHER ROSEMOUNT RESISTANCE THERMOMETER
Installation and Maintenace Manual
Resistance Thermometers
and Thermocouple Assemblies
! CAUTION
The products described in this document are NOT designed for nuclear-qualified applica-
tions. Using non-nuclear qualified products in applications that require nuclear-qualified
hardware or products may cause inaccurate readings.
For information on Rosemount nuclear-qualified products, contact your local Rosemount
Sales Representative.
Rosemount and the Rosemount logotype are registered trademarks of Rosemount Inc.
APPENDIX Appendix I
Limit Tolerances of the Basic Values ............................................. 15
Appendix II
Limit Tolerances for Thermocouples .............................................. 15
Figure 1:
Pt 100 characteristic curve
Figure 2:
Glass wire-wound, ceramic wire-wound
and thin-film resistance thermometers
Figure 3:
Resistance thermometer modules
Three circuit types are commonly used: 2-wire, 3-wire and 4-wire
circuits.
The most accurate measurements are obtained with the 4-wire circuit,
as in this case the measurement is not affected by lead wire resistance
or environment temperature of lead wires (see Fig. 4).
The 3-wire circuit is normally used for eliminating the lead wire
resistance (Wheatstone bridge).
In the case of the 2-wire circuit the lead wire resistance is fully mea-
sured by the measuring bridge. By the use of modern control equip-
ment the influence of the lead wire resistance at 2-wire circuit can be
compensated by a line compensation resistor, which is independent of
temperature.
Figure 4:
Methods of connection
Figure 5
Figure 6
LEADS AND When laying and connecting extension resp. compensating cables, care
CONNECTIONS must be taken to connect the positive pole of the thermocouple to the
positive terminal of the indicating instrument. If extension cables or
compensating cable are used, care must be taken not to interchange
positive and negative conductors. To prevent errors, the positive and
negative leads bear a corresponding marking.
10
AREAS OF APPLICATION In the negative temperature range, thermocouples can be used down
to -200 C. For temperatures above 1000 C thermocouples made of
platinum and a platinum/rhodium alloy are used.
11
12
VDE/VDI 3512
Set-up for temperature measurements
Vd TV regulations (1)
Operating stress
The stresses, indicated in the drawing, apply to the supplied housing.
The load data, included in the standards for every type, are valid for
housing according to DIN 43763 and DIN 43772.
G 3 8, G 50 Nm
G 100 Nm
Above starting torques are to be used as well for coupling rings with
similar threads.
(1)
To be considered in case of weld-in type protective tubes. Material, weld and pressure test according to operating conditions
13
Connection of transmitters
When connecting transmitter, the installation-, connection- and test
instructions of the manufacturers are to be considered.
14
APPENDIX I
Limit tolerances of the basic values according to DIN IEC 751 and DIN 43760
Basic values Limit tolerances
according to according to according to according to
DIN IEC 751 DIN 43760 DIN IEC 751 DIN 43760
Platinum RTD- Nickel RTD- Platinum RTD-elements Nickel RTD-
elements elements elements
Class A Class B
Ohm Ohm/K Ohm Ohm/K Ohm corresp. C
C Ohm corresp. C Ohm corresp. C
-200 18.49 0.44 0.24 0.55 0.56 1.3
-100 60.25 0.41 0.14 0.35 0.32 0.8
-60 69.5 0.47 - 1.0 2.1
0 100.00 0.39 100.0 0.55 0.06 0.15 0.12 0.3 0.2 0.4
100 138.50 0.38 161.8 0.69 0.13 0.35 0.30 0.8 0.8 1.1
200 175.84 0.37 240.7 0.90 0.20 0.55 0.48 1.3 1.6 1.8
250 289.2 1.04 2.3 2.1
300 212.02 0.35 0.27 0.75 0.64 1.8
400 247.04 0.34 0.33 0.95 0.79 2.3
500 280.90 0.33 0.38 1.15 0.93 2.8
600 313.59 0.33 0.43 1.35 1.06 3.3
700 345.13 0.31 1.17 3.8
800 375.71 0.30 1.28 4.3
850 390.26 0.29 1.34 4.6
APPENDIX II
Limit tolerances for thermocouples according DIN IEC 584-2
Class 1 2 3(2)
(1)
Limit tolerances 0.5 C or 0.004 x |t| 1 C or 0.0075 x |t| 1C or 0.015 x |t|
() Limit tolerances apply to following temperature ranges
Typ T -40 C up to 350 C -40 C up to 350 C -200 C up to 40 C
(1)
Limit tolerances 1.5 C or 0.004 x |t| 2.5 C or 0.0075 x |t| 2.5 C or 0.015 x |t|
() Limit tolerances apply to following temperature ranges
Typ E -40 C up to 800 C -40 C up to 900 C -200 C up to 40 C
Typ J -40 C up to 750 C -40 C up to 750 C ---
Typ K -40 C up to 1000 C -40 C up to 1200 C -200 C up to 40 C
(1)
Limit tolerances 1.0 C or 1.5 C or 0.0025 x |t| 4 C or 0.005 x |t|
[1+(t-1100) x 003] C
() Limit tolerances apply to following temperature ranges
Type R and S 0 C up to 1600 C 0 C up to 1600 C ---
Type B --- 600 C up to 1700 C 600 C up to 1700 C
(1)
Limit tolerances for thermocouples are indicated in degrees centigrade or as percentage of the measured temperature in degrees centigrade. Whichever value is greater applies.
(2)
Thermocouples and thermocouple wires are usually supplied with limit tolerances according to the table above valid for temperature range above of -40 C. The thermocouple limit
tolerances of same material at temperatures below -40 C may be exceeded as stated for tolerance class 3 according to DIN IEC 584-2. Thermocouples requested by purchaser
with limit tolerances according to classes 1, 2 or 3 may be obtained by special material selection.
|t| = Temperature in degrees Centigrade
15
Termmetros de resistncia
e termopares
! CUIDADO
O aparelho descrito nesta documentao no foi concebido para uma utilizao em
sistemas nucleares.
O emprego de produtos que no tenham sido concebidos para uma utilizao em
sistemas nucleares pode causar resultados de medio errados.
Obtm informaes sobre aparelhos admissveis para sistemas nucleares junto do
distribuidor autorizado da Rosemount.
O conversor de medio para temperatura Modelo 644 Smart da Rosemount pode estar protegido por uma ou vrias
patentes dos E.U.A.. Foram solicitadas outras patentes estrangeiras.
Rosemount, SMART FAMILY e o logotipo da Rosemount so marcas registadas da Rosemount Inc.
HART a marca registada da HART Communication Foundation.
PlantWeb a marca registada do grupo Fisher-Rosemount.
WAGO a marca registada da Kontakttechnik GmbH, Alemanha.
Lexan e Noryl so marcas registadas da General Electric.
O Modelo 3095MV Multivariable da Rosemount pode estar protegido por uma ou vrias das seguintes patentes dos E.U.A.:
N 4 370 890; 4 612 812; 4 791 352; 4 798 089; 4 818 994; 4 833 922; 4 866 435; 4 926 340; e 5 028 746.
Mexico Patentado N 154 981, dependente do modelo. Foram solicitadas outras patentes estrangeiras.
Rosemount e o logotipo da Rosemount so marcas registadas da Rosemount Inc. Coplanar, Multivariable (MV) e Tri-Loop
so marcas registadas da Rosemount Inc.
PlantWeb a marca registada da Fisher-Rosemount Companies.
HART a marca registada da HART Communications Foundation.
Hastelloy e Hastelloy C so marcas registadas da Haynes International.
Microsoft e Windows so marcas registadas da Microsoft, Inc.
Annubar a marca registada da Dieterich Standard Inc.
V-Cone a marca registada da McCrometer, Inc.
Os aparelhos Fisher-Rosemount cumprem todas as exigncias das normas e disposies legais vlidas na
Europa, que esto sujeitas obrigao da marca CE.
ANEXOS Anexo I
Tolerncias limites dos valores de base ......................................... 15
Anexo II
Tolerncias limites dos valores de base ......................................... 15
Figura 1:
Curva caracterstica do Pt 100
Figura 2:
Resistncias de medio
aplicadas em vidro, cermica
e camadas
Figura 3:
Mdulos dos termmetros de resistncia
Figura 5
Figura 6
e Fe-CuNi Tipo L
Cu-CuNi Tipo U
Estes termopares e cabos de compensao j no esto
disponveis para utilizao em instalaes novas
(tenso termoelctrica conforme DIN 43710).
As tabelas das tenses termoelctricas podem ser
requeridas junto dos fabricantes.
10
11
12
VDE/VDI 3511
Medio da temperatura tcnica/directiva
VDE/VDI 3512
Preparao para medies da temperatura
(1)
TRB Normas tcnicas para construo de reservatrios
Normas Vd TV (1)
Esforo em funcionamento
Para as bainhas de proteco fornecidas aplicam-se os esforos
mecnicos indicados no desenho.
Para bainhas de proteco conforme as normas DIN 43763 e
DIN 43772 so vlidos os dados de esforo indicados nas normas
para o respectivo tipo.
G 3 8, G 50 Nm
G 100 Nm
(1)
A respeitar no caso de tubos de proteco soldados, material, soldadura e ensaio de compresso de acordo
com as condies de funcionamento.
13
14
ANEXO II
Tolerncias limites par
paraa ter mopares conf
termopares or
confor me DIN EN 60584-2
orme
Classe 1 2 3(2)
(1)
Tolerncias limites 0,5 C ou 0,004 x |t| 1 C ou 0,0075 x |t| 1C ou 0,015 x |t|
() As tolerncias limites so vlidas na amplitude de temperatura
Tipo T -40 C a 350 C -40 C a 350 C -200 C a 40 C
(1)
Tolerncias limites 1,5 C ou 0,004 x |t| 2,5 C ou 0,0075 x |t| 2,5 C ou 0,015 x |t|
() As tolerncias limites so vlidas na amplitude de temperatura
Tipo E -40 C a 800 C -40 C a 900 C -200 C a 40 C
Tipo J -40 C a 750 C -40 C a 750 C ---
Tipo K -40 C a 1000 C -40 C a 1200 C -200 C a 40 C
(1)
Tolerncias limites 1,0 C ou 1,5 C ou 0,0025 x |t| 4 C ou 0,005 x |t|
[1+(t-1100) x 003] C
() As tolerncias limites so vlidas na amplitude de temperatura
Tipo R e S 0 C a 1600 C 0 C a 1600 C ---
Tipo B --- 600 C a 1700 C 600 C a 1700 C
(1)
Como tolerncia limite para termopares so vlidos os valores definidos em graus Celsius ou as percentagens referentes s reais temperaturas em graus Celsius. E vlido o valor
mais elevado.
(2)
Os termopares e os fios termoelctricos so, geralmente, fornecidos de tal modo que so cumpridas as tolerncias limites de acordo com a tabela acima para a amplitude de
temperatura acima de -40 C. As tolerncias para termopares do mesmo material, no caso de temperaturas abaixo dos -40 C, podem ser superiores s tolerncias limites
determinadas na classe 3 de acordo com a norma DIN IEC 584-2. Se forem necessrios termopares que tenham de cumprir as tolerncias limites de acordo com as classes 1, 2 e/ou 3,
isso deve ser indicado pelo responsvel pela encomenda, sendo necessrio, normalmente, uma seleco especial do material.
15
HART protocol
Configurable via
User friendly WIKA Configuration Software
HART Communicator HC 275 / FC 375
Asset Management Systems
Configuration and write protection via password
Universal transmitter for
RTDs / Thermocouples
Resistance sensors / mV-sensors
Output linear to temperature with
RTD and thermocouple input signals
Customer specific linearisation with max. 30 points
for sensors with - or mV - output
Signalling acc. NAMUR NE 43 individually configurable
signalling for possible errors of the sensor system
EMC Conformity per EN 61 326 and NAMUR NE 21
Monitoring of sensor lead resistance acc. NAMUR NE 89
Isolation voltage AC 1500 V between sensor and current loop
Description
The digital temperature transmitter T32 range is designed for The following sensors can be connected:
universal use in the process industry. - RTDs per DIN EN 60 751, JIS C 1606, DIN 43 760
in 2, 3 and 4 wire connection, the connection-system used is
Comprehensive individual configuration possibilities like, for
configurable and ensures an optimal lead wire compensation
example, type of sensor, measuring range and error signalling,
high accuracy, galvanic isolation and excellent EMI protection - thermocouples per DIN EN 60 584 resp. DIN 43 710
characterize these transmitters. Cold junction compensation ( CJC ) is built-in, the use of an
external CJC is selectable via configuration.
The rail mounting case fits to any standard rail per DIN EN 50 022-
- resistance-sensors up to 5000
35.
in 2, 3 and 4 wire connection, configurable compensation
of the connection cable
During configuration any one of 15 types of sensors can be
selected. Measured temperatures are from -270 C up to 1820 C. - mV-sensors up to 1200 mV
The transmitters are delivered with a basic configuration (see
Configuration can be done by means of a HART Communicator
ordering information). Alternatively, upon request, transmitters can
model HC 275 / FC 375, with FSK modem (e.g. VIATOR) via the
be delivered with a customized configuration within the given limits.
RS 232-C of a standard DOS PC, or with the HART functionability
of a Asset Management System or DCS system. Also available as head mounting version:
model T32.10, see data sheet TE 32.01.
2
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 404/458
TE 32.02
C i = 7.8 nF Li = 0.1 mH
Entity
RA load
UB loop power supply voltage, see power supply
Ta ambient temperature
TC temperature coefficient
3
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 405/458
TE 32.02
load RA in
1333
1244
800
533
0 UB in V
0 12 24 30 40 42
( Ex ia ) ( Ex nL )
drawing no. 3191 311.02 ( Ex ib ) ( Ex nA )
3191 303.01
4
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 406/458
TE 32.02
Designation of terminal connectors
input 4 20 mA loop
thermocouple RTD / resistance sensor mV - sensor
in
CJC with
external Pt 100 4-lead 3-lead 2-lead
3191291.01
Wiring scheme
Following must be observed, particularly with applications in hazardous area:
- The wiring scheme
- The total of all output values of all simultaneously connected instruments ( Power supply, FSK modem, HART Communicator )
must not exceed the permissible maximum values of the T32.
*
drawing no. 3191281.01
power supply
T32.30
FSK-Modem
HART Communicator HC 275 / FC 375
FSK-Modem
[EEx ia]
5
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 407/458
Ordering information for temperature transmitter Model T32.30
Field No. Code Features
Model
1 T32.30 T32.30 T32.30, rail mounting
Explosion protection
0 without
2 II 1G EEx ia IIC T4/T5/T6 acc. to directive 94/9/EC (ATEX)
4 II 2G EEx ib IIC T4/T5/T6 acc. to directive 94/9/EC (ATEX)
6 CSA Class I, Division 1, Group A, B, C and D
9 II 3G EEx nL IIC T4/T5/T6
2 A II 3G EEx nA IIC T4/T5/T6
Measuring range
GK basic configuration 1)
3 KK customers specification 2) please state as additional text
Ambient temperature
4 R R Standard -20 C ... +70 C
Order code:
1 2 3 4 5
T32.30 00 R
Additional text:
Specifications and dimensions given in this leaflet represent the state of engineering at the time of printing.
Modifications may take place and materials specified may be replaced by others without prior notice.
Protocolo HART
configurable con
Universal para
Termorresistencias / termopares
Sensores de resistencia / sensor mV
Descripcin
Los transmisores digitales de temperatua de la serie T32 se han Se pueden conectar los siguientes tipos de sensores:
diseado para el uso universal en la industria de proceso. - Termorresistencias segn DIN EN 60 751, JIS C 1606, DIN 43 760
Extensas posibilidades de configuracin tales como tipo de sensor, en conexiones de 2 - , 3 - y 4 hilos, el sistema de conexin utilizado
rango de medicin y sealizacin de errores se pueden elegir est configurable asegurando una compensacin ptima de la lnea
individualmente. Adems, esos transmisores se caracterizan por de conexin.
una precisin alta, isolacin galvnica y una excelente inmunidad a - Termopares segn DIN EN 60 584 y DIN 43 710
parsitos contra efectos electromagnticas. Una compensacin de los extremos fros est incorporada, el uso
Esos transmisores integrados en la caja de railes son apropiados de una compensacin de extremos fris externa se puede seleccionar
para todos los railes segn DIN EN 50 022 35. via configuracin..
- Sensoren de termorresistencias hasta 5000 en conexiones de 2 - ,
Se puede elegir entre 15 tipos de sensores via configuracin 3 - und 4 -hilos, compensacin configurable del cable de conexin
HART . Las temperaturen medidas van de -270 C a 1820 C. - Sensores de mV hasta 1200 mV
Estos transmisores se entregan con una configuracin de base (vea
La configuracin del T32 se puede efectuar mediante el informaciones de pedido) o, sobre demanda, los transmisores pueden
Comunicador HART , modelo HC 275 / FC 375, con un mdem entregarse con una configuracin especfica al cliente dentro de los
FSK (p.ej. VIATOR) via RS 232-C de un PC DOS estndar o con lmites dados de configuracin.
la funcionalidad de HART de un sistema Asset Management o Tambin disponible en versin cabezal: modelo T32.10, vea hoja
sistema DCS. tcnica 32.01.
2
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 410/458
TE 32.02
t90
Temperaturkoeffizient 0,1 % der Messspanne / 10 K
Anstiegszeit ca. 0,5 s
Messwert-Aktualisierung ca. 3 / s
RA
Dmpfung RA konfigurierbar: A mitoderRA in1s und
(UB - 12 V ) / 0,0225aus UB sin V
bis 60
Brde
Brdeneinfluss kein messbarer Einfluss
Hilfsenergieeinfluss kein messbarer Einfluss
Signalisierung am Analogausgang fr Sensorfehler und interner Transmitterfehler
NAMUR NE 43 zusteuernd < 3,6 mA (3,5 mA bei Grundkonfiguration)
aufsteuernd > 21,0 mA (21,5 mA bei Grundkonfiguration)
konfigurierbar zusteuernd 3,5 mA bis 12 mA
aufsteuernd 12 mA bis 22,5 mA
Hilfsenergie UB
Typ T32.30.000 (ohne Ex-Schutz) DC 12 42 V
Typ T32.30.002 (mit Ex-Schutz, eigensicher ia ) DC 12 30 V
Typ T32.30.004 (mit Ex-Schutz, eigensicher ib ) DC 12 30 V
Typ T32.30.006 (mit Ex-Schutz nach CSA ) DC 12 30 V
Typ T32.30.009 (mit Ex-Schutz,
DC 12 40 V
energiebegrenzt)
Typ
( Ex-Schutz, nichtfunkende Einrichtung) DC 12 40 V
T32.30.00A
Eingang der Hilfsenergie geschtzt gegen Verpolung
Ex-Schutz nach Richtlinie 94/9/EG ATEX
EG-Baumusterprfbescheinigung DMT 98 ATEX E 007 X
eigensicher nach EN 50 020
Typ T32.30.002 II 1G EEx ia IIB / IIC T4 / T5 / T6
Typ T32.30.004 II 2G EEx ib IIB / IIC T4 / T5 / T6
zulssige Umgebungstemperatur -20 C +70 C bei T4
Ui = DC 30 V -20 C I +70 C
i = 130 mA
bei T5 P = 800 mW
i
-20 C +60 C bei T6
Ci = 7,8 nF Li = 100 H
sicherheitstechnische Hchstwerte fr den
Uo = DC 11,5 V Io = 12,3 mA Po = 35,2 mW
Stromschleifenkreis ( Anschlsse + und
) Gruppe II B: Co = 11 F Lo = 1 mH
sicherheitstechnische Hchstwerte Gruppe II C: Co = 1,6 F Lo = 1 mH
fr den Sensorkreis ( Anschlsse 1 bis
4)
Ex-schutz, Intrinsic Safety nach CSA CSA File No. 1248412 (alt: LR 105000-6)
Typ T32.30.006 Vmax =Safe:
Intrinsically 30 VdcClass I, Imax = 130 mA
Division 1, Group A,Pmax
B, =C800
andmWD
Parameters
Ci = 7.8 nF Class I,
Non-Incendive: LDivision
= 0.1 mH2, Group A, B, C and D
mximos
i
Valores
max
Stromschleifenkreis Ca = 1.6 F La = 1 mH
Input Terminals (+, -)
RA carga
UB tensin de la alimentacin de bucle, ver energa auxiliar
Ta temperatura ambiental
TK coeficiente de temperatura
3
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 411/458
TE 32.02
Ex-Schutz nach Richtlinie 94/9/EG
. energiebegrenztes bzw. nicht funkende Baumusterprfbescheinigung DMT 99 E 088 X
. Betriebsmittel nach EN 50 021
Typ T32.30.009 II 3G EEx nL IIC T4 / T5 / T6
Typ T32.30.00A II 3G EEx nA IIC T4 / T5 / T6
zulssige Umgebungstemperatur -20 C +70 C bei T4
-20 C +70 C bei T5
-20 C +60 C bei T6
sicherheitstechnische Hchstwerte fr den Ui = DC 40 V
Stromschleifenkreis ( Anschlsse + und Ci = 7,8 nF Li = 100 H
) Uo = DC 5,5 V Io = 0,21 mA
sicherheitstechnische Hchstwerte
Co = 1000 F Lo = 1000 mH
fr den Sensorkreis ( Anschlsse 1 bis
4)
Elektromagnetische Vertrglichkeit (EMV) nach EMV Richtlinie 89/336/EWG EN 61326:1997 / A1:1998
Umgebungsbedingungen
Umgebungs- und Lagertemperatur -25 +70 C
Klimaklasse HSG DIN 40 040
maximal zulssige Feuchte 90 % relative Feuchte (DIN IEC 68-2-30 Var. 2
Vibration 10 2000 Hz 5g DIN IEC 68-2-6
Schock DIN IEC 68-2-27 g N = 30
Salznebel DIN IEC 68-2-11
Sonstiges
Kommunikation HART - Protokoll Rev. 5 inklusive Burstmodus, Multidrop
Todos los parmetros T32 estn configurables resp. se pueden llamar con los siguientes posibilidades:
- software de configuracin WIKA de fcil manejo, descarga gratuita via www.wika.de
- comunicador HART HC 275 / FC 375: T32 Device Description integrada resp. reequipable en versiones anteriores
- Sistemas de gestin Asset
AMS: completamente integrado resp. reequipable en versiones antiguas
Simatic PDM: completamente integrado desde versin 5.1, reequipable en versin 5.0.2
Smart Vision: reequipable mediante DTM segn FDT 1.2 estndar desde la versin 4 de Smart Vision
via T32 DTM con todas las aplicaciones suplementarias con interfaz FDT 1.2 , tal como PACTware (vea accesorios pgina 6 DTM)
El juego de configuracin (ver accesorios) se puede utilizar para la comunicacin directa via la interfaz serie de un PC.
Nota: Parmetros definidos por comandos universales de HART (p.ej. el rango de medicin) pueden procesarse por principio
con cualquiera herramienta de configuracin de HART.
El modelo T32.20 est dotado de una conexin directa para nuestro mdem FSK (Frequency Shift Keying) (vea accesorios juego de configuracin).
Isolationsspannung (Eingang zu
AC 1500 V, 60 s
Analogausgang)
Aufwrmzeit UB ca. 5 Min.
Leistungsaufnahme bei 24 V max. 540 mW
Temperatureinheiten konfigurierbar: K, C, F, R
Konfigurations- und Kalibrierungsdaten dauerhaft gespeichert in EEPROM
Prfstrom zur Sensorberwachung nom. 1 A whrend Prfzyklus, sonst 0 A
automatisches Durchfhren eines Initialtestes nach Anlegen der
Selbstberwachung
Hilfsenergie,
Gehuse fr Schienenmontage
Material Kunststoff
Schutzart Gehuse IP 40 IEC 529 / EN 60 529
Anschlussklemme IP 20 IEC 529 / EN 60 529
Anschlussquerschnitt der Klemmen max. 2,5 mm
Masse ca. 200 g
Mae siehe Abmessungen
Carga RA en
1333
1244
800
533
0 UB in V
0 12 24 30 40 42
( Ex ia ) ( Ex nL )
N de plano 3191 311.02 ( Ex ib ) ( Ex nA )
3191 303.01
4
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 412/458
TE 32.02
Asignacin de los terminales
Entrada bucle de 4 20 mA
Termopar termoresistencia/ sensor mV
sSensor de resistencia
Extremos frios en
con Pt 100 extern 4-hilos 3-hilos 2-hilos
N de plano 3191291.01
Esquema de conexin
Hay que obsevar lo siguiente, especialmente en aplicaciones en zona de explosin
- El esquema de conexiones
- El total de todos los valores de salida de todos los instrumentos conectados simultneamente (alimentacin, mdem FSK,
Comunicador HART ) no debe exceder los valores mximos permisibles del T32.
*
N de plano 3191281.01
Alimentacin
T32.30
Mdem FSK
Comunicador HART HC 275 / FC 375
Mdem FSK
[EEx ia]
5
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 413/458
Informaciones de pedido para transmisores de temperatura Modelo T32.30
Feld Nr. Code Ausfhrung
Typ
1 T32.30 T32.30 T32.30, Schienenversion
Explosionsschutz
0 ohne
2 II 1G EEx ia IIC T4/T5/T6 nach Richtlinie 94/9/EG (ATEX)
4 II 2G EEx ib IIC T4/T5/T6 nach Richtlinie 94/9/EG (ATEX)
6 CSA Class I, Division 1, Group A, B, C and D
9 II 3G EEx nL IIC T4/T5/T6
2 A II 3G EEx nA IIC T4/T5/T6
Messbereich
GK 1)
Grundkonfiguration
kundenspezifisch
3 KK 2) bitte als Zusatztext angeben
konfiguriert
Umgebungstemperatur
4 R R Standard -20 C ... +70 C
Zustzliche Bestellangaben
JA NEIN
Bestellcode:
1 2 3 4 5
T32.30 00 R
Zusatztext:
Applications
Plant construction
Power engineering
Special Features
Designs for Pt100 or thermocouples
Description
The transmitters in the T19 series are provided with configurable
ranges. One of several available measuring ranges can be selected
simply by setting solder bridges. Therefore, these transmitters are
especially suitable for applications where frequently changing
requirements have to be taken into account.
These temperature transmitters serve to convert temperature-
dependent changes in resistance in the case of resistance
thermometers or temperature-dependent changes in voltage in the
case of thermocouples into a 4 ... 20 mA loop signal. This method
guarantees an easy and reliable transmission of the temperature
values measured.
Accuracy, sensor monitoring and the permissible ambient conditions
are matched to the requirements of industrial applications.
The rail mounting case fits to any standard rail per DIN EN 50 022 - 35 .
Also available as head mounting version:
model T19.10, see data sheet TE 19.01.
Specifications in % refer to the measuring span 1) for Pt 100 in 3 - lead connection, legend of
for Pt 100 in 2 - lead connection lead resistance counts fully towards error lead number:
RA load 2) with factory configured measuring range,
Tamb ambient temperature value is valid at ambient temperature 23 C 5 K
TC temperature coefficient 3) 0.15 % with measuring range 0 ... 50 C, 0 ... 300 C, 0 ... 350 C
UB loop power supply voltage, see power supply 4) whichever is greater no.1 no.2 no.3
5) up scale, in case only lead no. 1 open
6) temperature value, in case of short between leads no. 2 and no. 3 1375 890
(operation of Pt 100 in 2 - lead connection)
2237 440.01
UB in V
2
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 417/458
TE 19.02
Transmitter configuration
Remove case lid
Set solder bridges for desired measuring range in accordance with the tables
Snapfit lid to the case again
Adjust zero and span by means of potentiometer
Pt 100 meas. ranges small Pt 100 meas. ranges large Pt 100 meas. ranges for HVAC
Model T19.30.1P0-1 Model T19.30.1P0-2 Model T19.30.1P0-3
measuring range bridge measuring range bridge measuring range bridge
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- 50 ... + 50 C - 50 ... + 200 C - 30 ... + 30 C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
0 ... 50 C 0 ... 200 C - 30 ... + 50 C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
0 ... 100 C 0 ... 250 C 0 ... 60 C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
0 ... 120 C 0 ... 300 C 0 ... 80 C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
0 ... 150 C 0 ... 350 C 0 ... 100 C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
0 ... 200 C 0 ... 400 C 0 ... 120 C
Bridge positions
Pt 100 thermocouple
2295 360.01
input Pt 100
input 4 20 mA loop
2299 551.01
2299 594.01
input thermocouple
input 4 20 mA loop
breakthrough for M 4
3
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 418/458
Order code for temperature transmitter Model T19.30
Field No. Code Features
Input
1P resistance thermometer Pt 100
3T thermocouple type T (Cu-CuNi)
3J thermocouple type J (Fe-CuNi)
3K thermocouple type K (NiCr-Ni)
3S thermocouple type S (PtRh-Pt)
1 ?? other please state as additional text
Application
1 Pt 100 measuring ranges small up to 200 C (configurable through solder bridges)
2 Pt 100 measuring ranges large up to 200 C (configurable through solder bridges)
3 Pt 100 measuring ranges for HVAC up to 120 C (configurable through solder bridges)
4 thermocouple measuring ranges (configurable through solder bridges)
2 9 special measuring ranges (not reconfigurable)
Measuring range
NK not configured
configured (standard measuring range) codes see below
3 ?? configured (special measuring range) please state as additional text
T19.30 0
Additional text:
Codes of the configurable standard measuring ranges, special measuring ranges and other thermocouples on request
Pt 100 meas. ranges small Pt 100 meas. ranges large Pt 100 meas. ranges for HVAC
Model T19.30.1P0-1 Model T19.30.1P0-2 Model T19.30.1P0-3
Measuring range Code Measuring range Code Measuring range Code
- 50 ... + 50 C EA - 50 ... + 200 C EL - 30 ... + 30 C CA
0 ... 50 C 1A 0 ... 200 C 1L - 30 ... + 50 C CB
0 ... 100 C 1E 0 ... 250 C 1M 0 ... 60 C 1C
0 ... 120 C 1F 0 ... 300 C 1N 0 ... 80 C 1D
0 ... 150 C 1H 0 ... 350 C 1P 0 ... 100 C 1E
0 ... 200 C 1L 0 ... 400 C 1Q 0 ... 120 C 1F
Specifications and dimensions given in this leaflet represent the state of engineering at the time of printing.
Modifications may take place and materials specified may be replaced by others without prior notice.
Aplicaciones
Instalaciones
Tcnologa de energa
Calefaccin, clima, refrigeracin, ventilacin
Caractersticas
Descripcin
Los transmisores analgicos de la Serie T 19 disponen de La precisin, la monitorizacin y las condiciones ambien-
rangos de medicion configurables y estn diseados para tales admisibles son adecuadas para las aplicaciones
aplicaciones con termorresistencias y con termopares industriales.
aislados. Sencillamente con la colocacin de puentes de
soldadura de estao se puede seleccionar uno de varios La caja para el montaje en la sonda es acoplable en
rangos predeterminados. Por ello estos transmisores son cualquier cabezal DIN de la forma B.
prinicipalmente adecuados para usuarios que quieren
modificar los transmisoresos para adaptar a su aplicacin. Los transmisores de caja para carriles son aptos para los
carriles de las normativa DIN EN 50 022 - 35.
Los transmisores de temperatura convierten la variacin de
la resistencia en funcin de la temperatura o la variacin
de la tensin en el caso de los termopares en una seal
de 4...20 mA. Con esta seal puede realizarse de manera
sencilla la transmisin de los valores de temperatura.
3) Valor de medicin en mA, en caso de cortocircuito entre hilos no 2 y no 3 (operacin del PT100 en conexionado de 2-hilos)
4) Entrada de energa auxiliar protegida contra polaridad inversa
5) Con rango de medicin configurado desde fabrica
6) 0,15 % con rango: 0 ... 50 C, 0 ... 300 C, 0 ... 350 C
7) Rige el valor superior
8) Un termopar no aislado puede causar un circuito de masa si es conectado a un T 19 sin conexin a tierra, provocando una avera del T 19
Diagrama de carga
Carga en RA in
2237440.01
Tensin UB en V
Condiciones ambientales
Typ Clase de clima segn Temperatura Vibracin segn Choque segn
DIN IEC 60 068-2-30 ambiental/almacen DIN IEC 60 068-2-6 DIN IEC 60 068-2-27
T19.10 Cx (-40 +85 C, 5 % bis 95 % humedad relativa) -40 ... +85 C 10 2000 Hz; 5g 10 g
T19.30 Bx (-20 +70 C, 5 % bis 95 % humedad relativa) -20 ... +70 C 10 2000 Hz; 5g 10 g
2226120.02
2299 551.01
Durchgangsbohrung fr M4
Termorresistencia /
Sensor de resistencia Entrada Bucle de 4 20 mA Entrada Bucle de 4 20 mA
3-hilos 2-hilos
1
Entrada Bucle de 4 20 mA
Accesorios para transmisor modelo T19.10, Versin cabezal (pedir aparte) Cdigo
Adaptador, Plstico/Acero inoxidable, Dimensiones: 60 x 20 x 41,6 mm 3593789
Adecuado para TS 35 segn DIN EN 60 715 (DIN EN 50 022 TS 32 segn DIN EN 50 036)
Adaptador, acero zincado, dimensiones: 49 x 8 x 14 mm 3619851
Adecuado para TS 35 segn DIN EN 60 715 (DIN EN 50 022)
Caja de campo, Plstico (ABS), Proteccin IP65, Dimensiones: 82 x 80 x 55 mm (A x L x A) 3301732
Montaje de un transmisor versin cabezal: Temperatura ambiental admisible: -40 C ... +80 C, con dos prensaestopas M16 x 1,5
Tipo de transmisor
T19.10 T19.10 Versin cabezal
1 T19.30 T19.30 Versin carril
Cdigo Ejecucin
2 1P Pt100
3 1 Rangos hasta 200 C 2 Rangos hasta 200 C 3 Rangos sector clima 9 Rango especial
NK no configurado NK no configurado NK no configurado
EA -50 +50 C EL -50 +200 C CA -50 +30 C entre -200 C y
1A 0 50 C 1L 0 200 C CB -30 +50 C 850 C
1E 0 100 C 1M 0 250 C 1C 0 60 C
1F 0 120 C 1N 0 300 C 1D 0 80 C span min.: 20 K
1H 0 150 C 1P 0 350 C 1E 0 100 C span max.: 1050 K
4 1L 0 200 C 1Q 0 400 C 1F 0 120 C
Cdigo Ejecucin
Si No
5 T Z Texto aadido Por favor indicar texto claro!
Thermometers
Service intended
All stainless steel thermometer. Suitable for corrosive media and
environments in chemical process, petroleum and food industry.
The instruments meet the highest standards of measurement
technique.
Nominal size
100 and 160 mm
Temperature element
Inert gas expansion system (non-toxic)
Accuracy
Class 1 per DIN EN 13 190
Working range
Permanent (1 year): measuring range per DIN EN 13 190
Short time (24 h max.): scale range per DIN EN 13 190
Pressure rating of stem
25 bar maximum
Nominal use
DIN EN 13 190
Ingress protection
IP 56 / IP 65 per EN 60 529 / IEC 529
IP 65 per EN 60 529 / IEC 529 for gauges with alarm contacts
Standard features
Distant reading capillary entry
Centre back or radial bottom
Case material
Stainless steel
Scale, measuring ranges 1) , limits of error
Bezel
per DIN EN 13 190, class 1
Cam ring (bayonet type) bezel, natural finish stainless steel
Scale range Scale spacing Measuring range 1) Limit of error
Connection
Plain stem, stainless steel 1.4571 C C C C
- 80 ... + 60 2 - 60 ... + 40 2
Capillary - 60 ... + 40 - 50 ... + 30
Length to user specifications, 2 mm diameter, - 40 ... + 60 - 30 ... + 50
stainless steel 1.4571, bending radius no less than 6 mm
- 30 ... + 50 - 20 ... + 40
Stem - 20 ... + 60 - 10 ... + 50
8 mm diameter, stainless steel 1.4571 1 1
- 20 ... + 80 - 10 ... + 70
The active length of the stem depends upon the diameter and 0 ... 60 +10 ... + 50
the scale range. 0 ... 80 +10 ... + 70
Dial 0 ... 100 +10 ... + 90
White aluminium with black lettering per DIN EN 13 190 0 ... 120 + 10 ... + 110
Pointer 0 ... 160 2 + 20 ... + 140 2
Adjustable black aluminium pointer 0 ... 200 + 20 ... + 180
0 ... 250 + 30 ... + 220 2.5
Window
Laminated safety glass 0 ... 300 + 30 ... + 270
5
0 ... 400 + 50 ... + 350 5
Mounting provisions 0 ... 500 + 50 ... + 450
- 3-hole surface mounting flange (code H), stainless steel 0 ... 600 +100 ... + 500
10 10
- Surface mounting bracket made of die cast aluminium (code M) 0 ... 700 +100 ... + 600
- 3-hole panel mounting flange (code V), stainless steel 1) The measuring range is indicated on the dial by two triangular marks.
- Triangular bezel with clamp (code D), stainless steel Within this range the stated limit of error is valid according to DIN EN 13 190.
2
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 425/458
TM 73.03
Dimensions in mm
3-hole surface mounting flange ( H ) Surface mounting bracket ( M)
3073 165
3073 270
A a a1 a2 a3 b b1 b2 b b2 b b2
100
100 19 22 65 56 50 51 53 88 91 97 100
160
d d1 d2 d3 d6 d7 D1 D2 D3 h
100 116 132 4.8 101 99 107 107 1.400
8 18 7
160 178 196 5.8 161 159 166 172 1.800
1) not suitable for alarm contacts
3
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 426/458
Design of connection Dimensions in mm
Connection 1
Plain stem
Length of stem I = 140, 200, 240 or 290 mm
Stainless steel 1.4571
To suit compression fitting of connection no. 4
Connection 4
Male thread G SW d4 i
Compression fitting (sliding on stem)
G B, G B, M 18 x 1.5, NPT or NPT GB 27 26 14
ca. 40
Minimum insertion length l min approx. 60 mm GB 32 32 16
Length of stem l 1 = variable M 18 x 1.5 24 23 12
Length L = l 1 + 40 mm NPT 22 19
Stainless steel 1.4571
NPT 30 20
Sealing ring
3073 300.02
Ordering information
Model / Nominal size / Scale range / Location of capillary entry / No. and size of connection / Mounting provisions /
9019324 03/2004 GB
Specifications and dimensions given in this leaflet represent the state of engineering at the time of printing.
Modifications may take place and materials specified may be replaced by others without prior notice.
Aplicaciones
Datos caractersticos
T Los instrumentos cumplen con las normas ms
exigentes de la tcnica de medicin.
T Caja y inmersor en acero inoxidable
T Para montaje exterior sobre tubos o recipientes
T Variados diseos de racor y de montaje
T Tambin ejecuciones con caja giratoria y orientable, con
capilar, con sonda de contacto o en ejecuciones con
caja cuadrada.
Descripcin
Esta serie de termmetros est prevista para la utilizacin Por su gran variedad de diseos, los termmetros a dilata-
en construcciones de mquinas, de plantas de proceso y cin de gas Modelo 73, pueden adaptarse a cualquier tipo
de recipientes. de racor a proceso y sitio de proceso. De esta manera, la
Los termmetros a dilatacin de gas con capilar se utilizan ejecucin con la caja giratoria y orientable puede ajustarse
sobre puntos de medicin de acceso difcil y para medida a exactamente en el angulo visual y la ejecucin con sensor
distancia. de contacto puede medir la temperatura sobre tubera de un
dimetro mnimo sin tener contac-to directo con el fluido.
Inmersor, racor a proceso y caja 1) son de acero inoxida-ble. La sonda de contacto est prevista para el montaje exterior
Para una adaptacin ptima al proceso existen variadas sobre tubos y recipientes.
longitudes de inmersor y de racores al proceso. Los term- El montaje debe realizarse de manera que el sensor de de
metros tienen un alto grado de proteccin (IP 65) y pueden contacto est colocado en su entera longitud sobre el punto
instalarse al aire libre, tambin con temperaturas bajo cero. de medicin.
Con llenado de lquido es posible su utilizacin en condi-
ciones de altas vibraciones. 1) No con el Modelo Q 73.144, caja cuadrada en acero galvanizado
Dimensiones en mm
Mod. A73.XXX, racor posterior Mod. R73.XXX, racor abajo Mod. S73.XXX, racor posterior
caja giratoria y orientable
3073068.01
3073076.01
3073254.01
Tabla de dimensiones para modelos A73.XXX y R73.XXX
Tamao Dimensiones en mm Peso
nominal con contacto Modelos 811, 821 o 831 en kg
sin 1 2 contactos 3 contactos
DN b b 1 1) b b 1 1) b b 1 1) d d4 D1 D2 F 1) G SW3)
3073165.02
3073270.01
Modelo F73.XXX, con capilar Modelo F73.XXX, con capilar
y borde de fijacin frontal y aro tipo conche y brida de fijacin 1)
3073289.02
3073297.02
3107884.01
3107892.01
3107906.01
posicin del racor atrs,
caja giratoria y orientable
Caja giratoria aprox. 350
SW = Ancho de llave
Tabla de dimensiones para modelos A73.XXX, R73.XXX y S73.XXX (con sensor de contacto)
Modelo Tamao Dimensiones en mm Peso en kg
nominal Modelos 811, 821 o 831
sin 1 2 contactos 3 contactos
DN b b1 b b1 b b1 D1 D2
3107949.01
3107957.01
Modelo F73.XXX, con sensor de contacto Modelo F73.XXX, con sensor de contacto
con capilar y borde de fijacin frontal con capilar y aro tipo coche y brida de fijacin 1)
3107965.01
3107973.01
General Capllar
3107876.01
El sensor de contacto sirve para el montaje exterior en tubera y
Proteccin contra el
recipientes. pandeo
El montaje debe hacerse de modo que el sensor de contacto
est colocada en toda su longitud sobre el punto de medicin.
La condicin para obtener un resultado correcto de medicin es
un buen acoplamiento trmico del sensor de contacto a la
pared exterior del tubo o del recipiente, adems de una
disipacin de calor muy baja del punto de medicin y el sensor
de contacto al entorno.
Montaje con abrazaderas
Montaje sobre tubos
La geometra del sensor de contacto est ajustada a tubos con
3107922.01
Aislamiento
un dimetro exterior entre 20 y 160 mm.
Para fijar el sensor al tubo, basta con utilizar unas
abrazaderas. El sensor de contacto necesita tener un contacto
metlico directo en el punto de medicin y estar colocada con
fuerza sobre la superficie del tubo.
En caso de que las temperaturas estn debajo de 200 C ,
para optimar el paso del calor entre el sensor de contacto y el
tubo se puede utilizar una pasta de transmisin de calor.
Debe hacerse un aislamiento en el punto de medicin para evitar
errores de transmisin de calor. Este aislamiento necesita tener
una resistencia suficiente a la temperatura. No forma parte del Fijacin con ngulo de acero
volumen de suministro.
3107930.01
Aislamiento
Caja cuadrada, 144 x 144 mm, salida del capilar posterior, excntrica
Caja cuadrada, 144 x 144 mm, salida del capilar posterior, excntrica
Terminales de borne 1 - 4
DIN 41 611
max. 20
3147355G.01
Leyenda:
G Rosca exterior
i Longitud de la rosca collar incluido
SW = AL = ancho de llave
d Dimetro del inmersor
mm
Tamao nominal Racor al proceso Dimensiones en mm
DN G i SW2) d
3073050.03(G2)
3/4 NPT 20 30 - 6; 8; 10; 12
Longitud del inmersor estndar l1: 63, 100, 160, 200, 250 mm
3073300M1
consulta)
Caractersticas de pedido
Modelo / dimetro nominal / rango de medicin / diseo del racor / racor a proceso / longitud I, l1 / longitud del capilar lF /
Opciones
Se pueden realizar modificaciones y cambiar los materiales especificados por otros sin previo aviso.
Las especificaciones y dimensiones indicadas en este folleto representan el estado actual de la tcnica en el momento de su impresin.
9038248 05/2006 Es
1180
Revision: B
M9005 Page 1
IMPORTANT: BEFORE PROCEEDING TO INSTALL AND WIRE THE UNIT, READ AND THOROUGHLY UNDER-
STAND THESE INSTRUCTIONS.
THE SWITCH MODEL NUMBER SHOULD BE CHECKED TO CONFIRM THAT YOU HAVE THE CORRECT HAZ-
ARDOUS AREA RATING FOR YOUR APPLICATION. SEE PRODUCT INDENTIFICATION, PAGE 3.
A B C D E F
SM6000- - - - - - *NOTE: add 30 to part no. for RMS calibration
EX: SW6000-1-31-1-2-0-0, similar to example,
now with RMS calibration.
Example Part Number: SW6000-1-01-1-2-0-0
1 = one limit, triac Velocity Response 1 = 115 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 5 watts, max.
2 = two limits, triacs 0 1 = 1 ips, pk* 2 = 230 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 5 watts, max.
3 = one limit, FET 3 1 = 1 ips, RMS 3 = 24 VDC, 7 watts, max.
4 = two limits, FETs 0 2 = 2 ips, pk*
5 = one limit, triac, with display 3 2 = 2 ips, RMS
6 = two limits, triacs, with display 0 3 = 20 mm/sec, pk*
7 = one limit, FET, with display 3 3 = 20 mm/sec, RMS
8 = two limits, FETs, with display 0 4 = 50 mm/sec, pk*
3 4 = 50 mm/sec, RMS
Displacement Response
5 1 = 20 mils, pk-pk
5 2 = 50 mils, pk-pk
5 3 = 200 microns, pk
5 4 = 500 microns, pk
MOUNTING LOCATIONS
Figure 1
WIRING DIAGRAM
Figure 3
NOTE: 1) Diagrams show all available options, see Product Identification to verify options on your particular unit.
2) On Single Limit Models, use Load Limit Two (2).
NOTE: On CENELEC approved units, a locking set screw must be loosened prior to lid removal.
CAUTION: Conduit seals are highly recommended to prevent the entry of moisture into the switch. Moisture
will damage the switch and void the warranty.
24 VDC: 20 to 28 VDC 115 VAC: 95 to 125 VAC, 50/60 Hz 230VAC: 190 to 250 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Polarity does not need to be observed when wiring for DC power. The preferred method of operation is to con-
tinuously apply power to the SW6000. If power is to be applied as a part of the machine startup sequence it is advis-
able to apply power to the SW6000 30 seconds prior to starting the machine in order to allow the electronics circuits
to stabilize. This is particularly important if the adjustable startup delay option is utilized and the delay is set to less
than 20 seconds.
TYPICAL CONTROL CIRCUITS SW6000 w/AC Power Wired to Interrupt Motor Starter (series connection)
a. Set each SW6000 for N.C. (normally closed) operation. (See Figure 3)
FIGURE 6
Measured mA - 4mA
FORMULA: 20mA - 4mA X Full scale vibration = Actual vibration
Figure 7
Figure 8
If it is desired to determine either the acceleration or velocity amplitude when one measurement is unknown,
the following formulas can be employed.
If g's (A) are known and you wish to determine the velocity output:
If gs (A) are known and you wish to determine the displacement output:
The switch outputs (triacs or FETs) are configured at the factory for latching operation. The switch outputs can be
configured for non-latching operation so they automatically reset when the vibration level falls below the alarm limit
threshold. To do this, remove power to the unit. Remove the transmitter cover and the display board if present.
Refer to Figure 9. (Move both jumpers to the auto position). Reassemble the display board and transmitter
cover. The switch outputs will now reset when the vibration level falls below the alarm limits.
FIGURE 9
CAUTION: Disconnect or disarm the machine alarms and/or shutdown circuits prior to testing the vibration
switch outputs.
a) Operation of the limit triac/FET and the attached relay can be verified by toggling the NO/NC switch.
b) The limit setting can be rotated to the minimum (-10%) setting in order to exercise all of the limit control logic and
trip delay circuits. The limit triac/FET should operate and the limit LED should turn on after the set trip delay expires.
REMEMBER to return the limit setting to the original position after this test.
c) If the LED is lit but the limit is not functioning, check to make sure the triac/FET load is wired properly and power
is present at the limit terminal block and relay. CAUTION: voltages at the limit switch terminal block can be
dangerous. Exercise caution when checking for voltage at the terminal block. For AC loads, ensure the minimum
current through the load is 35 mA for temperatures above 25C or 60 mA below 25C. For DC loads, ensure proper
wiring polarity has been observed.
2.0 The unit appears to be functioning, but the 4-20 mA operation is in question.
a) Ensure that the current loop is wired properly and that the total loop resistance does not exceed 600 ohms. The
Model SW6000 4-20 mA circuit is a current source. A voltage source (power supply) must not be used in the circuit.
b) Verify current output with separate current meter connected in series with the 4-20 mA output and the receiving
instrument input. Verify the current is correct. Current output with zero vibration should be 4.0 mA. A 20 mA current
represents full scale vibration. Refer to Section B, 1.7
3.0 The unit does not respond to a vibration input during the first few seconds of operation.
a) The startup time delay circuit prevents the transmitter from reacting to a vibration input during the startup delay
time period. The standard time delay is fixed at 30 seconds. If the unit has the optional variable startup delay, it can
be varied from 1 to 30 seconds. The current output is held at 4.0 mA and the display is held at 000 until the startup
time delay has expired.
4.0 The unit trips the limits shortly after applying power to the unit.
a) Units with an adjustable startup time delay which is set close to the minimum setting can have the limits trip at
power up. This is due to the settling time of the circuitry in the Model SW6000 switch. If a short startup delay is de-
sired, it is suggested that power first be applied to the unit for a minimum of 20 seconds. Power may also be applied
continuously. The limits may need to be reset depending on the particular application. Afterwards, the machine can
be started in a normal fashion.
a) The vibration output can be verified by placing a separate vibration pickup near the base of the Model SW6000
and comparing the two readings. Remember that the vibration meter or analyzer must utilize true RMS detection
and have similar frequency response characteristics. Even then, significant differences can exist due to dissimilar
sensor orientations, handheld versus rigid mounting, meter or analyzer time constant differences, and other factors.
The calibration of the Model SW6000 should be verified on a yearly basis as a minimum.
b) Alternately, the unit can be removed and placed on a calibrated shaker system in order to verify the calibration.
Metrix Instrument Co. can provide factory calibration traceable to NIST standards.
a) Ensure that all wiring connections to the terminal block are correct, terminal screws are tight and that the correct
voltage is present at the terminal block power (Vin) terminals. DC voltage polarity is arbitrary. Refer to Figure 4 and
Product Identification page 2 for specific details. If power is applied, the LCD display (if present) should be function-
ing, and the current output should be between 4.0 and 20.0 mA.
i
: ! - s : t
I . :!
_!.\\\\!/ !
i
l l !_ E
E
::!ffi+RE!
a
I
i I I
f]+lrt1 i : i ! i 3ir- i
::l!i s
t:T+l+ q!r+l
ral;ETri=l ;i:ii,
'iiii;
! l : ! !
:i"i! i
t
I
- l_1' 1' T1f
l*]+l+t1r-l
;lr:;i I
E-l"r.l=r.1-iTl 1i;iii 3
I ( (
z
:
aza!
i i r q
a
Doc. PBPNU5999001
3
T;l;l:T:J
.lYTi:li
C-l"r-l-r^ET+l E .. l
El"rhl;FFl
! l"FE
l-h.ATlT -"r
E E;I
"lTTIlf si 1i-
- lltle Tl r;
" t "t "t - rT t i i
EFFiTf] eg
.l: lTl.1'Ti<
lt l.i Fl flrr
Pag. 456/458
q; glq 7.
-srv,-
6Q
t-"
:r J
o
Doc. PBPNU5999001
)
"l "l
O;
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 457/458
Doc. PBPNU5999001 Pag. 458/458